*** empty log message ***
[bpt/emacs.git] / etc / NEWS
CommitLineData
d9c9b920 1GNU Emacs NEWS -- history of user-visible changes. 2000-10-12
424d8b44 2Copyright (C) 1999, 2000 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
a933dad1
DL
3See the end for copying conditions.
4
5Please send Emacs bug reports to bug-gnu-emacs@gnu.org.
3787e12e 6For older news, see the file ONEWS
a933dad1
DL
7
8\f
251584f3
DL
9* Installation Changes in Emacs 21.1
10
f4988be7
GM
11** Support for GNU/Linux on IA64 machines has been added.
12
424d8b44
DL
13** Support for LynxOS has been added.
14
1fa28578
GM
15** `movemail' defaults to supporting POP. You can turn this off using
16the --without-pop configure option, should that be necessary.
17
18** There are new configure options associated with the support for
163ea954
RS
19images and toolkit scrollbars. Use the --help option in `configure'
20to list them.
6344985d 21
d5483ab1 22** There is a new configure option `--without-xim' that instructs
d874e913 23Emacs to not use X Input Methods (XIM), if these are available.
5ed8d5af
DL
24
25** There is a new configure option `--disable-largefile' to omit
26Unix-98-style support for large files if that is available.
27
28** You can build a 64-bit Emacs for SPARC/Solaris systems which
60dd7e0e 29support 64-bit executables and also on Irix 6.5. This increases the
8628686a
DL
30maximum buffer size. See etc/MACHINES for instructions. Changes to
31build on other 64-bit systems should be straightforward modulo any
32necessary changes to unexec.
f4988be7 33
d9c9b920
DL
34** Note that the MS-Windows port does not yet implement various of the
35new display features described below.
36
e90813b8 37** This version can be built for the Macintosh, but does not implement
a7c13351 38all of the new display features described below. The port currently
d69aa2e3
EZ
39lacks unexec, asynchronous processes, and networking support. See the
40"Emacs and the Mac OS" appendix in the Emacs manual, for the
41description of aspects specific to the Mac.
d9c9b920 42
1fa28578
GM
43\f
44* Changes in Emacs 21.1
45
eb1b0c74
GM
46+++
47** The new user-option `even-window-heights' can be set to nil
48to prevent `display-buffer' from evening out window heights.
49
7495f7ca
EZ
50+++
51** The new command `msdos-set-mouse-buttons' forces Emacs to behave
52as if the mouse had a specified number of buttons. This comes handy
53with mice that don't report their number of buttons correctly. One
54example is the wheeled mice, which report 3 buttons, but clicks on the
55middle button are not passed to the MS-DOS version of Emacs.
56
1636ca09 57+++
a01cfb77
GM
58** The default for user-option `next-line-add-newlines' has been
59changed to nil, i.e. C-n will no longer add newlines at the end of a
60buffer by default.
61
c607d53d 62** The new command M-x delete-trailing-whitespace RET will delete the
346598f1 63trailing whitespace within the current restriction. You can also add
c607d53d
SS
64this function to `write-file-hooks' or `local-write-file-hooks'.
65
4104194e
GM
66** When visiting a file with M-x find-file-literally, no newlines will
67be added to the end of the buffer because of `require-final-newline'.
68
c6f01e00
MB
69** auto-compression mode is no longer enabled just by loading jka-compr.el.
70To control it, set `auto-compression-mode' via Custom or use the
71`auto-compression-mode' command.
72
4c724b32
DL
73** `browse-url-gnome-moz' is a new option for
74`browse-url-browser-function', invoking Mozilla in GNOME.
75
b856f39c 76+++
068127d6
GM
77** The functions `keep-lines', `flush-lines' and `how-many' now
78operate on the active region in Transient Mark mode.
79
fd06c7da
MB
80** The header line in an Info buffer is now displayed as an emacs header-line
81(which is like a mode-line, but at the top of the window), so that it
82remains visible even when the buffer has been scrolled. This behavior
83may be disabled by customizing the option `Info-use-header-line'.
84
8ac08dea 85+++
62c273d7
DL
86** `gnus-user-agent' is a new possibility for `mail-user-agent'. It
87is like `message-user-agent', but with all the Gnus paraphernalia.
88
89+++
90** The recommended way of using Iswitchb is via the new global minor
91mode `iswitchb-mode'.
92
8ac08dea 93+++
f393cf90
DL
94** Gnus changes.
95
96The Gnus NEWS entries are short, but they reflect sweeping changes in
97four areas: Article display treatment, MIME treatment,
98internationalization and mail-fetching.
99
100*** The mail-fetching functions have changed. See the manual for the
101many details. In particular, all procmail fetching variables are gone.
102
103If you used procmail like in
104
105(setq nnmail-use-procmail t)
106(setq nnmail-spool-file 'procmail)
107(setq nnmail-procmail-directory "~/mail/incoming/")
108(setq nnmail-procmail-suffix "\\.in")
109
327652be 110this now has changed to
f393cf90
DL
111
112(setq mail-sources
113 '((directory :path "~/mail/incoming/"
114 :suffix ".in")))
115
116More information is available in the info doc at Select Methods ->
117Getting Mail -> Mail Sources
118
119*** Gnus is now a MIME-capable reader. This affects many parts of
120Gnus, and adds a slew of new commands. See the manual for details.
31446945
KH
121Separate MIME packages like RMIME, mime-compose etc., will probably no
122longer work; remove them and use the native facilities.
123
657706fa
DL
124The FLIM/SEMI package still works with Emacs 21, but if you want to
125use the native facilities, you must remove any mailcap.el[c] that was
126installed by FLIM/SEMI version 1.13 or earlier.
f393cf90 127
60dd7e0e 128*** Gnus has also been multilingualized. This also affects too many
4301cf66
DL
129parts of Gnus to summarize here, and adds many new variables. There
130are built-in facilities equivalent to those of gnus-mule.el, which is
131now just a compatibility layer.
f393cf90
DL
132
133*** gnus-auto-select-first can now be a function to be
134called to position point.
135
136*** The user can now decide which extra headers should be included in
137summary buffers and NOV files.
138
139*** `gnus-article-display-hook' has been removed. Instead, a number
140of variables starting with `gnus-treat-' have been added.
141
142*** The Gnus posting styles have been redone again and now work in a
143subtly different manner.
144
145*** New web-based backends have been added: nnslashdot, nnwarchive
146and nnultimate. nnweb has been revamped, again, to keep up with
147ever-changing layouts.
148
149*** Gnus can now read IMAP mail via nnimap.
150
72190b84 151*** There is image support of various kinds and some sound support.
f393cf90
DL
152
153** When your terminal can't display characters from some of the ISO
d1e68bce
DL
1548859 character sets but can display Latin-1, you can display
155more-or-less mnemonic sequences of ASCII/Latin-1 characters instead of
156empty boxes (under a window system) or question marks (not under a
157window system). Customize the option `latin1-display' to turn this
158on.
159
ba9eeda1
GM
160** The new user-option `find-file-suppress-same-file-warnings' can be
161set to suppress warnings ``X and Y are the same file'' when visiting a
162file that is already visited under a different name.
163
42ac0ae5
GM
164** The new user-option `electric-help-shrink-window' can be set to
165nil to prevent adjusting the help window size to the buffer size.
166
167** Emacs now checks for recursive loads of Lisp files. If the
168recursion depth exceeds `recursive-load-depth-limit', an error is
169signaled.
170
ba9eeda1 171** The Strokes package has been updated. If your Emacs has XPM
dab96841
DL
172support, you can use it for pictographic editing. In Strokes mode,
173use C-mouse-2 to compose a complex stoke and insert it into the
174buffer. You can encode or decode a strokes buffer with new commands
175M-x strokes-encode-buffer and M-x strokes-decode-buffer. There is a
176new command M-x strokes-list-strokes.
177
b941a14b 178+++
ba9eeda1 179** New command M-x describe-character-set reads a character set name
eb27839a 180and displays information about that.
b941a14b 181
ba9eeda1 182** When an error is signaled during the loading of the user's init
83b6997f
GM
183file, Emacs now pops up the *Messages* buffer.
184
d7b38c05 185** Polish and German translations of Emacs' reference card have been
6917e6bb 186added. They are named `pl-refcard.tex' and `de-refcard.tex'.
d7b38c05
GM
187Postscript files are included.
188
657706fa
DL
189** An `Emacs Survival Guide', etc/survival.tex, is available.
190
d7b38c05
GM
191** A reference card for Dired has been added. Its name is
192`dired-ref.tex'.
193
25ad1371
GM
194** The new variable `auto-mode-interpreter-regexp' contains a regular
195expression matching interpreters, for file mode determination.
196
197This regular expression is matched against the first line of a file to
198determine the file's mode in `set-auto-mode' when Emacs can't deduce a
199mode from the file's name. If it matches, the file is assumed to be
200interpreted by the interpreter matched by the second group of the
201regular expression. The mode is then determined as the mode
202associated with that interpreter in `interpreter-mode-alist'.
203
b856f39c 204+++
f0298744
DL
205** C-down-mouse-3 is bound differently. Now if the menu bar is not
206displayed it pops up a menu containing the items which would be on the
207menu bar. If the menu bar is displayed, it pops up the major mode
208menu or the Edit menu if there is no major mode menu.
209
9a8d84ca
DL
210** Variable `load-path' is no longer customizable because it contains
211a version-dependent component.
212
5f368d29
GM
213** The new user-option `delete-key-deletes-forward' can be set to
214let the Delete function key delete forward instead of backward.
215
216On window systems, the default value of this option is chosen
217according to the keyboard used. If the keyboard has both a Backspace
218key and a Delete key, and both are mapped to their usual meanings, the
219option's default value is set to t, so that Backspace can be used to
220delete backward, and Delete can be used used to delete forward
221
222If not running under a window system, setting this option accomplishes
223a similar effect by mapping C-h, which is usually generated by the
224Backspace key, to DEL, and by mapping DEL to C-d via
225`keyboard-translate'. The former functionality of C-h is available on
226the F1 key. You should probably not use this setting if you don't
227have both Backspace, Delete and F1 keys.
228
229Programmatically, you can call function
230delete-key-deletes-forward-mode to toggle the behavior of the Delete
231key.
d76c03ea 232
3b4fa1b2
DL
233** Item Save Options on the Options menu allows saving options set
234using that menu.
235
40e857ea 236** New function executable-make-buffer-file-executable-if-script-p is
424d8b44 237suitable as an after-save-hook as an alternative to `executable-chmod'.
40e857ea 238
beb2eb00 239+++
c08398de
DL
240** The most preferred coding-system is now used to save a buffer if
241buffer-file-coding-system is `undecided' and it is safe for the buffer
242contents. (The most preferred is set by set-language-environment or
243by M-x prefer-coding-system.) Thus if you visit an ASCII file and
244insert a non-ASCII character from your current language environment,
245the file will be saved silently with the appropriate coding.
246Previously you would be prompted for a safe coding system.
247
db7a3ede 248+++
3d6cd763
GM
249** New variable `inhibit-iso-escape-detection' determines if Emacs'
250coding system detection algorithm should pay attention to ISO2022's
251escape sequences. If this variable is non-nil, the algorithm ignores
252such escape sequences. The default value is nil, and it is
253recommended not to change it except for the special case that you
07b14857 254always want to read any escape code verbatim. If you just want to
3d6cd763 255read a specific file without decoding escape codes, use C-x RET c
07b14857
KH
256(`universal-coding-system-argument'). For instance, C-x RET c latin-1
257RET C-x C-f filename RET.
26ae8525 258
0b8a3a6d
DL
259** Variable `default-korean-keyboard' is initialized properly from the
260environment variable `HANGUL_KEYBOARD_TYPE'.
261
424d8b44 262+++
0b8a3a6d
DL
263** C-u C-x = provides detailed information about the character at
264point in a pop-up window.
265
6d35b49f 266+++
0b8a3a6d
DL
267** New command M-x list-charset-chars reads a character set name and
268displays all characters in that character set.
269
270** M-x set-terminal-coding-system (C-x RET t) now allows CCL-based
271coding systems such as cpXXX and cyrillic-koi8.
272
a4067978 273+++
5cb6a58e 274** M-; now calls comment-dwim which tries to do something clever based
a4067978 275on the context. M-x kill-comment is now an alias to comment-kill,
a5e350c9
SM
276defined in newcomment.el. You can choose different styles of region
277commenting with the variable `comment-style'.
5cb6a58e 278
424d8b44 279+++
a1b8d58b
GM
280** The function `getenv' is now callable interactively.
281
6e417ca5
DL
282** The many obsolete language `setup-...-environment' commands have
283been removed -- use `set-language-environment'.
284
424d8b44 285+++
5898e075
DL
286** New user options `display-time-mail-face' and
287`display-time-use-mail-icon' control the appearance of mode-line mail
288indicator used by the display-time package. On a suitable display the
289indicator can be an icon and is mouse-sensitive.
290
424d8b44 291+++
abfcc168
GM
292** Emacs' auto-save list files are now by default stored in a
293sub-directory `.emacs.d/auto-save-list/' of the user's home directory.
874d1079 294(On MS-DOS, this subdirectory's name is `_emacs.d/auto-save.list/'.)
abfcc168
GM
295You can customize `auto-save-list-prefix' to change this location.
296
424d8b44 297+++
cc181e95
GM
298** On window-systems, additional space can be put between text lines
299on the display using several methods
300
424d8b44 301+++
cc181e95
GM
302- By setting frame parameter `line-spacing' to PIXELS. PIXELS must be
303a positive integer, and specifies that PIXELS number of pixels should
304be put below text lines on the affected frame or frames.
305
424d8b44 306+++
cc181e95 307- By setting X resource `lineSpacing', class `LineSpacing'. This is
5820dead 308equivalent to specifying the frame parameter.
cc181e95 309
da4496b6 310- By specifying `--line-spacing=N' or `-lsp N' on the command line.
cc181e95
GM
311
312- By setting buffer-local variable `line-spacing'. The meaning is
313the same, but applies to the a particular buffer only.
314
424d8b44 315+++
3b4fa1b2 316** The new command `clone-indirect-buffer' can be used to create
1c459486 317an indirect buffer that is a twin copy of the current buffer. The
3b4fa1b2 318command `clone-indirect-buffer-other-window', bound to C-x 4 c,
1c459486 319does the same but displays the indirect buffer in another window.
0daee095 320
424d8b44 321+++
176256a1 322** New user options `backup-directory-alist' and
3bbc50af
DL
323`make-backup-file-name-function' control the placement of backups,
324typically in a single directory or in an invisible sub-directory.
176256a1 325
dd0add8e
DL
326** New commands iso-iso2sgml and iso-sgml2iso convert between Latin-1
327characters and the corresponding SGML (HTML) entities.
328
bf3ba9ac 329+++
699238d9
GM
330** Emacs now refuses to load compiled Lisp files which weren't
331compiled with Emacs. Set `load-dangerous-libraries' to t to change
332this behavior.
333
334The reason for this change is an incompatible change in XEmacs' byte
335compiler. Files compiled with XEmacs can contain byte codes that let
336Emacs dump core.
337
424d8b44 338+++
699238d9 339** New X resources recognized
100b3cbb 340
7233c5bd
GM
341*** The X resource `synchronous', class `Synchronous', specifies
342whether Emacs should run in synchronous mode. Synchronous mode
343is useful for debugging X problems.
344
345Example:
346
699238d9 347 emacs.synchronous: true
7233c5bd 348
100b3cbb
GM
349*** The X resource `visualClass, class `VisualClass', specifies the
350visual Emacs should use. The resource's value should be a string of
351the form `CLASS-DEPTH', where CLASS is the name of the visual class,
352and DEPTH is the requested color depth as a decimal number. Valid
353visual class names are
354
355 TrueColor
356 PseudoColor
357 DirectColor
358 StaticColor
359 GrayScale
360 StaticGray
361
362Visual class names specified as X resource are case-insensitive, i.e.
363`pseudocolor', `Pseudocolor' and `PseudoColor' all have the same
364meaning.
365
366The program `xdpyinfo' can be used to list the visual classes
367supported on your display, and which depths they have. If
368`visualClass' is not specified, Emacs uses the display's default
369visual.
370
371Example:
372
699238d9 373 emacs.visualClass: TrueColor-8
100b3cbb
GM
374
375*** The X resource `privateColormap', class `PrivateColormap',
376specifies that Emacs should use a private colormap if it is using the
377default visual, and that visual is of class PseudoColor. Recognized
378resource values are `true' or `on'.
379
380Example:
381
699238d9 382 emacs.privateColormap: true
100b3cbb 383
0d0c76b8
EZ
384** The menu bar configuration has changed. The new configuration is
385more CUA-compliant. The most significant change is that Options is
386now a separate menu-bar item, with Mule and Customize as its submenus.
387
e921a911 388+++
42088c12 389** User-option `show-cursor-in-non-selected-windows' controls how to
c60ea02e 390display the cursor in non-selected windows. If nil, no cursor is
42088c12
GM
391shown, if non-nil a hollow box cursor is shown. This option can
392be customized.
c60ea02e 393
424d8b44 394+++
31047e0d
DL
395** The variable `echo-keystrokes' may now have a floating point value.
396
424d8b44 397+++
b02786f9
GM
398** C-x 5 1 runs the new command delete-other-frames which deletes
399all frames except the selected one.
400
3261c1d8
DL
401** If your init file is compiled (.emacs.elc), `user-init-file' is set
402to the source name (.emacs.el), if that exists, after loading it.
403
ffe36136 404** The help string specified for a menu-item whose definition contains
aa78a4f3
EZ
405the property `:help HELP' is now displayed under X, on MS-Windows, and
406MS-DOS, either in the echo area or with tooltips. Many standard menus
407displayed by Emacs now have help strings.
408
0292b49f 409+++
aa78a4f3
EZ
410** Highlighting of mouse-sensitive regions is now supported in the
411MS-DOS version of Emacs.
ffe36136 412
559cee90
DL
413** New user option `read-mail-command' specifies a command to use to
414read mail from the menu etc.
415
480b5773 416+++
271b4185
GM
417** Hexl contains a new command `hexl-insert-hex-string' which inserts
418a string of hexadecimal numbers read from the mini-buffer.
419
0daee095
GM
420** Changes in Texinfo mode.
421
a5e350c9 422*** A couple of new key bindings have been added for inserting Texinfo
0daee095
GM
423macros
424
425 Key binding Macro
426 -------------------------
427 C-c C-c C-s @strong
428 C-c C-c C-e @emph
105602b1 429 C-c C-c u @uref
0daee095 430 C-c C-c q @quotation
105602b1 431 C-c C-c m @email
a5e350c9
SM
432 C-c C-o @<block> ... @end <block>
433 M-RET @item
434
435*** The " key now inserts either " or `` or '' depending on context.
0daee095 436
559cee90
DL
437** Changes in Outline mode.
438
439There is now support for Imenu to index headings. A new command
440`outline-headers-as-kill' copies the visible headings in the region to
441the kill ring, e.g. to produce a table of contents.
442
327652be 443** Changes to Emacs Server
7a912f63 444
c0a8c108
EZ
445+++
446*** The new option `server-kill-new-buffers' specifies what to do
7a912f63
GM
447with buffers when done with them. If non-nil, the default, buffers
448are killed, unless they were already present before visiting them with
449Emacs Server. If nil, `server-temp-file-regexp' specifies which
450buffers to kill, as before.
451
452Please note that only buffers are killed that still have a client,
c0a8c108 453i.e. buffers visited with `emacsclient --no-wait' are never killed in
7a912f63
GM
454this way.
455
956777b3
GM
456** Changes to Show Paren mode.
457
458*** Overlays used by Show Paren mode now use a priority property.
459The new user option show-paren-priority specifies the priority to
460use. Default is 1000.
461
f6989277 462+++
404fa7d6
DL
463** New command M-x check-parens can be used to find unbalanced paren
464groups and strings in buffers in Lisp mode (or other modes).
465
424d8b44
DL
466+++
467** You can now easily create new *Info* buffers using either
468M-x clone-buffer, C-u m <entry> RET or C-u g <entry> RET.
469M-x clone-buffer can also be used on *Help* and several other special
470buffers.
8964fec7 471
424d8b44 472+++
39783d73
WP
473** Emacs can now support 'wheeled' mice (such as the MS IntelliMouse)
474under XFree86. To enable this, simply put (mwheel-install) in your
475.emacs file.
476
477The variables `mwheel-follow-mouse' and `mwheel-scroll-amount'
478determine where and by how much buffers are scrolled.
479
d35fce81
GM
480** Listing buffers with M-x list-buffers (C-x C-b) now shows
481abbreviated file names. Abbreviations can be customized by changing
482`directory-abbrev-alist'.
483
a933dad1
DL
484** Faces and frame parameters.
485
486There are four new faces `scroll-bar', `border', `cursor' and `mouse'.
487Setting the frame parameters `scroll-bar-foreground' and
488`scroll-bar-background' sets foreground and background color of face
489`scroll-bar' and vice versa. Setting frame parameter `border-color'
490sets the background color of face `border' and vice versa. Likewise
491for frame parameters `cursor-color' and face `cursor', and frame
492parameter `mouse-color' and face `mouse'.
493
494Changing frame parameter `font' sets font-related attributes of the
495`default' face and vice versa. Setting frame parameters
79214ddf 496`foreground-color' or `background-color' sets the colors of the
a933dad1
DL
497`default' face and vice versa.
498
d80061fa 499+++
f77a4a8a
GM
500** New face `menu'.
501
502The face `menu' can be used to change colors and font of Emacs' menus.
503Setting the font of LessTif/Motif menus is currently not supported;
504attempts to set the font are ignored in this case.
505
424d8b44 506+++
a933dad1
DL
507** New frame parameter `screen-gamma' for gamma correction.
508
509The new frame parameter `screen-gamma' specifies gamma-correction for
510colors. Its value may be nil, the default, in which case no gamma
511correction occurs, or a number > 0, usually a float, that specifies
512the screen gamma of a frame's display.
513
514PC monitors usually have a screen gamma of 2.2. smaller values result
515in darker colors. You might want to try a screen gamma of 1.5 for LCD
516color displays. The viewing gamma Emacs uses is 0.4545. (1/2.2).
517
518The X resource name of this parameter is `screenGamma', class
519`ScreenGamma'.
520
521** Emacs has a new redisplay engine.
522
523The new redisplay handles characters of variable width and height.
524Italic text can be used without redisplay problems. Fonts containing
525oversized characters, i.e. characters larger than the logical height
526of a font can be used. Images of various formats can be displayed in
527the text.
528
529** Emacs has a new face implementation.
530
531The new faces no longer fundamentally use X font names to specify the
532font. Instead, each face has several independent attributes--family,
533height, width, weight and slant--that it may or may not specify.
534These attributes can be merged from various faces, and then together
535specify a font.
536
537Faces are supported on terminals that can display color or fonts.
538These terminal capabilities are auto-detected. Details can be found
539under Lisp changes, below.
540
541** New default font is Courier 12pt.
542
424d8b44
DL
543+++
544** When using a windowing terminal, each Emacs window now has a cursor
545of its own. When the window is selected, the cursor is solid;
546otherwise, it is hollow.
a933dad1
DL
547
548** Bitmap areas to the left and right of windows are used to display
549truncation marks, continuation marks, overlay arrows and alike. The
550foreground, background, and stipple of these areas can be changed by
551customizing face `fringe'.
552
8d0f00fd
MB
553** The mode line under X is now drawn with shadows by default.
554You can change its appearance by modifying the face `mode-line'.
555
556The variable `mode-line-inverse-video', which was used in older
557versions of emacs to make the mode-line stand out, now defaults to nil,
558and its use is deprecated.
a933dad1
DL
559
560** LessTif support.
561
424d8b44
DL
562Emacs now runs with the LessTif toolkit (see <http://www.lesstif.org>).
563You will need a version 0.88.1 or later.
a933dad1
DL
564
565** Toolkit scroll bars.
566
567Emacs now uses toolkit scrollbars if available. When configured for
568LessTif/Motif, it will use that toolkit's scrollbar. Otherwise, when
569configured for Lucid and Athena widgets, it will use the Xaw3d scroll
570bar if Xaw3d is available. You can turn off the use of toolkit scroll
571bars by specifying `--with-toolkit-scroll-bars=no' when configuring
572Emacs.
573
574When you encounter problems with the Xaw3d scroll bar, watch out how
575Xaw3d is compiled on your system. If the Makefile generated from
576Xaw3d's Imakefile contains a `-DNARROWPROTO' compiler option, and your
577Emacs system configuration file `s/your-system.h' does not contain a
578define for NARROWPROTO, you might consider adding it. Take
579`s/freebsd.h' as an example.
580
581Alternatively, if you don't have access to the Xaw3d source code, take
582a look at your system's imake configuration file, for example in the
583directory `/usr/X11R6/lib/X11/config' (paths are different on
584different systems). You will find files `*.cf' there. If your
585system's cf-file contains a line like `#define NeedWidePrototypes NO',
586add a `#define NARROWPROTO' to your Emacs system configuration file.
587
588The reason for this is that one Xaw3d function uses `double' or
589`float' function parameters depending on the setting of NARROWPROTO.
590This is not a problem when Imakefiles are used because each system's
591image configuration file contains the necessary information. Since
592Emacs doesn't use imake, this has do be done manually.
593
594** Toggle buttons and radio buttons in menus.
595
596When compiled with LessTif (or Motif) support, Emacs uses toolkit
597widgets for radio and toggle buttons in menus. When configured for
598Lucid, Emacs draws radio buttons and toggle buttons similar to Motif.
599
424d8b44 600+++
a933dad1
DL
601** Highlighting of trailing whitespace.
602
603When `show-trailing-whitespace' is non-nil, Emacs displays trailing
604whitespace in the face `trailing-whitespace'. Trailing whitespace is
605defined as spaces or tabs at the end of a line. To avoid busy
606highlighting when entering new text, trailing whitespace is not
607displayed if point is at the end of the line containing the
608whitespace.
609
6e612d4d 610+++
a933dad1
DL
611** Busy-cursor.
612
613Emacs can optionally display a busy-cursor under X. You can turn the
614display on or off by customizing group `cursor'.
615
424d8b44 616+++
a933dad1
DL
617** Blinking cursor
618
619M-x blink-cursor-mode toggles a blinking cursor under X and on
620terminals having terminal capabilities `vi', `vs', and `ve'. Blinking
621and related parameters like frequency and delay can be customized in
622the group `cursor'.
623
8ac08dea 624+++
a933dad1
DL
625** New font-lock support mode `jit-lock-mode'.
626
627This support mode is roughly equivalent to `lazy-lock' but is
628generally faster. It supports stealth and deferred fontification.
629See the documentation of the function `jit-lock-mode' for more
630details.
631
632Font-lock uses jit-lock-mode as default support mode, so you don't
633have to do anything to activate it.
634
635** Tabs and variable-width text.
636
637Tabs are now displayed with stretch properties; the width of a tab is
638defined as a multiple of the normal character width of a frame, and is
639independent of the fonts used in the text where the tab appears.
640Thus, tabs can be used to line up text in different fonts.
641
642** Enhancements of the Lucid menu bar
643
424d8b44 644+++
a933dad1
DL
645*** The Lucid menu bar now supports the resource "margin".
646
647 emacs.pane.menubar.margin: 5
648
79dd1637
RS
649The default margin is 4 which makes the menu bar appear like the
650LessTif/Motif one.
a933dad1 651
79dd1637
RS
652*** Arrows that indicate sub-menus are now drawn with shadows, as in
653LessTif and Motif.
a933dad1 654
34d90e29 655+++
a933dad1
DL
656** Hscrolling in C code.
657
cc181e95
GM
658Horizontal scrolling now happens automatically if
659`automatic-hscrolling' is set (the default). This setting can be
660customized.
a933dad1 661
8ac08dea 662+++
a933dad1
DL
663** Tool bar support.
664
665Emacs supports a tool bar at the top of a frame under X. For details
d9c9b920
DL
666of how to define a tool bar, see the page describing Lisp-level
667changes. Tool-bar global minor mode controls whether or not it is
b97cd2cc
DL
668displayed and is on by default. The appearance of the bar is improved
669if Emacs has been built with XPM image support. Otherwise monochrome
670icons will be used.
671
672To make the tool bar more useful, we need contributions of extra icons
673for specific modes (with copyright assignments). Contributions would
674also be useful manually to touch up some of the PBM icons.
a933dad1 675
424d8b44 676+++
a933dad1
DL
677** Mouse-sensitive mode line.
678
679Different parts of the mode line under X have been made
680mouse-sensitive. Moving the mouse to a mouse-sensitive part in the mode
681line changes the appearance of the mouse pointer to an arrow, and help
682about available mouse actions is displayed either in the echo area, or
683in the tooltip window if you have enabled one.
684
685Currently, the following actions have been defined:
686
687- Mouse-1 on the buffer name in the mode line switches between two
688buffers.
689
690- Mouse-2 on the buffer-name switches to the next buffer, and
691M-mouse-2 switches to the previous buffer in the buffer list.
692
693- Mouse-3 on the buffer-name displays a buffer menu.
694
424d8b44
DL
695- Mouse-2 on the read-only or modified status in the mode line (`%' or
696`*') toggles the status.
a933dad1
DL
697
698- Mouse-3 on the mode name display a minor-mode menu.
699
700** LessTif/Motif file selection dialog.
701
702When Emacs is configured to use LessTif or Motif, reading a file name
e33b0397 703from a menu will pop up a file selection dialog if `use-dialog-box' is
a933dad1
DL
704non-nil.
705
706** Emacs can display faces on TTY frames.
707
708Emacs automatically detects terminals that are able to display colors.
709Faces with a weight greater than normal are displayed extra-bright, if
710the terminal supports it. Faces with a weight less than normal and
711italic faces are displayed dimmed, if the terminal supports it.
712Underlined faces are displayed underlined if possible. Other face
163ea954
RS
713attributes such as `overline', `strike-through', and `box' are ignored
714on terminals.
a933dad1 715
54a9404d
EZ
716The command-line options `-fg COLOR', `-bg COLOR', and `-rv' are now
717supported on character terminals.
718
a933dad1
DL
719** Sound support
720
2f516940 721Emacs supports playing sound files on GNU/Linux and FreeBSD (Voxware
0b50c67f 722driver and native BSD driver, a.k.a. Luigi's driver). Currently
2f516940 723supported file formats are RIFF-WAVE (*.wav) and Sun Audio (*.au).
a933dad1 724
424d8b44 725+++
a933dad1
DL
726** A new variable, backup-by-copying-when-privileged-mismatch, gives
727the highest file uid for which backup-by-copying-when-mismatch will be
728forced on. The assumption is that uids less than or equal to this
729value are special uids (root, bin, daemon, etc.--not real system
730users) and that files owned by these users should not change ownership,
731even if your system policy allows users other than root to edit them.
732
733The default is 200; set the variable to nil to disable the feature.
734
0e18b431 735+++
a933dad1
DL
736** A block cursor can be drawn as wide as the glyph under it under X.
737
738As an example: if a block cursor is over a tab character, it will be
739drawn as wide as that tab on the display. To do this, set
740`x-stretch-cursor' to a non-nil value.
741
fdd8bb68 742+++
a933dad1
DL
743** Empty display lines at the end of a buffer may be marked with a
744bitmap (this is similar to the tilde displayed by vi).
745
746This behavior is activated by setting the buffer-local variable
747`indicate-empty-lines' to a non-nil value. The default value of this
748variable is found in `default-indicate-empty-lines'.
749
c5d00c64 750+++
a933dad1
DL
751** There is a new "aggressive" scrolling method.
752
753When scrolling up because point is above the window start, if the
d9e66103 754value of the buffer-local variable `scroll-up-aggressively' is a
a933dad1 755number, Emacs chooses a new window start so that point ends up that
d5951185 756fraction of the window's height from the top of the window.
a933dad1
DL
757
758When scrolling down because point is below the window end, if the
759value of the buffer-local variable `scroll-down-aggessively' is a
760number, Emacs chooses a new window start so that point ends up that
d5951185 761fraction of the window's height from the bottom of the window.
a933dad1
DL
762
763** The rectangle commands now avoid inserting undesirable spaces,
764notably at the end of lines.
765
766All these functions have been rewritten to avoid inserting unwanted
767spaces, and an optional prefix now allows them to behave the old way.
768
424d8b44 769+++
eee54b0e
DL
770There is a new command M-x replace-rectangle.
771
a933dad1
DL
772** The new command M-x query-replace-regexp-eval acts like
773query-replace-regexp, but takes a Lisp expression which is evaluated
774after each match to get the replacement text.
775
00782214 776+++
d5483ab1
GM
777** M-x query-replace recognizes a new command `e' (or `E') that lets
778you edit the replacement string.
4ff40dd0 779
424d8b44 780** The new command mail-abbrev-complete-alias, bound to `M-TAB', lets
4ff40dd0
GM
781you complete mail aliases in the text, analogous to
782lisp-complete-symbol.
783
7af69644 784+++
a933dad1
DL
785** Emacs now resizes mini-windows if appropriate.
786
163ea954 787If a message is longer than one line, or minibuffer contents are
a299a6f0
GM
788longer than one line, Emacs can resize the minibuffer window unless it
789is on a frame of its own. You can control resizing and the maximum
790minibuffer window size by setting the following variables:
a933dad1
DL
791
792- User option: max-mini-window-height
793
794Maximum height for resizing mini-windows. If a float, it specifies a
795fraction of the mini-window frame's height. If an integer, it
a299a6f0 796specifies a number of lines.
a933dad1
DL
797
798Default is 0.25.
799
a299a6f0
GM
800- User option: resize-mini-windows
801
802How to resize mini-windows. If nil, don't resize. If t, always
5820dead 803resize to fit the size of the text. If `grow-only', let mini-windows
a299a6f0
GM
804grow only, until they become empty, at which point they are shrunk
805again.
806
807Default is `grow-only'.
808
2f72fd2f
GM
809** The command `Info-search' now uses a search history.
810
0d43b60d
GM
811** Changes to hideshow.el
812
813Hideshow is now at version 5.x. It uses a new algorithms for block
327652be
TTN
814selection and traversal, includes more isearch support, and has more
815conventional keybindings.
0d43b60d
GM
816
817*** Generalized block selection and traversal
818
819A block is now recognized by three things: its start and end regexps
820(both strings), and a match-data selector (an integer) specifying
821which sub-expression in the start regexp serves as the place where a
822`forward-sexp'-like function can operate. Hideshow always adjusts
823point to this sub-expression before calling `hs-forward-sexp-func'
824(which for most modes evaluates to `forward-sexp').
825
826If the match-data selector is not specified, it defaults to zero,
827i.e., the entire start regexp is valid, w/ no prefix. This is
828backwards compatible with previous versions of hideshow. Please see
829the docstring for variable `hs-special-modes-alist' for details.
830
831*** Isearch support for updating mode line
832
833During incremental search, if Hideshow minor mode is active, hidden
834blocks are temporarily shown. The variable `hs-headline' records the
835line at the beginning of the opened block (preceding the hidden
836portion of the buffer), and the mode line is refreshed. When a block
837is re-hidden, the variable is set to nil.
838
839To show `hs-headline' in the mode line, you may wish to include
840something like this in your .emacs.
841
842 (add-hook 'hs-minor-mode-hook
843 (lambda ()
844 (add-to-list 'mode-line-format 'hs-headline)))
845
327652be
TTN
846*** New customization var: `hs-hide-all-non-comment-function'
847
848Normally, `hs-hide-all' hides everything, leaving only the
849header lines of top-level forms (and comments, unless var
850`hs-hide-comments-when-hiding-all' is non-nil). It does this by
851moving point to each top-level block beginning and hiding the
852block there. In some major modes (for example, Java), this
853behavior results in few blocks left visible, which may not be so
854useful.
855
856You can now set var `hs-hide-all-non-comment-function' to a
857function to be called at each top-level block beginning, instead
858of the normal block-hiding function. For example, the following
859code defines a function to hide one level down and move point
860appropriately, and then tells hideshow to use the new function.
861
862(defun ttn-hs-hide-level-1 ()
863 (hs-hide-level 1)
864 (forward-sexp 1))
865(setq hs-hide-all-non-comment-function 'ttn-hs-hide-level-1)
866
867The name `hs-hide-all-non-comment-function' was chosen to
868emphasize that this function is not called for comment blocks,
869only for code blocks.
870
871*** Command deleted: `hs-show-region'
872
873Historical Note: This command was added to handle "unbalanced
874parentheses" emergencies back when hideshow.el used selective
875display for implementation.
876
877*** Commands rebound to more conventional keys
878
879The hideshow commands used to be bound to keys of the form "C-c
880LETTER". This is contrary to the Emacs keybinding convention,
881which reserves that space for user modification. Here are the
882new bindings (which includes the addition of `hs-toggle-hiding'):
883
884 hs-hide-block C-c C-h
885 hs-show-block C-c C-s
886 hs-hide-all C-c C-M-h
887 hs-show-all C-c C-M-s
888 hs-hide-level C-c C-l
889 hs-toggle-hiding C-c C-c
890 hs-mouse-toggle-hiding [(shift button-2)]
891
892These were chosen to roughly imitate those used by Outline mode.
893
559cee90
DL
894** Changes to Change Log mode and Add-Log functions
895
424d8b44 896+++
1b24b888
GM
897*** If you invoke `add-change-log-entry' from a backup file, it makes
898an entry appropriate for the file's parent. This is useful for making
559cee90
DL
899log entries by comparing a version with deleted functions.
900
424d8b44 901+++
1b24b888
GM
902**** New command M-x change-log-merge merges another log into the
903current buffer.
424d8b44
DL
904
905+++
1b24b888
GM
906*** New command M-x change-log-redate fixes any old-style date entries
907in a log file.
eb2aac9d 908
502004be 909+++
1b24b888
GM
910*** Change Log mode now adds a file's version number to change log
911entries if user-option `change-log-version-info-enabled' is non-nil.
eb2aac9d 912
502004be 913+++
1b24b888 914*** Unless the file is under version control the search for a file's
424d8b44
DL
915version number is performed based on regular expressions from
916`change-log-version-number-regexp-list' which can be cutomized.
917Version numbers are only found in the first 10 percent of a file.
eb2aac9d 918
2c63c979 919*** Change Log mode now defines its own faces for font-lock highlighting.
1b24b888 920
79c78e77
GM
921** Changes to cmuscheme
922
923*** The user-option `scheme-program-name' has been renamed
924`cmuscheme-program-name' due to conflicts with xscheme.el.
925
3476b54a
GM
926** Changes in Font Lock
927
928*** The new function `font-lock-remove-keywords' can be used to remove
a5e350c9 929font-lock keywords from the current buffer or from a specific major mode.
3476b54a 930
2c63c979
SM
931*** multiline patterns are now supported.
932
a5e350c9
SM
933*** `font-lock-syntactic-face-function' allows major-modes to choose
934the face used for each string/comment.
c607d53d 935
601e0081
SM
936*** A new standard face `font-lock-doc-face'.
937Meant for Lisp docstrings, Javadoc comments and other "documentation in code".
938
b3b98592
GM
939** Comint (subshell) changes
940
988cded7
MB
941These changes generally affect all modes derived from comint mode, which
942include shell-mode, gdb-mode, scheme-interaction-mode, etc.
943
944*** By default, comint no longer uses the variable `comint-prompt-regexp'
945to distinguish prompts from user-input. Instead, it notices which
946parts of the text were output by the process, and which entered by the
947user, and attaches `field' properties to allow emacs commands to use
948this information. Common movement commands, notably beginning-of-line,
949respect field boundaries in a fairly natural manner. To disable this
950feature, and use the old behavior, customize the user option
951`comint-use-prompt-regexp-instead-of-fields'.
952
953*** Comint now includes new features to send commands to running processes
b3b98592
GM
954and redirect the output to a designated buffer or buffers.
955
988cded7 956*** The command M-x comint-redirect-send-command reads a command and
b3b98592
GM
957buffer name from the mini-buffer. The command is sent to the current
958buffer's process, and its output is inserted into the specified buffer.
959
960The command M-x comint-redirect-send-command-to-process acts like
961M-x comint-redirect-send-command but additionally reads the name of
962the buffer whose process should be used from the mini-buffer.
963
988cded7
MB
964*** Packages based on comint now highlight user input and program prompts,
965and support choosing previous input with mouse-2. To control these features,
966see the user-options `comint-highlight-input' and `comint-highlight-prompt'.
31fc5d15 967
988cded7 968*** The new command `comint-write-output' (usually bound to `C-c C-s')
d648cc45
MB
969saves the output from the most recent command to a file. With a prefix
970argument, it appends to the file.
971
988cded7 972*** The command `comint-kill-output' has been renamed `comint-delete-output'
d648cc45
MB
973(usually bound to `C-c C-o'); the old name is aliased to it for
974compatibility.
975
0e40b809
EL
976*** The new function `comint-add-to-input-history' adds commands to the input
977ring (history).
d648cc45 978
e26cec67
GM
979** Changes to Rmail mode
980
b97cd2cc 981*** The new user-option rmail-user-mail-address-regexp can be
c0510d27
GM
982set to fine tune the identification of of the correspondent when
983receiving new mail. If it matches the address of the sender, the
984recipient is taken as correspondent of a mail. If nil, the default,
985`user-login-name' and `user-mail-address' are used to exclude yourself
986as correspondent.
987
988Usually you don't have to set this variable, except if you collect
989mails sent by you under different user names. Then it should be a
993d8b7d 990regexp matching your mail addresses.
c0510d27 991
3b55acc9
GM
992*** The new user-option rmail-confirm-expunge controls whether and how
993to ask for confirmation before expunging deleted messages from an
994Rmail file. You can choose between no confirmation, confirmation
995with y-or-n-p, or confirmation with yes-or-no-p. Default is to ask
996for confirmation with yes-or-no-p.
997
6a1950ec
GM
998*** RET is now bound in the Rmail summary to rmail-summary-goto-msg,
999like `j'.
1000
5bb6f079
RS
1001*** There is a new user option `rmail-digest-end-regexps' that
1002specifies the regular expressions to detect the line that ends a
2d5e9b54 1003digest message.
e26cec67 1004
993d8b7d
DL
1005*** The new user option `rmail-automatic-folder-directives' specifies
1006in which folder to put messages automatically.
1007
400a1ed0
GM
1008** Changes to TeX mode
1009
a5e350c9 1010*** The default mode has been changed from `plain-tex-mode' to
400a1ed0
GM
1011`latex-mode'.
1012
a5e350c9
SM
1013*** latex-mode now has a simple indentation algorithm.
1014
1015*** M-f and M-p jump around \begin...\end pairs.
1016
1017*** Added support for outline-minor-mode.
c607d53d 1018
a933dad1
DL
1019** Changes to RefTeX mode
1020
1021*** RefTeX has new support for index generation. Index entries can be
1022 created with `C-c <', with completion available on index keys.
1023 Pressing `C-c /' indexes the word at the cursor with a default
1024 macro. `C-c >' compiles all index entries into an alphabetically
1025 sorted *Index* buffer which looks like the final index. Entries
1026 can be edited from that buffer.
1027
1028*** Label and citation key selection now allow to select several
1029 items and reference them together (use `m' to mark items, `a' or
1030 `A' to use all marked entries).
1031
1032*** reftex.el has been split into a number of smaller files to reduce
1033 memory use when only a part of RefTeX is being used.
1034
1035*** a new command `reftex-view-crossref-from-bibtex' (bound to `C-c &'
1036 in BibTeX-mode) can be called in a BibTeX database buffer in order
1037 to show locations in LaTeX documents where a particular entry has
1038 been cited.
1039
38de9631
GM
1040** Emacs Lisp mode now allows multiple levels of outline headings.
1041The level of a heading is determined from the number of leading
1042semicolons in a heading line. Toplevel forms starting with a `('
1043in column 1 are always made leaves.
1044
a933dad1
DL
1045** The M-x time-stamp command (most commonly used on write-file-hooks)
1046has the following new features:
1047
1048*** The patterns for finding the time stamp and for updating a pattern
1049may match text spanning multiple lines. For example, some people like
1050to have the filename and date on separate lines. The new variable
1051time-stamp-inserts-lines controls the matching for multi-line patterns.
1052
1053*** More than one time stamp can be updated in the same file. This
1054feature is useful if you need separate time stamps in a program source
1055file to both include in formatted documentation and insert in the
1056compiled binary. The same time-stamp will be written at each matching
1057pattern. The variable time-stamp-count enables this new feature; it
1058defaults to 1.
1059
5d94f558 1060** Partial Completion mode now completes environment variables in
b675095c
GM
1061file names.
1062
424d8b44 1063+++
a933dad1
DL
1064** Tooltips.
1065
1066Tooltips are small X windows displaying a help string at the current
01242779
DL
1067mouse position. The Lisp package `tooltip' implements them. You can
1068turn them off via the user option `tooltip-mode'.
a933dad1
DL
1069
1070Tooltips also provides support for GUD debugging. If activated,
1071variable values can be displayed in tooltips by pointing at them with
1072the mouse in source buffers. You can customize various aspects of the
1073tooltip display in the group `tooltip'.
1074
424d8b44 1075+++
a933dad1
DL
1076** Customize changes
1077
1078*** Customize now supports comments about customized items. Use the
34f94cf9
DL
1079`State' menu to add comments. Note that customization comments will
1080cause the customizations to fail in earlier versions of Emacs.
a933dad1
DL
1081
1082*** The new option `custom-buffer-done-function' says whether to kill
1083Custom buffers when you've done with them or just bury them (the
1084default).
1085
0ae51efb
GM
1086*** The keyword :set-after in defcustom allows to specify dependencies
1087between custom options. Example:
1088
1089 (defcustom default-input-method nil
1090 "*Default input method for multilingual text (a string).
1091 This is the input method activated automatically by the command
1092 `toggle-input-method' (\\[toggle-input-method])."
1093 :group 'mule
1094 :type '(choice (const nil) string)
1095 :set-after '(current-language-environment))
1096
1097This specifies that default-input-method should be set after
1098current-language-environment even if default-input-method appears
1099first in a custom-set-variables statement.
1100
a933dad1
DL
1101** New features in evaluation commands
1102
5e03eb84 1103*** The commands to evaluate Lisp expressions, such as C-M-x in Lisp
a933dad1
DL
1104modes, C-j in Lisp Interaction mode, and M-:, now bind the variables
1105print-level, print-length, and debug-on-error based on the
1106customizable variables eval-expression-print-level,
1107eval-expression-print-length, and eval-expression-debug-on-error.
1108
5e03eb84
GM
1109*** The function `eval-defun' (M-C-x) now loads Edebug and instruments
1110code when called with a prefix argument.
1111
ead53494
GM
1112** Ispell changes
1113
37d8a691 1114+++
bbe15990
EZ
1115*** The command `ispell' now spell-checks a region if
1116transient-mark-mode is on, and the mark is active. Otherwise it
ead53494
GM
1117spell-checks the current buffer.
1118
37d8a691 1119+++
385ff9e3
GM
1120*** Support for synchronous subprocesses - DOS/Windoze - has been
1121added.
1122
1123*** An "alignment error" bug was fixed when a manual spelling
1124correction is made and re-checked.
1125
74ec6045 1126*** An Italian and a Portuguese dictionary definition has been added.
385ff9e3
GM
1127
1128*** Region skipping performance has been vastly improved in some
1129cases.
1130
1131*** Spell checking HTML buffers has been improved and isn't so strict
1132on syntax errors.
1133
1134*** The buffer-local words are now always placed on a new line at the
1135end of the buffer.
1136
a933dad1
DL
1137** Dired changes
1138
1139*** New variable `dired-recursive-deletes' determines if the delete
1140command will delete non-empty directories recursively. The default
1141is, delete only empty directories.
1142
1143*** New variable `dired-recursive-copies' determines if the copy
1144command will copy directories recursively. The default is, do not
1145copy directories recursively.
1146
f6737cde
GM
1147*** In command `dired-do-shell-command' (usually bound to `!') a `?'
1148in the shell command has a special meaning similar to `*', but with
1149the difference that the command will be run on each file individually.
1150
2f72fd2f
GM
1151*** The new command `dired-find-alternate-file' (usually bound to `a')
1152replaces the Dired buffer with the buffer for an alternate file or
1153directory.
1154
7381ae05
MB
1155*** The new command `dired-show-file-type' (usually bound to `w') shows
1156a message in the echo area describing what type of file the point is on.
1157This command invokes the external program `file' do its work, and so
1158will only work on systems with that program, and will be only as
1159accurate or inaccurate as it is.
1160
e024b101
GM
1161*** Dired now properly handles undo changes of adding/removing `-R'
1162from ls switches.
1163
60b392a7
MB
1164*** Dired commands that prompt for a destination file now allow the use
1165of the `M-n' command in the minibuffer to insert the source filename,
1166which the user can then edit. This only works if there is a single
1167source file, not when operating on multiple marked files.
1168
a933dad1
DL
1169** The variable mail-specify-envelope-from controls whether to
1170use the -f option when sending mail.
1171
b1c609b1
GM
1172** CC mode changes.
1173
1174Note: This release contains changes that might not be compatible with
1175current user setups (although it's believed that these
1176incompatibilities will only show in very uncommon circumstances).
1177However, since the impact is uncertain, these changes may be rolled
1178back depending on user feedback. Therefore there's no forward
1179compatibility guarantee wrt the new features introduced in this
1180release.
1181
7972fcfc
GM
1182*** c-style-variables-are-local-p now defaults to t.
1183This is an incompatible change that has been made to make the behavior
1184of the style system wrt global variable settings less confusing for
1185non-advanced users. If you know what this variable does you might
1186want to set it to nil in your .emacs, otherwise you probably don't
1187have to bother.
1188
1189Defaulting c-style-variables-are-local-p to t avoids the confusing
1190situation that occurs when a user sets some style variables globally
487522fe 1191and edits both a Java and a non-Java file in the same Emacs session.
7972fcfc
GM
1192If the style variables aren't buffer local in this case, loading of
1193the second file will cause the default style (either "gnu" or "java"
1194by default) to override the global settings made by the user.
1195
b1c609b1
GM
1196*** New initialization procedure for the style system.
1197When the initial style for a buffer is determined by CC Mode (from the
1198variable c-default-style), the global values of style variables now
1199take precedence over the values specified by the chosen style. This
1200is different than the old behavior: previously, the style-specific
1201settings would override the global settings. This change makes it
1202possible to do simple configuration in the intuitive way with
1203Customize or with setq lines in one's .emacs file.
1204
1205By default, the global value of every style variable is the new
1206special symbol set-from-style, which causes the value to be taken from
1207the style system. This means that in effect, only an explicit setting
1208of a style variable will cause the "overriding" behavior described
1209above.
1210
1211Also note that global settings override style-specific settings *only*
1212when the initial style of a buffer is chosen by a CC Mode major mode
1213function. When a style is chosen in other ways --- for example, by a
1214call like (c-set-style "gnu") in a hook, or via M-x c-set-style ---
1215then the style-specific values take precedence over any global style
1216values. In Lisp terms, global values override style-specific values
1217only when the new second argument to c-set-style is non-nil; see the
1218function documentation for more info.
1219
1220The purpose of these changes is to make it easier for users,
1221especially novice users, to do simple customizations with Customize or
1222with setq in their .emacs files. On the other hand, the new system is
1223intended to be compatible with advanced users' customizations as well,
1224such as those that choose styles in hooks or whatnot. This new system
1225is believed to be almost entirely compatible with current
1226configurations, in spite of the changed precedence between style and
1227global variable settings when a buffer's default style is set.
1228
1229(Thanks to Eric Eide for clarifying this explanation a bit.)
1230
1231**** c-offsets-alist is now a customizable variable.
1232This became possible as a result of the new initialization behavior.
1233
1234This variable is treated slightly differently from the other style
1235variables; instead of using the symbol set-from-style, it will be
1236completed with the syntactic symbols it doesn't already contain when
1237the style is first initialized. This means it now defaults to the
1238empty list to make all syntactic elements get their values from the
1239style system.
1240
1241**** Compatibility variable to restore the old behavior.
1242In case your configuration doesn't work with this change, you can set
1243c-old-style-variable-behavior to non-nil to get the old behavior back
1244as far as possible.
1245
1246*** Improvements to line breaking and text filling.
1247CC Mode now handles this more intelligently and seamlessly wrt the
1248surrounding code, especially inside comments. For details see the new
1249chapter about this in the manual.
1250
1251**** New variable to recognize comment line prefix decorations.
1252The variable c-comment-prefix-regexp has been added to properly
1253recognize the line prefix in both block and line comments. It's
1254primarily used to initialize the various paragraph recognition and
1255adaptive filling variables that the text handling functions uses.
1256
1257**** New variable c-block-comment-prefix.
1258This is a generalization of the now obsolete variable
1259c-comment-continuation-stars to handle arbitrary strings.
1260
1261**** CC Mode now uses adaptive fill mode.
1262This to make it adapt better to the paragraph style inside comments.
1263
1264It's also possible to use other adaptive filling packages inside CC
1265Mode, notably Kyle E. Jones' Filladapt mode (http://wonderworks.com/).
1266A new convenience function c-setup-filladapt sets up Filladapt for use
1267inside CC Mode.
1268
1269Note though that the 2.12 version of Filladapt lacks a feature that
1270causes it to work suboptimally when c-comment-prefix-regexp can match
1271the empty string (which it commonly does). A patch for that is
1272available from the CC Mode web site (http://www.python.org/emacs/
1273cc-mode/).
1274
1275**** It's now possible to selectively turn off auto filling.
1276The variable c-ignore-auto-fill is used to ignore auto fill mode in
1277specific contexts, e.g. in preprocessor directives and in string
1278literals.
1279
1280**** New context sensitive line break function c-context-line-break.
1281It works like newline-and-indent in normal code, and adapts the line
1282prefix according to the comment style when used inside comments. If
1283you're normally using newline-and-indent, you might want to switch to
1284this function.
1285
1286*** Fixes to IDL mode.
1287It now does a better job in recognizing only the constructs relevant
1288to IDL. E.g. it no longer matches "class" as the beginning of a
1289struct block, but it does match the CORBA 2.3 "valuetype" keyword.
1290Thanks to Eric Eide.
1291
1292*** Improvements to the Whitesmith style.
1293It now keeps the style consistently on all levels and both when
1294opening braces hangs and when they don't.
1295
1296**** New lineup function c-lineup-whitesmith-in-block.
1297
1298*** New lineup functions c-lineup-template-args and c-indent-multi-line-block.
1299See their docstrings for details. c-lineup-template-args does a
1300better job of tracking the brackets used as parens in C++ templates,
1301and is used by default to line up continued template arguments.
1302
1303*** c-lineup-comment now preserves alignment with a comment on the
1304previous line. It used to instead preserve comments that started in
1305the column specified by comment-column.
1306
1307*** c-lineup-C-comments handles "free form" text comments.
1308In comments with a long delimiter line at the start, the indentation
1309is kept unchanged for lines that start with an empty comment line
1310prefix. This is intended for the type of large block comments that
1311contain documentation with its own formatting. In these you normally
1312don't want CC Mode to change the indentation.
1313
1314*** The `c' syntactic symbol is now relative to the comment start
1315instead of the previous line, to make integers usable as lineup
1316arguments.
1317
1318*** All lineup functions have gotten docstrings.
1319
1320*** More preprocessor directive movement functions.
1321c-down-conditional does the reverse of c-up-conditional.
1322c-up-conditional-with-else and c-down-conditional-with-else are
1323variants of these that also stops at "#else" lines (suggested by Don
1324Provan).
1325
1326*** Minor improvements to many movement functions in tricky situations.
1327
c407c570
GM
1328** Makefile mode changes
1329
1330*** The mode now uses the abbrev table `makefile-mode-abbrev-table'.
1331
5d94f558 1332*** Conditionals and include statements are now highlighted when
c407c570
GM
1333Fontlock mode is active.
1334
87be76f6
GM
1335** Isearch changes
1336
3353ef5a
GM
1337*** Isearch now puts a call to `isearch-resume' in the command history,
1338so that searches can be resumed.
1339
1340*** In Isearch mode, M-C-s and M-C-r are now bound like C-s and C-r,
c407c570
GM
1341respectively, i.e. you can repeat a regexp isearch with the same keys
1342that started the search.
1343
87be76f6 1344*** In Isearch mode, mouse-2 in the echo area now yanks the current
a933dad1
DL
1345selection into the search string rather than giving an error.
1346
c8a8458a 1347+++
87be76f6
GM
1348*** There is a new lazy highlighting feature in incremental search.
1349
d35fce81 1350Lazy highlighting is switched on/off by customizing variable
87be76f6
GM
1351`isearch-lazy-highlight'. When active, all matches for the current
1352search string are highlighted. The current match is highlighted as
1353before using face `isearch' or `region'. All other matches are
1354highlighted using face `isearch-lazy-highlight-face' which defaults to
5d94f558 1355`secondary-selection'.
87be76f6
GM
1356
1357The extra highlighting makes it easier to anticipate where the cursor
1358will end up each time you press C-s or C-r to repeat a pending search.
1359Highlighting of these additional matches happens in a deferred fashion
1360using "idle timers," so the cycles needed do not rob isearch of its
1361usual snappy response.
1362
1363If `isearch-lazy-highlight-cleanup' is set to t, highlights for
1364matches are automatically cleared when you end the search. If it is
1365set to nil, you can remove the highlights manually with `M-x
1366isearch-lazy-highlight-cleanup'.
1367
21bc6203 1368+++
35384f06
GM
1369** Changes in sort.el
1370
1371The function sort-numeric-fields interprets numbers starting with `0'
12c25bdc 1372as octal and numbers starting with `0x' or `0X' as hexadecimal. The
21bc6203 1373new user-option sort-numeric-base can be used to specify a default
35384f06 1374numeric base.
87be76f6 1375
d7b511c4
GM
1376** Changes to Ange-ftp
1377
424d8b44 1378+++
d7b511c4 1379*** Ange-ftp allows you to specify of a port number in remote file
d67f47e4
DL
1380names cleanly. It is appended to the host name, separated by a hash
1381sign, e.g. `/foo@bar.org#666:mumble'. (This syntax comes from EFS.)
1382
d7b511c4
GM
1383*** If the new user-option `ange-ftp-try-passive-mode' is set, passive
1384ftp mode will be used if the ftp client supports that.
1385
9d453139
SS
1386*** Ange-ftp handles the output of the w32-style clients which
1387output ^M at the end of lines.
1388
4b9347b3
GM
1389** Shell script mode changes.
1390
1391Shell script mode (sh-script) can now indent scripts for shells
1392derived from sh and rc. The indentation style is customizeable, and
1393sh-script can attempt to "learn" the current buffer's style.
1394
79214ddf
FP
1395** Etags changes.
1396
1397*** In DOS, etags looks for file.cgz if it cannot find file.c.
1398
aca0be23 1399*** New option --ignore-case-regex is an alternative to --regex. It is now
8dc78b52
FP
1400possible to bind a regexp to a language, by prepending the regexp with
1401{lang}, where lang is one of the languages that `etags --help' prints out.
1402This feature is useful especially for regex files, where each line contains
1403a regular expression. The manual contains details.
aca0be23 1404
79214ddf
FP
1405*** In C and derived languages, etags creates tags for function
1406declarations when given the --declarations option.
1407
1408*** In C++, tags are created for "operator". The tags have the form
aca0be23 1409"operator+", without spaces between the keyword and the operator.
79214ddf
FP
1410
1411*** New language Ada: tags are functions, procedures, packages, tasks, and
1412types.
1413
de370c4c 1414*** In Fortran, `procedure' is not tagged.
79214ddf
FP
1415
1416*** In Java, tags are created for "interface".
1417
1418*** In Lisp, "(defstruct (foo", "(defun (operator" and similar constructs
1419are now tagged.
1420
1421*** In Perl, the --globals option tags global variables. my and local
1422variables are tagged.
1423
1424*** New language Python: def and class at the beginning of a line are tags.
1425
8dc78b52
FP
1426*** .ss files are Scheme files, .pdb is Postscript with C syntax, .psw is
1427for PSWrap.
79214ddf 1428
c8d94f86 1429+++
f6737cde
GM
1430** Changes in etags.el
1431
3f6e4b8b
GM
1432*** The new user-option tags-case-fold-search can be used to make
1433tags operations case-sensitive or case-insensitive. The default
1434is to use the same setting as case-fold-search.
1435
f6737cde
GM
1436*** You can display additional output with M-x tags-apropos by setting
1437the new variable tags-apropos-additional-actions.
1438
1439If non-nil, the variable's value should be a list of triples (TITLE
1440FUNCTION TO-SEARCH). For each triple, M-x tags-apropos processes
1441TO-SEARCH and lists tags from it. TO-SEARCH should be an alist,
1442obarray, or symbol. If it is a symbol, the symbol's value is used.
1443
1444TITLE is a string to use to label the list of tags from TO-SEARCH.
1445
1446FUNCTION is a function to call when an entry is selected in the Tags
1447List buffer. It is called with one argument, the selected symbol.
1448
1449A useful example value for this variable might be something like:
1450
1451 '(("Emacs Lisp" Info-goto-emacs-command-node obarray)
1452 ("Common Lisp" common-lisp-hyperspec common-lisp-hyperspec-obarray)
1453 ("SCWM" scwm-documentation scwm-obarray))
1454
1455*** The face tags-tag-face can be used to customize the appearance
1456of tags in the output of M-x tags-apropos.
1457
1458*** Setting tags-apropos-verbose to a non-nil value displays the
1459names of tags files in the *Tags List* buffer.
1460
0c68ce6f
GM
1461*** You can now search for tags that are part of the filename itself.
1462If you have tagged the files topfile.c subdir/subfile.c
1463/tmp/tempfile.c, you can now search for tags "topfile.c", "subfile.c",
1464"dir/sub", "tempfile", "tempfile.c". If the tag matches the filename,
1465point will go to the beginning of the file.
1466
424d8b44 1467+++
fbc164de
PE
1468** Emacs now attempts to determine the initial language environment
1469and preferred and locale coding systems systematically from the
1470LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE, and LANG environment variables during startup.
1471
c3eb1f10 1472+++
0b8a3a6d
DL
1473** New language environments `Polish', `Latin-8' and `Latin-9'.
1474Latin-8 and Latin-9 correspond respectively to the ISO character sets
14758859-14 (Celtic) and 8859-15 (updated Latin-1, with the Euro sign).
f6499c03
DL
1476GNU Intlfonts doesn't support these yet; there are basic 8859-14 and
14778859-15 fonts at <URL:http://czyborra.com/charsets/> and recent X
1478releases have 8859-15. There are new Latin-8 and Latin-9 prefix
1479(only) and Polish slash input methods in Leim.
59c1bf85 1480
424d8b44 1481+++
163ea954 1482** Fortran mode has a new command `fortran-strip-sequence-nos' to
e33b0397
DL
1483remove text past column 72. The syntax class of `\' in Fortran is now
1484appropriate for C-style escape sequences in strings.
1485
1486** SGML mode's default `sgml-validate-command' is now `nsgmls'.
1487
424d8b44 1488+++
6f8ea2ae
DL
1489** A new command `view-emacs-problems' (C-h P) displays the PROBLEMS file.
1490
6ab8d72d 1491+++
f6499c03 1492** The Dabbrev package has a new user-option `dabbrev-ignored-regexps'
c0510d27
GM
1493containing a list of regular expressions. Buffers matching a regular
1494expression from that list, are not checked.
1495
5d94f558
SS
1496** Emacs can now figure out modification times of remote files.
1497When you do C-x C-f /user@host:/path/file RET and edit the file,
1498and someone else modifies the file, you will be prompted to revert
1499the buffer, just like for the local files.
1500
dc28878c
GM
1501** The buffer menu (C-x C-b) no longer lists the *Buffer List* buffer.
1502
df8a9f78 1503+++
95931eb1
GM
1504** When invoked with a prefix argument, the command `list-abbrevs' now
1505displays local abbrevs, only.
1506
54baed30
GM
1507** VC Changes
1508
1509VC has been overhauled internally. It is now modular, making it
1510easier to plug-in arbitrary version control backends. (See Lisp
1511Changes for details on the new structure.) As a result, the mechanism
1512to enable and disable support for particular version systems has
1513changed: everything is now controlled by the new variable
1514`vc-handled-backends'. Its value is a list of atoms that identify
1515version systems; the default is '(RCS CVS SCCS). When finding a file,
1516each of the backends in that list is tried in order to see whether the
1517file is registered in that backend.
1518
1519When registering a new file, VC first tries each of the listed
1520backends to see if any of them considers itself "responsible" for the
1521directory of the file (e.g. because a corresponding subdirectory for
1522master files exists). If none of the backends is responsible, then
1523the first backend in the list that could register the file is chosen.
1524As a consequence, the variable `vc-default-back-end' is now obsolete.
1525
1526The old variable `vc-master-templates' is also obsolete, although VC
1527still supports it for backward compatibility. To define templates for
1528RCS or SCCS, you should rather use the new variables
1529vc-{rcs,sccs}-master-templates. (There is no such feature under CVS
1530where it doesn't make sense.)
1531
1532The variables `vc-ignore-vc-files' and `vc-handle-cvs' are also
1533obsolete now, you must set `vc-handled-backends' to nil or exclude
1534`CVS' from the list, respectively, to achieve their effect now.
1535
1536*** General Changes
1537
1538The variable `vc-checkout-carefully' is obsolete: the corresponding
1539checks are always done now.
1540
327652be 1541VC Dired buffers are now kept up-to-date during all version control
54baed30
GM
1542operations.
1543
c286608e
SM
1544`vc-diff' output is now displayed in `diff-mode'.
1545`vc-print-log' uses `log-view-mode'.
1546`vc-log-mode' (used for *VC-Log*) has been replaced by `log-edit-mode'.
1547
22933be8
AS
1548The command C-x v m (vc-merge) now accepts an empty argument as the
1549first revision number. This means that any recent changes on the
1550current branch should be picked up from the repository and merged into
1551the working file (``merge news'').
1552
1553The commands C-x v s (vc-create-snapshot) and C-x v r
1554(vc-retrieve-snapshot) now ask for a directory name from which to work
1555downwards.
1556
1557*** Multiple Backends
1558
1559VC now lets you register files in more than one backend. This is
1560useful, for example, if you are working with a slow remote CVS
1561repository. You can then use RCS for local editing, and occasionally
1562commit your changes back to CVS, or pick up changes from CVS into your
1563local RCS archives.
1564
1565To make this work, the ``more local'' backend (RCS in our example)
1566should come first in `vc-handled-backends', and the ``more remote''
1567backend (CVS) should come later. (The default value of
1568`vc-handled-backends' already has it that way.)
1569
1570If you have a file registered in one backend already, you can register
1571it in a second one by using C-x v i (vc-register) again.
1572Alternatively, you can commit changes to another backend (say, RCS),
1573by typing C-u C-x v v RCS RET (i.e. vc-next-action now accepts a
1574backend name as a revision number). When using the latter approach,
1575VC registers the file in the more local backend if that hasn't already
1576happened, and commits to a branch based on the current revision number
1577from the more remote backend.
1578
1579If a file is registered in multiple backends, you can switch to
1580another one using C-x v b (vc-switch-backend). This does not change
1581any files, it only changes VC's perspective on the file. Use this to
1582pick up changes from CVS while working under RCS locally.
1583
1584After you are done with your local RCS editing, you can commit your
1585changes back to CVS using C-u C-x v v CVS RET. In this case, the
1586local RCS archive is removed after the commit, and the log entry
1587buffer is initialized to contain the entire RCS change log of the file.
1588
54baed30
GM
1589*** Changes for CVS
1590
1591There is a new user option, `vc-cvs-stay-local'. If it is `t' (the
1592default), then VC avoids network queries for files registered in
1593remote repositories. The state of such files is then only determined
1594by heuristics and past information. `vc-cvs-stay-local' can also be a
1595regexp to match against repository hostnames; only files from hosts
1596that match it are treated locally. If the variable is nil, then VC
1597queries the repository just as often as it does for local files.
1598
22933be8
AS
1599If `vc-cvs-stay-local' is on, then VC also makes local backups of
1600repository versions. This means that ordinary diffs (C-x v =) and
1601revert operations (C-x v u) can be done completely locally, without
1602any repository interactions at all. The name of a local version
1603backup of FILE is FILE.~REV.~, where REV is the repository version
1604number. This format is similar to that used by C-x v ~
1605(vc-version-other-window), except for the trailing dot. As a matter
1606of fact, the two features can each use the files created by the other,
1607the only difference being that files with a trailing `.' are deleted
105602b1
EZ
1608automatically after commit. (This feature doesn't work on MS-DOS,
1609since DOS disallows more than a single dot in the trunk of a file
1610name.)
22933be8 1611
54baed30
GM
1612If `vc-cvs-stay-local' is on, and there have been changes in the
1613repository, VC notifies you about it when you actually try to commit.
1614If you want to check for updates from the repository without trying to
22933be8 1615commit, you can either use C-x v m RET to perform an update on the
54baed30
GM
1616current file, or you can use C-x v r RET to get an update for an
1617entire directory tree.
1618
1619The new user option `vc-cvs-use-edit' indicates whether VC should call
1620"cvs edit" to make files writeable; it defaults to `t'. (This option
1621is only meaningful if the CVSREAD variable is set, or if files are
1622"watched" by other developers.)
1623
22933be8
AS
1624The commands C-x v s (vc-create-snapshot) and C-x v r
1625(vc-retrieve-snapshot) are now also implemented for CVS. If you give
1626an empty argument to the latter, that performs a `cvs update',
1627starting at the given directory.
1628
54baed30
GM
1629*** Lisp Changes in VC
1630
1631VC has been restructured internally to make it modular. You can now
1632add support for arbitrary version control backends by writing a
1633library that provides a certain set of backend-specific functions, and
1634then telling VC to use that library. For example, to add support for
1635a version system named FOO, you write a library named vc-foo.el, which
1636provides a number of functions vc-foo-... (see commentary at the end
1637of vc.el for a detailed list of them). To make VC use that library,
1638you need to put it somewhere into Emacs' load path and add the atom
1639`FOO' to the list `vc-handled-backends'.
1640
a933dad1
DL
1641** New modes and packages
1642
79b9f6e0
MB
1643*** The new global minor mode `minibuffer-electric-default-mode'
1644automatically hides the `(default ...)' part of minibuffer prompts when
1645the default is not applicable.
1646
b95b34e5
GM
1647*** Artist is an Emacs lisp package that allows you to draw lines,
1648rectangles and ellipses by using your mouse and/or keyboard. The
1649shapes are made up with the ascii characters |, -, / and \.
1650
1651Features are:
1652
1653- Intersecting: When a `|' intersects with a `-', a `+' is
1654 drawn, like this: | \ /
c607d53d 1655 --+-- X
b95b34e5
GM
1656 | / \
1657
1658- Rubber-banding: When drawing lines you can interactively see the
1659 result while holding the mouse button down and moving the mouse. If
1660 your machine is not fast enough (a 386 is a bit too slow, but a
1661 pentium is well enough), you can turn this feature off. You will
1662 then see 1's and 2's which mark the 1st and 2nd endpoint of the line
1663 you are drawing.
1664
1665- Arrows: After having drawn a (straight) line or a (straight)
1666 poly-line, you can set arrows on the line-ends by typing < or >.
1667
1668- Flood-filling: You can fill any area with a certain character by
1669 flood-filling.
1670
1671- Cut copy and paste: You can cut, copy and paste rectangular
1672 regions. Artist also interfaces with the rect package (this can be
1673 turned off if it causes you any trouble) so anything you cut in
1674 artist can be yanked with C-x r y and vice versa.
c607d53d 1675
b95b34e5
GM
1676- Drawing with keys: Everything you can do with the mouse, you can
1677 also do without the mouse.
1678
1679- Aspect-ratio: You can set the variable artist-aspect-ratio to
1680 reflect the height-width ratio for the font you are using. Squares
1681 and circles are then drawn square/round. Note, that once your
1682 ascii-file is shown with font with a different height-width ratio,
1683 the squares won't be square and the circles won't be round.
1684
1685- Drawing operations: The following drawing operations are implemented:
1686
1687 lines straight-lines
1688 rectangles squares
1689 poly-lines straight poly-lines
1690 ellipses circles
1691 text (see-thru) text (overwrite)
1692 spray-can setting size for spraying
1693 vaporize line vaporize lines
1694 erase characters erase rectangles
1695
1696 Straight lines are lines that go horizontally, vertically or
1697 diagonally. Plain lines go in any direction. The operations in
1698 the right column are accessed by holding down the shift key while
1699 drawing.
1700
1701 It is possible to vaporize (erase) entire lines and connected lines
1702 (rectangles for example) as long as the lines being vaporized are
1703 straight and connected at their endpoints. Vaporizing is inspired
1704 by the drawrect package by Jari Aalto <jari.aalto@poboxes.com>.
1705
1706- Picture mode compatibility: Artist is picture mode compatible (this
1707 can be turned off).
1708
4473cdd9
JW
1709+++
1710*** The new package Eshell is an operating system command shell
1711implemented entirely in Emacs Lisp. Use `M-x eshell' to invoke it.
1712It functions similarly to bash and zsh, and allows running of Lisp
1713functions and external commands using the same syntax. It supports
1714history lists, aliases, extended globbing, smart scrolling, etc. It
1715will work on any platform Emacs has been ported to. And since most of
1716the basic commands -- ls, rm, mv, cp, ln, du, cat, etc. -- have been
1717rewritten in Lisp, it offers an operating-system independent shell,
1718all within the scope of your Emacs process.
1719
ff332647 1720+++
90cbf47e
GM
1721*** The new package timeclock.el is a mode is for keeping track of time
1722intervals. You can use it for whatever purpose you like, but the
1723typical scenario is to keep track of how much time you spend working
1724on certain projects.
1725
894ca69e 1726+++
90cbf47e 1727*** The new package hi-lock.el, text matching interactively entered
d96d6bb0 1728regexp's can be highlighted. For example,
abb2db1c 1729
d96d6bb0 1730 M-x highlight-regexp RET clearly RET RET
abb2db1c
GM
1731
1732will highlight all occurrences of `clearly' using a yellow background
1733face. New occurrences of `clearly' will be highlighted as they are
1734typed. `M-x unhighlight-regexp RET' will remove the highlighting.
1735Any existing face can be used for highlighting and a set of
1736appropriate faces is provided. The regexps can be written into the
1737current buffer in a form that will be recognized the next time the
1738corresponding file is read.
1739
424d8b44 1740+++
d96d6bb0 1741*** The new package zone.el plays games with Emacs' display when
abb2db1c
GM
1742Emacs is idle.
1743
31fc5d15
GM
1744*** The new package xml.el provides a simple but generic XML
1745parser. It doesn't parse the DTDs however.
1746
5cb6a58e
SM
1747*** The comment operations are now provided by the newcomment.el
1748package which allows different styles of comment-region and should
1749be more robust while offering the same functionality.
601e0081
SM
1750`comment-region' now doesn't always comment a-line-at-a-time, but only
1751comments the region, breaking the line at point if necessary.
5cb6a58e 1752
424d8b44 1753+++
578979ee
GM
1754*** The Ebrowse package implements a C++ class browser and tags
1755facilities tailored for use with C++. It is documented in a
1756separate Texinfo file.
1757
424d8b44
DL
1758+++
1759*** The PCL-CVS package available by either running M-x cvs-examine or
1760by visiting a CVS administrative directory (with a prefix argument)
1761provides an alternative interface to VC-dired for CVS. It comes with
1762`log-view-mode' to view RCS and SCCS logs and `log-edit-mode' used to
1763enter checkin log messages.
dc1178bf 1764
424d8b44 1765+++
6abca616
EZ
1766*** The new package called `woman' allows to browse Unix man pages
1767without invoking external programs.
1768
1769The command `M-x woman' formats manual pages entirely in Emacs Lisp
1770and then displays them, like `M-x manual-entry' does. Unlike
1771`manual-entry', `woman' does not invoke any external programs, so it
1772is useful on systems such as MS-DOS/MS-Windows where the `man' and
490f2e7b 1773Groff or `troff' commands are not readily available.
6abca616
EZ
1774
1775The command `M-x woman-find-file' asks for the file name of a man
1776page, then formats and displays it like `M-x woman' does.
1777
719e2c6e 1778+++
5e5dff44
GM
1779*** The new command M-x re-builder offers a convenient interface for
1780authoring regular expressions with immediate visual feedback.
1781
1782The buffer from which the command was called becomes the target for
1783the regexp editor popping up in a separate window. Matching text in
1784the target buffer is immediately color marked during the editing.
1785Each sub-expression of the regexp will show up in a different face so
1786even complex regexps can be edited and verified on target data in a
1787single step.
1788
1789On displays not supporting faces the matches instead blink like
1790matching parens to make them stand out. On such a setup you will
1791probably also want to use the sub-expression mode when the regexp
1792contains such to get feedback about their respective limits.
1793
424d8b44 1794+++
f7136ee8
GM
1795*** glasses-mode is a minor mode that makes
1796unreadableIdentifiersLikeThis readable. It works as glasses, without
1797actually modifying content of a buffer.
1798
bbd9b566
GM
1799*** The package ebnf2ps translates an EBNF to a syntactic chart in
1800PostScript.
1801
1802Currently accepts ad-hoc EBNF, ISO EBNF and Bison/Yacc.
1803
1804The ad-hoc default EBNF syntax has the following elements:
1805
1806 ; comment (until end of line)
1807 A non-terminal
1808 "C" terminal
1809 ?C? special
1810 $A default non-terminal
1811 $"C" default terminal
1812 $?C? default special
1813 A = B. production (A is the header and B the body)
1814 C D sequence (C occurs before D)
1815 C | D alternative (C or D occurs)
1816 A - B exception (A excluding B, B without any non-terminal)
1817 n * A repetition (A repeats n (integer) times)
1818 (C) group (expression C is grouped together)
1819 [C] optional (C may or not occurs)
1820 C+ one or more occurrences of C
1821 {C}+ one or more occurrences of C
1822 {C}* zero or more occurrences of C
1823 {C} zero or more occurrences of C
1824 C / D equivalent to: C {D C}*
1825 {C || D}+ equivalent to: C {D C}*
1826 {C || D}* equivalent to: [C {D C}*]
1827 {C || D} equivalent to: [C {D C}*]
1828
1829Please, see ebnf2ps documentation for EBNF syntax and how to use it.
1830
99453a38
GM
1831*** The package align.el will align columns within a region, using M-x
1832align. Its mode-specific rules, based on regular expressions,
1833determine where the columns should be split. In C and C++, for
1834example, it will align variable names in declaration lists, or the
1835equal signs of assignments.
1836
424d8b44 1837+++
559cee90
DL
1838*** `paragraph-indent-minor-mode' is a new minor mode supporting
1839paragraphs in the same style as `paragraph-indent-text-mode'.
1840
424d8b44 1841+++
6448a6b3
GM
1842*** bs.el is a new package for buffer selection similar to
1843list-buffers or electric-buffer-list. Use M-x bs-show to display a
1844buffer menu with this package. You can use M-x bs-customize to
1845customize the package.
1846
6344985d
GM
1847*** find-lisp.el is a package emulating the Unix find command in Lisp.
1848
249652b1
GM
1849*** calculator.el is a small calculator package that is intended to
1850replace desktop calculators such as xcalc and calc.exe. Actually, it
1851is not too small - it has more features than most desktop calculators,
1852and can be customized easily to get many more functions. It should
1853not be confused with "calc" which is a much bigger mathematical tool
1854which answers different needs.
1855
424d8b44 1856+++
3476b54a
GM
1857*** The minor modes cwarn-mode and global-cwarn-mode highlights
1858suspicious C and C++ constructions. Currently, assignments inside
1859expressions, semicolon following `if', `for' and `while' (except, of
1860course, after a `do .. while' statement), and C++ functions with
1861reference parameters are recognized. The modes require font-lock mode
1862to be enabled.
1863
424d8b44 1864+++
8964fec7
SM
1865*** smerge-mode.el provides `smerge-mode', a simple minor-mode for files
1866containing diff3-style conflict markers, such as generated by RCS.
1867
424d8b44 1868+++
a933dad1
DL
1869*** 5x5.el is a simple puzzle game.
1870
424d8b44 1871+++
a933dad1
DL
1872*** hl-line.el provides a minor mode to highlight the current line.
1873
1874*** ansi-color.el translates ANSI terminal escapes into text-properties.
1875
8901d1ac
GM
1876Please note: if `ansi-color-for-shell-mode' and
1877`global-font-lock-mode' are non-nil, loading ansi-color.el will
1878disable font-lock and add `ansi-color-apply' to
1879`comint-preoutput-filter-functions' for all shell-mode buffers. This
1880displays the output of "ls --color=yes" using the correct foreground
1881and background colors.
1882
a933dad1
DL
1883*** delphi.el provides a major mode for editing the Delphi (Object
1884Pascal) language.
1885
f6499c03 1886+++
a933dad1
DL
1887*** quickurl.el provides a simple method of inserting a URL based on
1888the text at point.
1889
1890*** sql.el provides an interface to SQL data bases.
1891
424d8b44 1892+++
8d54eb69
DL
1893*** fortune.el uses the fortune program to create mail/news signatures.
1894
a933dad1
DL
1895*** whitespace.el ???
1896
ebcfda83
GM
1897*** PostScript mode (ps-mode) is a new major mode for editing PostScript
1898files. It offers: interaction with a PostScript interpreter, including
1899(very basic) error handling; fontification, easily customizable for
1900interpreter messages; auto-indentation; insertion of EPSF templates and
1901often used code snippets; viewing of BoundingBox; commenting out /
1902uncommenting regions; conversion of 8bit characters to PostScript octal
1903codes. All functionality is accessible through a menu.
1904
1905*** delim-col helps to prettify columns in a text region or rectangle.
1906
1907Here is an example of columns:
1908
1909horse apple bus
1910dog pineapple car EXTRA
1911porcupine strawberry airplane
1912
1913Doing the following settings:
1914
1915 (setq delimit-columns-str-before "[ ")
1916 (setq delimit-columns-str-after " ]")
1917 (setq delimit-columns-str-separator ", ")
1918 (setq delimit-columns-separator "\t")
1919
1920
1921Selecting the lines above and typing:
1922
1923 M-x delimit-columns-region
1924
1925It results:
1926
1927[ horse , apple , bus , ]
1928[ dog , pineapple , car , EXTRA ]
1929[ porcupine, strawberry, airplane, ]
1930
1931delim-col has the following options:
1932
1933 delimit-columns-str-before Specify a string to be inserted
1934 before all columns.
1935
1936 delimit-columns-str-separator Specify a string to be inserted
1937 between each column.
1938
1939 delimit-columns-str-after Specify a string to be inserted
1940 after all columns.
1941
1942 delimit-columns-separator Specify a regexp which separates
1943 each column.
1944
1945delim-col has the following commands:
1946
1947 delimit-columns-region Prettify all columns in a text region.
1948 delimit-columns-rectangle Prettify all columns in a text rectangle.
1949
424d8b44 1950+++
f507826c 1951*** The package recentf.el maintains a menu for visiting files that
31fc5d15
GM
1952were operated on recently.
1953
1954M-x recentf-mode RET toggles recentf mode.
f507826c 1955
31fc5d15
GM
1956M-x customize-variable RET recentf-mode RET can be used to enable
1957recentf at Emacs startup.
f507826c 1958
31fc5d15
GM
1959M-x customize-variable RET recentf-menu-filter RET to specify a menu
1960filter function to change the menu appearance. For example, the recent
1961file list can be displayed:
f507826c 1962
31fc5d15
GM
1963- organized by major modes, directories or user defined rules.
1964- sorted by file pathes, file names, ascending or descending.
1965- showing pathes relative to the current default-directory
f507826c 1966
31fc5d15
GM
1967The `recentf-filter-changer' menu filter function allows to
1968dynamically change the menu appearance.
f507826c 1969
8062f458
DL
1970*** elide-head.el provides a mechanism for eliding boilerplate header
1971text.
1972
424d8b44 1973+++
36e24b82 1974*** footnote.el provides `footnote-mode', a minor mode supporting use
91735437
DL
1975of footnotes. It is intended for use with Message mode, but isn't
1976specific to Message mode.
1977
424d8b44 1978+++
36e24b82
DL
1979*** diff-mode.el provides `diff-mode', a major mode for
1980viewing/editing context diffs (patches). It is selected for files
1981with extension `.diff', `.diffs', `.patch' and `.rej'.
1982
424d8b44 1983+++
aaa659ef
DL
1984*** EUDC, the Emacs Unified Directory Client, provides a common user
1985interface to access directory servers using different directory
1986protocols. It has a separate manual.
1987
eee54b0e
DL
1988*** autoconf.el provides a major mode for editing configure.in files
1989for Autoconf, selected automatically.
1990
424d8b44 1991+++
612839b6
GM
1992*** windmove.el provides moving between windows.
1993
5d94f558 1994*** crm.el provides a facility to read multiple strings from the
612839b6 1995minibuffer with completion.
aaa659ef 1996
399da7e3
DL
1997*** todo-mode.el provides management of TODO lists and integration
1998with the diary features.
1999
6e417ca5
DL
2000*** autoarg.el provides a feature reported from Twenex Emacs whereby
2001numeric keys supply prefix args rather than self inserting.
2002
4a27bdfb
GM
2003*** The function `turn-off-auto-fill' unconditionally turns off Auto
2004Fill mode.
2005
60dd7e0e
DL
2006*** gnus-mule.el is now just a compatibility layer over the built-in
2007Gnus facilities.
2008
dace60cf
JW
2009*** pcomplete.el is a library that provides programmable completion
2010facilities for Emacs, similar to what zsh and tcsh offer. The main
2011difference is that completion functions are written in Lisp, meaning
2012they can be profiled, debugged, etc.
a18a342d 2013
965bc065
DL
2014+++
2015** Refill minor mode provides preliminary support for keeping
2016paragraphs filled as you modify them.
2017
2018+++
2019** The new global minor mode `auto-image-file-mode' allows image files
2020to be visited as images.
2021
a933dad1
DL
2022** Withdrawn packages
2023
2024*** mldrag.el has been removed. mouse.el provides the same
2025functionality with aliases for the mldrag functions.
25a81338 2026
3261c1d8
DL
2027*** eval-reg.el has been obsoleted by changes to edebug.el and removed.
2028
2029*** ph.el has been obsoleted by EUDC and removed.
ce75fd23
GM
2030
2031\f
01242779
DL
2032* Incompatible Lisp changes
2033
2034There are a few Lisp changes which are not backwards-compatible and
2035may require changes to existing code. Here is a list for reference.
2036
2037** Since `format' preserves text properties, the idiom
2038`(format %s foo)' no longer works to remove properties.
2039
2040** Since the `keymap' text property now has significance, some code
2041which uses both `local-map' and `keymap' properties (for portability)
2042may, for instance, give rise to duplicate menus when the keymaps from
2043these properties are active.
2044
4dd4cc14 2045** The change in the treatment of non-ASCII characters in search
01242779 2046ranges may affect some code.
1c14ba45
DL
2047
2048** A non-nil value for the LOCAL arg of add-hook makes the hook
2049buffer-local even if `make-local-hook' hasn't been called, which might
2050make a difference to some code.
2051
4dd4cc14
DL
2052** The new treatment of the minibuffer prompt might affect code which
2053operates on the minibuffer.
2054
7c94ccf6
EZ
2055** The new character sets `eight-bit-control' and `eight-bit-graphic'
2056cause `no-conversion' and `emacs-mule-unix' coding systems to produce
2057different results when reading files with non-ASCII characters
2058(previously, both coding systems would produce the same results).
2059Specifically, `no-conversion' interprets each 8-bit byte as a separate
2060character. This makes `no-conversion' inappropriate for reading
2061multibyte text, e.g. buffers written to disk in their internal MULE
2062encoding (auto-saving does that, for example). If a Lisp program
2063reads such files with `no-conversion', each byte of the multibyte
2064sequence, including the MULE leading codes such as \201, is treated as
2065a separate character, which prevents them from being interpreted in
2066the buffer as multibyte characters.
2067
2068Therefore, Lisp programs that read files which contain the internal
2069MULE encoding should use `emacs-mule-unix'. `no-conversion' is only
2070appropriate for reading truly binary files.
2071
01242779 2072\f
ce75fd23
GM
2073* Lisp changes made after edition 2.6 of the Emacs Lisp Manual,
2074(Display-related features are described in a page of their own below.)
2075
eb1b0c74
GM
2076+++
2077** The new user-option `even-window-heights' can be set to nil
2078to prevent `display-buffer' from evening out window heights.
2079
52d89894
GM
2080+++
2081** The user-option `face-font-registry-alternatives' specifies
2082alternative font registry names to try when looking for a font.
2083
693c4692 2084** Function `md5' calculates the MD5 "message digest"/"checksum".
4301cf66 2085
1c14ba45 2086+++
6bc92b2e
GM
2087** Function `delete-frame' runs `delete-frame-hook' before actually
2088deleting the frame. The hook is called with one arg, the frame
2089being deleted.
2090
1c14ba45 2091+++
39e776cd
SM
2092** `add-hook' now makes the hook local if called with a non-nil LOCAL arg.
2093
a18a342d 2094+++
1396138a 2095** The treatment of non-ASCII characters in search ranges has changed.
a18a342d
DL
2096If a range in a regular expression or the arg of
2097skip-chars-forward/backward starts with a unibyte character C and ends
2098with a multibyte character C2, the range is divided into two: one is
2099C..?\377, the other is C1..C2, where C1 is the first character of C2's
2100charset.
2101
4fbdfdcf
MB
2102+++
2103** The new function `display-message-or-buffer' displays a message in
2104the echo area or pops up a buffer, depending on the length of the
2105message.
2106
6a0b0752
MB
2107** The new macro `with-auto-compression-mode' allows evaluating an
2108expression with auto-compression-mode enabled.
2109
1c14ba45 2110+++
47e351a3
GM
2111** In image specifications, `:heuristic-mask' has been replaced
2112with the more general `:mask' property.
2113
1c14ba45 2114+++
ba9eeda1
GM
2115** Image specifications accept more `:algorithm's.
2116
a2bd77b8
GM
2117** A `?' can be used in a symbol name without escaping it with a
2118backslash.
2119
424d8b44
DL
2120+++
2121** Reading from the mini-buffer now reads from standard input if Emacs
2122is running in batch mode. For example,
2123
2124 (message "%s" (read t))
2125
2126will read a Lisp expression from standard input and print the result
2127to standard output.
2128
2129+++
2130** The argument of `down-list', `backward-up-list', `up-list',
2131`kill-sexp', `backward-kill-sexp' and `mark-sexp' is now optional.
2132
ead53494
GM
2133** If `display-buffer-reuse-frames' is set, function `display-buffer'
2134will raise frames displaying a buffer, instead of creating a new
2135frame or window.
2136
f6499c03 2137+++
27848c01
GM
2138** Two new functions for removing elements from lists/sequences
2139were added
2140
2141- Function: remove ELT SEQ
2142
2143Return a copy of SEQ with all occurences of ELT removed. SEQ must be
2144a list, vector, or string. The comparison is done with `equal'.
2145
2146- Function: remq ELT LIST
2147
2148Return a copy of LIST with all occurences of ELT removed. The
2149comparison is done with `eq'.
2150
1c14ba45 2151+++
27848c01 2152** The function `delete' now also works with vectors and strings.
3ab82477 2153
b548072f
GM
2154** The meaning of the `:weakness WEAK' argument of make-hash-table
2155has been changed.
2156
424d8b44 2157+++
07b14857
KH
2158** Function `aset' stores any multibyte character in any string
2159without signaling "Attempt to change char length of a string". It may
2160convert a unibyte string to multibyte if necessary.
2161
1c14ba45 2162+++
9662da0b
GM
2163** The value of the `help-echo' text property is called as a function
2164or evaluated, if it is not a string already, to obtain a help string.
d5aa31d8 2165
7fce7efb
DL
2166** Function `make-obsolete' now has an optional arg to say when the
2167function was declared obsolete.
2168
1c14ba45 2169+++
5d94f558 2170** Function `plist-member' is renamed from `widget-plist-member' (which is
7fce7efb
DL
2171retained as an alias).
2172
f98d3086
SM
2173** Easy-menu's :filter now works as in XEmacs.
2174It takes the unconverted (i.e. XEmacs) form of the menu and the result
2175is automatically converted to Emacs' form.
2176
87efd256
GM
2177** The new function `window-list' has been defined
2178
39b39373
GM
2179- Function: window-list &optional FRAME WINDOW MINIBUF
2180
2181Return a list of windows on FRAME, starting with WINDOW. FRAME nil or
2182omitted means use the selected frame. WINDOW nil or omitted means use
2183the selected window. MINIBUF t means include the minibuffer window,
2184even if it isn't active. MINIBUF nil or omitted means include the
2185minibuffer window only if it's active. MINIBUF neither nil nor t
2186means never include the minibuffer window.
87efd256 2187
67c9a1d2
GM
2188** There's a new function `some-window' defined as follows
2189
2190- Function: some-window PREDICATE &optional MINIBUF ALL-FRAMES DEFAULT
2191
2192Return a window satisfying PREDICATE.
2193
2194This function cycles through all visible windows using `walk-windows',
2195calling PREDICATE on each one. PREDICATE is called with a window as
2196argument. The first window for which PREDICATE returns a non-nil
2197value is returned. If no window satisfies PREDICATE, DEFAULT is
2198returned.
2199
2200Optional second arg MINIBUF t means count the minibuffer window even
2201if not active. MINIBUF nil or omitted means count the minibuffer iff
2202it is active. MINIBUF neither t nor nil means not to count the
2203minibuffer even if it is active.
2204
2205Several frames may share a single minibuffer; if the minibuffer
2206counts, all windows on all frames that share that minibuffer count
2207too. Therefore, if you are using a separate minibuffer frame
2208and the minibuffer is active and MINIBUF says it counts,
2209`walk-windows' includes the windows in the frame from which you
2210entered the minibuffer, as well as the minibuffer window.
2211
2212ALL-FRAMES is the optional third argument.
2213ALL-FRAMES nil or omitted means cycle within the frames as specified above.
2214ALL-FRAMES = `visible' means include windows on all visible frames.
2215ALL-FRAMES = 0 means include windows on all visible and iconified frames.
2216ALL-FRAMES = t means include windows on all frames including invisible frames.
2217If ALL-FRAMES is a frame, it means include windows on that frame.
2218Anything else means restrict to the selected frame.
2219
ead53494
GM
2220** The function `single-key-description' now encloses function key and
2221event names in angle brackets. When called with a second optional
2222argument non-nil, angle brackets won't be printed.
dce6b995 2223
25fa6deb
GM
2224** If the variable `message-truncate-lines' is bound to t around a
2225call to `message', the echo area will not be resized to display that
088831a6
GM
2226message; it will be truncated instead, as it was done in 20.x.
2227Default value is nil.
25fa6deb 2228
5d94f558 2229** The user option `line-number-display-limit' can now be set to nil,
1681ead6
GM
2230meaning no limit.
2231
5d94f558 2232** `select-safe-coding-system' now also checks the most preferred
c08398de
DL
2233coding-system if buffer-file-coding-system is `undecided' and
2234DEFAULT-CODING-SYSTEM is not specified,
2235
9b2999d0
DL
2236+++
2237** The function `subr-arity' provides information about the argument
2238list of a primitive.
de370c4c 2239
c286608e
SM
2240** `where-is-internal' now also accepts a list of keymaps.
2241
9b2999d0 2242+++
80c05bd3
DL
2243** The text property `keymap' specifies a key map which overrides the
2244buffer's local map and the map specified by the `local-map' property.
2245This is probably what most current uses of `local-map' want, rather
2246than replacing the local map.
2247
4bc7a543
DL
2248** The obsolete variables before-change-function and
2249after-change-function are no longer acted upon and have been removed.
45f485a6
GM
2250
2251** The function `apropos-mode' runs the hook `apropos-mode-hook'.
2252
f6499c03 2253+++
c286608e
SM
2254** `concat' no longer accepts individual integer arguments,
2255as promised long ago.
f0298744 2256
5d94f558 2257** The new function `float-time' returns the current time as a float.
a933dad1
DL
2258\f
2259* Lisp changes in Emacs 21.1 (see following page for display-related features)
2260
2261Note that +++ before an item means the Lisp manual has been updated.
2262--- means that I have decided it does not need to be in the Lisp manual.
2263When you add a new item, please add it without either +++ or ---
2264so I will know I still need to look at it -- rms.
2265
85c75536
MB
2266*** The special form `save-restriction' now works correctly even if the
2267buffer is widened inside the save-restriction and changes made outside
2268the original restriction. Previously, doing this would cause the saved
2269restriction to be restored incorrectly.
2270
0b8a3a6d
DL
2271*** The functions `find-charset-region' and `find-charset-string' include
2272`eight-bit-control' and/or `eight-bit-graphic' in the returned list
2273when it finds 8-bit characters. Previously, it included `ascii' in a
2274multibyte buffer and `unknown' in a unibyte buffer.
2275
2276*** The functions `set-buffer-modified', `string-as-multibyte' and
2277`string-as-unibyte' change the byte sequence of a buffer if it
2278contains a character from the `eight-bit-control' character set.
2279
2280*** The handling of multibyte sequences in a multibyte buffer is
2281changed. Previously, a byte sequence matching the pattern
2282[\200-\237][\240-\377]+ was interpreted as a single character
2283regardless of the length of the trailing bytes [\240-\377]+. Thus, if
2284the sequence was longer than what the leading byte indicated, the
2285extra trailing bytes were ignored by Lisp functions. Now such extra
2286bytes are independent 8-bit characters belonging to the charset
2287eight-bit-graphic.
2288
2289** Fontsets are now implemented using char-tables.
2290
2291A fontset can now be specified for for each independent character, for
2292a group of characters or for a character set rather than just for a
2293character set as previously.
2294
2295*** The arguments of the function `set-fontset-font' are changed.
2296They are NAME, CHARACTER, FONTNAME, and optional FRAME. The function
2297modifies fontset NAME to use FONTNAME for CHARACTER.
2298
2299CHARACTER may be a cons (FROM . TO), where FROM and TO are non-generic
2300characters. In that case FONTNAME is used for all characters in the
2301range FROM and TO (inclusive). CHARACTER may be a charset. In that
2302case FONTNAME is used for all character in the charset.
2303
2304FONTNAME may be a cons (FAMILY . REGISTRY), where FAMILY is the family
2305name of a font and REGSITRY is a registry name of a font.
2306
2307*** Variable x-charset-registry has been deleted. The default charset
2308registries of character sets are set in the default fontset
2309"fontset-default".
2310
2311*** The function `create-fontset-from-fontset-spec' ignores the second
2312argument STYLE-VARIANT. It never creates style-variant fontsets.
2313
2314** The method of composing characters is changed. Now character
2315composition is done by a special text property `composition' in
2316buffers and strings.
2317
2318*** Charset composition is deleted. Emacs never creates a `composite
2319character' which is an independent character with a unique character
2320code. Thus the following functions handling `composite characters'
2321have been deleted: composite-char-component,
2322composite-char-component-count, composite-char-composition-rule,
2323composite-char-composition-rule and decompose-composite-char delete.
2324The variables leading-code-composition and min-composite-char have
2325also been deleted.
2326
2327*** Three more glyph reference points are added. They can be used to
2328specify a composition rule. See the documentation of the variable
2329`reference-point-alist' for more detail.
2330
2331*** The function `compose-region' takes new arguments COMPONENTS and
2332MODIFICATION-FUNC. With COMPONENTS, you can specify not only a
2333composition rule but also characters to be composed. Such characters
2334may differ between buffer and string text.
2335
2336*** The function `compose-string' takes new arguments START, END,
2337COMPONENTS, and MODIFICATION-FUNC.
2338
2339*** The function `compose-string' puts text property `composition'
2340directly on the argument STRING instead of returning a new string.
2341Likewise, the function `decompose-string' just removes text property
2342`composition' from STRING.
2343
2344*** The new function `find-composition' returns information about
2345a composition at a specified position in a buffer or a string.
2346
2347*** The function `decompose-composite-char' is now labeled as
2348obsolete.
2349
965bc065 2350** The new character sets `mule-unicode-0100-24ff',
f620908e 2351`mule-unicode-2500-33ff', and `mule-unicode-e000-ffff' are introduced
965bc065 2352for Unicode characters in the range U+0100..U+24FF, U+2500..U+33FF,
f620908e 2353U+E000..U+FFFF respectively.
0b8a3a6d
DL
2354
2355** The new character sets `japanese-jisx0213-1' and
2356`japanese-jisx0213-2' are introduced for the new Japanese standard JIS
2357X 0213 Plane 1 and Plane 2.
2358
2359+++
2360** The new character sets `eight-bit-control' and `eight-bit-graphic'
2361are introduced for 8-bit characters in the ranges 0x80..0x9F and
f98d3086 23620xA0..0xFF respectively.
0b8a3a6d 2363
399da7e3 2364+++
f0124b4a
DL
2365** If the APPEND argument of `write-region' is an integer, it seeks to
2366that offset in the file before writing.
2367
f98d3086
SM
2368** The function `add-minor-mode' has been added for convenience and
2369compatibility with XEmacs (and is used internally by define-minor-mode).
7464346d 2370
612839b6
GM
2371** The function `shell-command' now sets the default directory of the
2372`*Shell Command Output*' buffer to the default directory of the buffer
2373from which the command was issued.
2374
2375** The functions `query-replace', `query-replace-regexp',
2376`query-replace-regexp-eval' `map-query-replace-regexp',
2377`replace-string', `replace-regexp', and `perform-replace' take two
2378additional optional arguments START and END that specify the region to
2379operate on.
2380
271b4185
GM
2381** The new function `count-screen-lines' is a more flexible alternative
2382to `window-buffer-height'.
2383
2384- Function: count-screen-lines &optional BEG END COUNT-FINAL-NEWLINE WINDOW
2385
2386Return the number of screen lines in the region between BEG and END.
2387The number of screen lines may be different from the number of actual
2388lines, due to line breaking, display table, etc.
2389
2390Optional arguments BEG and END default to `point-min' and `point-max'
2391respectively.
2392
2393If region ends with a newline, ignore it unless optinal third argument
2394COUNT-FINAL-NEWLINE is non-nil.
2395
2396The optional fourth argument WINDOW specifies the window used for
2397obtaining parameters such as width, horizontal scrolling, and so
2398on. The default is to use the selected window's parameters.
2399
2400Like `vertical-motion', `count-screen-lines' always uses the current
2401buffer, regardless of which buffer is displayed in WINDOW. This makes
2402possible to use `count-screen-lines' in any buffer, whether or not it
2403is currently displayed in some window.
2404
3c30cb6e
DL
2405** The new function `mapc' is like `mapcar' but doesn't collect the
2406argument function's results.
2407
62f20204
GM
2408** The functions base64-decode-region and base64-decode-string now
2409signal an error instead of returning nil if decoding fails.
2410
c0510d27 2411** The function sendmail-user-agent-compose now recognizes a `body'
b4da8dfa 2412header in the list of headers passed to it.
c0510d27
GM
2413
2414** The new function member-ignore-case works like `member', but
2415ignores differences in case and text representation.
2416
2417** The buffer-local variable cursor-type can be used to specify the
19d1bc27
GM
2418cursor to use in windows displaying a buffer. Values are interpreted
2419as follows:
2420
2421 t use the cursor specified for the frame (default)
2422 nil don't display a cursor
2423 `bar' display a bar cursor with default width
2424 (bar . WIDTH) display a bar cursor with width WIDTH
2425 others display a box cursor.
2426
9a0dd3dc
GM
2427** The variable open-paren-in-column-0-is-defun-start controls whether
2428an open parenthesis in column 0 is considered to be the start of a
2429defun. If set, the default, it is considered a defun start. If not
2430set, an open parenthesis in column 0 has no special meaning.
2431
d7b511c4 2432** The new function `string-to-syntax' can be used to translate syntax
dc1178bf 2433specifications in string form as accepted by `modify-syntax-entry' to
d7b511c4
GM
2434the cons-cell form that is used for the values of the `syntax-table'
2435text property, and in `font-lock-syntactic-keywords'.
2436
2437Example:
2438
2439 (string-to-syntax "()")
2440 => (4 . 41)
2441
1fa28578
GM
2442** Emacs' reader supports CL read syntax for integers in bases
2443other than 10.
2444
2445*** `#BINTEGER' or `#bINTEGER' reads INTEGER in binary (radix 2).
2446INTEGER optionally contains a sign.
2447
5d94f558 2448 #b1111
1fa28578 2449 => 15
5d94f558 2450 #b-1111
1fa28578
GM
2451 => -15
2452
2453*** `#OINTEGER' or `#oINTEGER' reads INTEGER in octal (radix 8).
2454
5d94f558 2455 #o666
1fa28578
GM
2456 => 438
2457
2458*** `#XINTEGER' or `#xINTEGER' reads INTEGER in hexadecimal (radix 16).
2459
5d94f558 2460 #xbeef
1fa28578
GM
2461 => 48815
2462
2463*** `#RADIXrINTEGER' reads INTEGER in radix RADIX, 2 <= RADIX <= 36.
2464
5d94f558 2465 #2R-111
1fa28578 2466 => -7
5d94f558 2467 #25rah
1fa28578
GM
2468 => 267
2469
3d4ff2dd 2470** The function `documentation-property' now evaluates the value of
f98d3086 2471the given property to obtain a string if it doesn't refer to etc/DOC
e9b4e5ff
GM
2472and isn't a string.
2473
3d4ff2dd
GM
2474** If called for a symbol, the function `documentation' now looks for
2475a `function-documentation' property of that symbol. If it has a non-nil
2476value, the documentation is taken from that value. If the value is
2477not a string, it is evaluated to obtain a string.
2478
16ce590d
DL
2479+++
2480** The last argument of `define-key-after' defaults to t for convenience.
2481
73825616 2482** The new function `replace-regexp-in-string' replaces all matches
16ce590d
DL
2483for a regexp in a string.
2484
2485** `mouse-position' now runs the abnormal hook
2486`mouse-position-function'.
2487
723e779c
GM
2488** The function string-to-number now returns a float for numbers
2489that don't fit into a Lisp integer.
2490
d1e103b2
GM
2491** The variable keyword-symbols-constants-flag has been removed.
2492Keywords are now always considered constants.
2493
31047e0d
DL
2494+++
2495** The new function `delete-and-extract-region' deletes text and
2496returns it.
2497
7a85e4df
GM
2498** The function `clear-this-command-keys' now also clears the vector
2499returned by function `recent-keys'.
2500
02b14400
RS
2501+++
2502** Variables `beginning-of-defun-function' and `end-of-defun-function'
2503can be used to define handlers for the functions that find defuns.
2504Major modes can define these locally instead of rebinding M-C-a
2505etc. if the normal conventions for defuns are not appropriate for the
2506mode.
404fa7d6 2507
02b14400 2508+++
8964fec7
SM
2509** easy-mmode-define-minor-mode now takes an additional BODY argument
2510and is renamed `define-minor-mode'.
2511
02b14400
RS
2512+++
2513** If an abbrev has a hook function which is a symbol, and that symbol
2514has a non-nil `no-self-insert' property, the return value of the hook
2515function specifies whether an expansion has been done or not. If it
2516returns nil, abbrev-expand also returns nil, meaning "no expansion has
2517been performed."
2518
2519When abbrev expansion is done by typing a self-inserting character,
2520and the abbrev has a hook with the `no-self-insert' property, and the
2521hook function returns non-nil meaning expansion has been done,
2522then the self-inserting character is not inserted.
ef961722 2523
02b14400 2524+++
81da8b32
GM
2525** The function `intern-soft' now accepts a symbol as first argument.
2526In this case, that exact symbol is looked up in the specified obarray,
2527and the function's value is nil if it is not found.
2528
02b14400 2529+++
9e207b90
GM
2530** The new macro `with-syntax-table' can be used to evaluate forms
2531with the syntax table of the current buffer temporarily set to a
2532specified table.
2533
2534 (with-syntax-table TABLE &rest BODY)
2535
2536Evaluate BODY with syntax table of current buffer set to a copy of
03d9c64c
GM
2537TABLE. The current syntax table is saved, BODY is evaluated, and the
2538saved table is restored, even in case of an abnormal exit. Value is
2539what BODY returns.
9e207b90 2540
02b14400 2541+++
d7f89643 2542** Regular expressions now support intervals \{n,m\} as well as
95cd4c40 2543Perl's shy-groups \(?:...\) and non-greedy *? +? and ?? operators.
601e0081
SM
2544Also backreferences like \2 are now considered as an error if the
2545corresponding subgroup does not exist (or is not closed yet).
2546Previously it would have been silently turned into `2' (ignoring the `\').
8964fec7 2547
02b14400 2548+++
dde9e75a
GM
2549** The optional argument BUFFER of function file-local-copy has been
2550removed since it wasn't used by anything.
2551
02b14400 2552+++
9da30515
GM
2553** The file name argument of function `file-locked-p' is now required
2554instead of being optional.
2555
02b14400 2556+++
d20679eb
GM
2557** The new built-in error `text-read-only' is signaled when trying to
2558modify read-only text.
2559
02b14400 2560+++
fbc164de
PE
2561** New functions and variables for locales.
2562
2563The new variable `locale-coding-system' specifies how to encode and
2564decode strings passed to low-level message functions like strerror and
b718982a
PE
2565time functions like strftime. The new variables
2566`system-messages-locale' and `system-time-locale' give the system
2567locales to be used when invoking these two types of functions.
fbc164de
PE
2568
2569The new function `set-locale-environment' sets the language
2570environment, preferred coding system, and locale coding system from
2571the system locale as specified by the LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE, and LANG
b718982a
PE
2572environment variables. Normally, it is invoked during startup and need
2573not be invoked thereafter. It uses the new variables
2574`locale-language-names', `locale-charset-language-names', and
2575`locale-preferred-coding-systems' to make its decisions.
fbc164de 2576
02b14400 2577+++
863476d1
SM
2578** syntax tables now understand nested comments.
2579To declare a comment syntax as allowing nesting, just add an `n'
2580modifier to either of the characters of the comment end and the comment
2581start sequences.
2582
02b14400 2583+++
ef6d912c
GM
2584** The function `pixmap-spec-p' has been renamed `bitmap-spec-p'
2585because `bitmap' is more in line with the usual X terminology.
2586
02b14400 2587+++
a933dad1
DL
2588** New function `propertize'
2589
2590The new function `propertize' can be used to conveniently construct
2591strings with text properties.
2592
2593- Function: propertize STRING &rest PROPERTIES
2594
2595Value is a copy of STRING with text properties assigned as specified
2596by PROPERTIES. PROPERTIES is a sequence of pairs PROPERTY VALUE, with
2597PROPERTY being the name of a text property and VALUE being the
2598specified value of that property. Example:
2599
2600 (propertize "foo" 'face 'bold 'read-only t)
2601
2602+++
2603** push and pop macros.
2604
02b14400
RS
2605Simple versions of the push and pop macros of Common Lisp
2606are now defined in Emacs Lisp. These macros allow only symbols
a933dad1
DL
2607as the place that holds the list to be changed.
2608
2609(push NEWELT LISTNAME) add NEWELT to the front of LISTNAME's value.
2610(pop LISTNAME) return first elt of LISTNAME, and remove it
2611 (thus altering the value of LISTNAME).
2612
02b14400
RS
2613** New dolist and dotimes macros.
2614
6c7fd5aa
RS
2615Simple versions of the dolist and dotimes macros of Common Lisp
2616are now defined in Emacs Lisp.
02b14400
RS
2617
2618(dolist (VAR LIST [RESULT]) BODY...)
2619 Execute body once for each element of LIST,
2620 using the variable VAR to hold the current element.
2621 Then return the value of RESULT, or nil if RESULT is omitted.
2622
2623(dotimes (VAR COUNT [RESULT]) BODY...)
2624 Execute BODY with VAR bound to successive integers running from 0,
2625 inclusive, to COUNT, exclusive.
2626 Then return the value of RESULT, or nil if RESULT is omitted.
2627
a933dad1 2628+++
6c083b4c
GM
2629** Regular expressions now support Posix character classes such as
2630[:alpha:], [:space:] and so on. These must be used within a character
2631class--for instance, [-[:digit:].+] matches digits or a period
2632or a sign.
a933dad1
DL
2633
2634[:digit:] matches 0 through 9
2635[:cntrl:] matches ASCII control characters
2636[:xdigit:] matches 0 through 9, a through f and A through F.
2637[:blank:] matches space and tab only
2638[:graph:] matches graphic characters--everything except ASCII control chars,
2639 space, and DEL.
2640[:print:] matches printing characters--everything except ASCII control chars
2641 and DEL.
2642[:alnum:] matches letters and digits.
2643 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
2644 it matches anything that has word syntax.)
2645[:alpha:] matches letters.
2646 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
2647 it matches anything that has word syntax.)
2648[:ascii:] matches ASCII (unibyte) characters.
2649[:nonascii:] matches non-ASCII (multibyte) characters.
2650[:lower:] matches anything lower-case.
2651[:punct:] matches punctuation.
2652 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
2653 it matches anything that has non-word syntax.)
2654[:space:] matches anything that has whitespace syntax.
2655[:upper:] matches anything upper-case.
2656[:word:] matches anything that has word syntax.
2657
2658+++
2659** Emacs now has built-in hash tables.
2660
2661The following functions are defined for hash tables:
2662
2663- Function: make-hash-table ARGS
2664
2665The argument list ARGS consists of keyword/argument pairs. All arguments
2666are optional. The following arguments are defined:
2667
2668:test TEST
2669
2670TEST must be a symbol specifying how to compare keys. Default is `eql'.
2671Predefined are `eq', `eql' and `equal'. If TEST is not predefined,
2672it must have been defined with `define-hash-table-test'.
2673
2674:size SIZE
2675
2676SIZE must be an integer > 0 giving a hint to the implementation how
2677many elements will be put in the hash table. Default size is 65.
2678
2679:rehash-size REHASH-SIZE
2680
2681REHASH-SIZE specifies by how much to grow a hash table once it becomes
2682full. If REHASH-SIZE is an integer, add that to the hash table's old
2683size to get the new size. Otherwise, REHASH-SIZE must be a float >
26841.0, and the new size is computed by multiplying REHASH-SIZE with the
2685old size. Default rehash size is 1.5.
2686
2687:rehash-threshold THRESHOLD
2688
2689THRESHOLD must be a float > 0 and <= 1.0 specifying when to resize the
2690hash table. It is resized when the ratio of (number of entries) /
2691(size of hash table) is >= THRESHOLD. Default threshold is 0.8.
2692
2693:weakness WEAK
2694
b548072f
GM
2695WEAK must be either nil, one of the symbols `key, `value',
2696`key-or-value', `key-and-value', or t, meaning the same as
2697`key-and-value'. Entries are removed from weak tables during garbage
2698collection if their key and/or value are not referenced elsewhere
2699outside of the hash table. Default are non-weak hash tables.
a933dad1
DL
2700
2701- Function: makehash &optional TEST
2702
2703Similar to make-hash-table, but only TEST can be specified.
2704
2705- Function: hash-table-p TABLE
2706
2707Returns non-nil if TABLE is a hash table object.
2708
2709- Function: copy-hash-table TABLE
2710
2711Returns a copy of TABLE. Only the table itself is copied, keys and
2712values are shared.
2713
2714- Function: hash-table-count TABLE
2715
2716Returns the number of entries in TABLE.
2717
2718- Function: hash-table-rehash-size TABLE
2719
2720Returns the rehash size of TABLE.
2721
2722- Function: hash-table-rehash-threshold TABLE
2723
2724Returns the rehash threshold of TABLE.
2725
2726- Function: hash-table-rehash-size TABLE
2727
2728Returns the size of TABLE.
2729
d96d6bb0 2730- Function: hash-table-test TABLE
a933dad1
DL
2731
2732Returns the test TABLE uses to compare keys.
2733
2734- Function: hash-table-weakness TABLE
2735
2736Returns the weakness specified for TABLE.
2737
2738- Function: clrhash TABLE
2739
2740Clear TABLE.
2741
2742- Function: gethash KEY TABLE &optional DEFAULT
2743
2744Look up KEY in TABLE and return its associated VALUE or DEFAULT if
2745not found.
2746
79214ddf 2747- Function: puthash KEY VALUE TABLE
a933dad1
DL
2748
2749Associate KEY with VALUE in TABLE. If KEY is already associated with
2750another value, replace the old value with VALUE.
2751
2752- Function: remhash KEY TABLE
2753
2754Remove KEY from TABLE if it is there.
2755
2756- Function: maphash FUNCTION TABLE
2757
2758Call FUNCTION for all elements in TABLE. FUNCTION must take two
2759arguments KEY and VALUE.
2760
2761- Function: sxhash OBJ
2762
2763Return a hash code for Lisp object OBJ.
2764
2765- Function: define-hash-table-test NAME TEST-FN HASH-FN
2766
2767Define a new hash table test named NAME. If NAME is specified as
2768a test in `make-hash-table', the table created will use TEST-FN for
79214ddf 2769comparing keys, and HASH-FN to compute hash codes for keys. Test
a933dad1
DL
2770and hash function are stored as symbol property `hash-table-test'
2771of NAME with a value of (TEST-FN HASH-FN).
2772
2773TEST-FN must take two arguments and return non-nil if they are the same.
2774
2775HASH-FN must take one argument and return an integer that is the hash
2776code of the argument. The function should use the whole range of
2777integer values for hash code computation, including negative integers.
2778
2779Example: The following creates a hash table whose keys are supposed to
2780be strings that are compared case-insensitively.
2781
2782 (defun case-fold-string= (a b)
2783 (compare-strings a nil nil b nil nil t))
2784
2785 (defun case-fold-string-hash (a)
2786 (sxhash (upcase a)))
2787
79214ddf 2788 (define-hash-table-test 'case-fold 'case-fold-string=
a933dad1
DL
2789 'case-fold-string-hash))
2790
2791 (make-hash-table :test 'case-fold)
2792
2793+++
2794** The Lisp reader handles circular structure.
2795
2796It now works to use the #N= and #N# constructs to represent
2797circular structures. For example, #1=(a . #1#) represents
2798a cons cell which is its own cdr.
2799
2800+++
2801** The Lisp printer handles circular structure.
2802
2803If you bind print-circle to a non-nil value, the Lisp printer outputs
2804#N= and #N# constructs to represent circular and shared structure.
2805
a933dad1
DL
2806+++
2807** If the second argument to `move-to-column' is anything but nil or
2808t, that means replace a tab with spaces if necessary to reach the
2809specified column, but do not add spaces at the end of the line if it
2810is too short to reach that column.
2811
2812+++
2813** perform-replace has a new feature: the REPLACEMENTS argument may
2814now be a cons cell (FUNCTION . DATA). This means to call FUNCTION
2815after each match to get the replacement text. FUNCTION is called with
2816two arguments: DATA, and the number of replacements already made.
2817
2818If the FROM-STRING contains any upper-case letters,
2819perform-replace also turns off `case-fold-search' temporarily
2820and inserts the replacement text without altering case in it.
2821
2822+++
2823** The function buffer-size now accepts an optional argument
2824to specify which buffer to return the size of.
2825
2826+++
2827** The calendar motion commands now run the normal hook
2828calendar-move-hook after moving point.
2829
2830+++
2831** The new variable small-temporary-file-directory specifies a
2832directory to use for creating temporary files that are likely to be
2833small. (Certain Emacs features use this directory.) If
2834small-temporary-file-directory is nil, they use
2835temporary-file-directory instead.
2836
2837+++
2838** The variable `inhibit-modification-hooks', if non-nil, inhibits all
2839the hooks that track changes in the buffer. This affects
2840`before-change-functions' and `after-change-functions', as well as
2841hooks attached to text properties and overlay properties.
2842
2843+++
2844** assoc-delete-all is a new function that deletes all the
2845elements of an alist which have a particular value as the car.
2846
2847+++
2848** make-temp-file provides a more reliable way to create a temporary file.
2849
2850make-temp-file is used like make-temp-name, except that it actually
2851creates the file before it returns. This prevents a timing error,
2852ensuring that no other job can use the same name for a temporary file.
2853
2854+++
2855** New exclusive-open feature in `write-region'
2856
2857The optional seventh arg is now called MUSTBENEW. If non-nil, it insists
2858on a check for an existing file with the same name. If MUSTBENEW
2859is `excl', that means to get an error if the file already exists;
2860never overwrite. If MUSTBENEW is neither nil nor `excl', that means
2861ask for confirmation before overwriting, but do go ahead and
2862overwrite the file if the user gives confirmation.
2863
2864If the MUSTBENEW argument in `write-region' is `excl',
2865that means to use a special feature in the `open' system call
2866to get an error if the file exists at that time.
2867The error reported is `file-already-exists'.
2868
2869+++
2870** Function `format' now handles text properties.
2871
2872Text properties of the format string are applied to the result string.
2873If the result string is longer than the format string, text properties
2874ending at the end of the format string are extended to the end of the
2875result string.
2876
2877Text properties from string arguments are applied to the result
2878string where arguments appear in the result string.
2879
2880Example:
2881
2882 (let ((s1 "hello, %s")
2883 (s2 "world"))
2884 (put-text-property 0 (length s1) 'face 'bold s1)
2885 (put-text-property 0 (length s2) 'face 'italic s2)
b246b1f6 2886 (format s1 s2))
a933dad1
DL
2887
2888results in a bold-face string with an italic `world' at the end.
2889
2890+++
2891** Messages can now be displayed with text properties.
2892
2893Text properties are handled as described above for function `format'.
2894The following example displays a bold-face message with an italic
2895argument in it.
2896
2897 (let ((msg "hello, %s!")
2898 (arg "world"))
2899 (put-text-property 0 (length msg) 'face 'bold msg)
2900 (put-text-property 0 (length arg) 'face 'italic arg)
2901 (message msg arg))
2902
2903+++
2904** Sound support
2905
2906Emacs supports playing sound files on GNU/Linux and the free BSDs
2907(Voxware driver and native BSD driver, aka as Luigi's driver).
2908
2909Currently supported file formats are RIFF-WAVE (*.wav) and Sun Audio
2910(*.au). You must configure Emacs with the option `--with-sound=yes'
2911to enable sound support.
2912
2913Sound files can be played by calling (play-sound SOUND). SOUND is a
2914list of the form `(sound PROPERTY...)'. The function is only defined
2915when sound support is present for the system on which Emacs runs. The
2916functions runs `play-sound-functions' with one argument which is the
2917sound to play, before playing the sound.
2918
2919The following sound properties are supported:
2920
2921- `:file FILE'
2922
2923FILE is a file name. If FILE isn't an absolute name, it will be
2924searched relative to `data-directory'.
2925
6fb40beb
GM
2926- `:data DATA'
2927
2928DATA is a string containing sound data. Either :file or :data
2929may be present, but not both.
2930
a933dad1
DL
2931- `:volume VOLUME'
2932
2933VOLUME must be an integer in the range 0..100 or a float in the range
29340..1. This property is optional.
2935
01242779
DL
2936- `:device DEVICE'
2937
2938DEVICE is a string specifying the system device on which to play the
2939sound. The default device is system-dependent.
2940
a933dad1
DL
2941Other properties are ignored.
2942
01242779
DL
2943An alternative interface is called as
2944(play-sound-file FILE &optional VOLUME DEVICE).
2945
a933dad1 2946** `multimedia' is a new Finder keyword and Custom group.
356673d4 2947
9b2999d0 2948+++
356673d4
DL
2949** keywordp is a new predicate to test efficiently for an object being
2950a keyword symbol.
fc91dc2d
GM
2951
2952** Changes to garbage collection
2953
2954*** The function garbage-collect now additionally returns the number
2955of live and free strings.
2956
2957*** There is a new variable `strings-consed' holding the number of
2958strings that have been consed so far.
2959
a933dad1 2960\f
04545643
GM
2961* Lisp-level Display features added after release 2.6 of the Emacs
2962Lisp Manual
2963
f7eb32aa 2964+++
a299a6f0
GM
2965** The user-option `resize-mini-windows' controls how Emacs resizes
2966mini-windows.
2967
9b2999d0 2968+++
26fcde61
MB
2969** The function `pos-visible-in-window-p' now has a third optional
2970argument, PARTIALLY. If a character is only partially visible, nil is
2971returned, unless PARTIALLY is non-nil.
ea4c1b7c 2972
a299a6f0 2973** On window systems, `glyph-table' is no longer used.
82a452c8 2974
9a8d84ca
DL
2975+++
2976** Help strings in menu items are now used to provide `help-echo' text.
2c69ced2 2977
9b2999d0 2978+++
2c69ced2
GM
2979** The function `image-size' can be used to determine the size of an
2980image.
2981
2982- Function: image-size SPEC &optional PIXELS FRAME
2983
2984Return the size of an image as a pair (WIDTH . HEIGHT).
2985
2986SPEC is an image specification. PIXELS non-nil means return sizes
2987measured in pixels, otherwise return sizes measured in canonical
2988character units (fractions of the width/height of the frame's default
2989font). FRAME is the frame on which the image will be displayed.
2990FRAME nil or omitted means use the selected frame.
2991
9b2999d0 2992+++
ebb8f116
GM
2993** The function `image-mask-p' can be used to determine if an image
2994has a mask bitmap.
2995
2996- Function: image-mask-p SPEC &optional FRAME
2997
2998Return t if image SPEC has a mask bitmap.
2999FRAME is the frame on which the image will be displayed. FRAME nil
3000or omitted means use the selected frame.
3001
f6499c03 3002+++
0b8a3a6d
DL
3003** The function `find-image' can be used to find a usable image
3004satisfying one of a list of specifications.
3005
3006+++
3007** The STRING argument of `put-image' and `insert-image' is now
3008optional.
3009
f6499c03
DL
3010+++
3011** Image specifications may contain the property `:ascent center' (see
3012below).
04545643
GM
3013
3014\f
a933dad1
DL
3015* New Lisp-level Display features in Emacs 21.1
3016
3017Note that +++ before an item means the Lisp manual has been updated.
3018--- means that I have decided it does not need to be in the Lisp manual.
3019When you add a new item, please add it without either +++ or ---
3020so I will know I still need to look at it -- rms.
3021
f6d3257b
GM
3022** The function tty-suppress-bold-inverse-default-colors can be used
3023to make Emacs avoid displaying text with bold black foreground on TTYs.
3024
3025Some terminals, notably PC consoles, emulate bold text by displaying
3026text in brighter colors. On such a console, a bold black foreground
3027is displayed in a gray color. If this turns out to be hard to read on
3028your monitor---the problem occurred with the mode line on
3029laptops---you can instruct Emacs to ignore the text's boldness, and to
3030just display it black instead.
3031
3032This situation can't be detected automatically. You will have to put
3033a line like
3034
3035 (tty-suppress-bold-inverse-default-colors t)
3036
3037in your `.emacs'.
3038
a933dad1
DL
3039** New face implementation.
3040
3041Emacs faces have been reimplemented from scratch. They don't use XLFD
3042font names anymore and face merging now works as expected.
3043
3044+++
3045*** New faces.
3046
3047Each face can specify the following display attributes:
3048
3049 1. Font family or fontset alias name.
79214ddf 3050
a933dad1
DL
3051 2. Relative proportionate width, aka character set width or set
3052 width (swidth), e.g. `semi-compressed'.
79214ddf 3053
a933dad1 3054 3. Font height in 1/10pt
79214ddf 3055
a933dad1 3056 4. Font weight, e.g. `bold'.
79214ddf 3057
a933dad1 3058 5. Font slant, e.g. `italic'.
79214ddf 3059
a933dad1 3060 6. Foreground color.
79214ddf 3061
a933dad1
DL
3062 7. Background color.
3063
3064 8. Whether or not characters should be underlined, and in what color.
3065
3066 9. Whether or not characters should be displayed in inverse video.
3067
3068 10. A background stipple, a bitmap.
3069
3070 11. Whether or not characters should be overlined, and in what color.
3071
3072 12. Whether or not characters should be strike-through, and in what
3073 color.
3074
3075 13. Whether or not a box should be drawn around characters, its
3076 color, the width of the box lines, and 3D appearance.
3077
3078Faces are frame-local by nature because Emacs allows to define the
3079same named face (face names are symbols) differently for different
3080frames. Each frame has an alist of face definitions for all named
3081faces. The value of a named face in such an alist is a Lisp vector
3082with the symbol `face' in slot 0, and a slot for each each of the face
3083attributes mentioned above.
3084
3085There is also a global face alist `face-new-frame-defaults'. Face
3086definitions from this list are used to initialize faces of newly
3087created frames.
79214ddf 3088
a933dad1
DL
3089A face doesn't have to specify all attributes. Those not specified
3090have a nil value. Faces specifying all attributes are called
3091`fully-specified'.
3092
3093+++
3094*** Face merging.
3095
3096The display style of a given character in the text is determined by
3097combining several faces. This process is called `face merging'. Any
3098aspect of the display style that isn't specified by overlays or text
3099properties is taken from the `default' face. Since it is made sure
3100that the default face is always fully-specified, face merging always
3101results in a fully-specified face.
3102
3103+++
3104*** Face realization.
3105
3106After all face attributes for a character have been determined by
3107merging faces of that character, that face is `realized'. The
3108realization process maps face attributes to what is physically
3109available on the system where Emacs runs. The result is a `realized
3110face' in form of an internal structure which is stored in the face
3111cache of the frame on which it was realized.
3112
3113Face realization is done in the context of the charset of the
3114character to display because different fonts and encodings are used
3115for different charsets. In other words, for characters of different
3116charsets, different realized faces are needed to display them.
3117
3118Except for composite characters, faces are always realized for a
3119specific character set and contain a specific font, even if the face
3120being realized specifies a fontset. The reason is that the result of
3121the new font selection stage is better than what can be done with
3122statically defined font name patterns in fontsets.
3123
3124In unibyte text, Emacs' charsets aren't applicable; function
3125`char-charset' reports ASCII for all characters, including those >
31260x7f. The X registry and encoding of fonts to use is determined from
3127the variable `face-default-registry' in this case. The variable is
3128initialized at Emacs startup time from the font the user specified for
3129Emacs.
3130
3131Currently all unibyte text, i.e. all buffers with
3132`enable-multibyte-characters' nil are displayed with fonts of the same
3133registry and encoding `face-default-registry'. This is consistent
3134with the fact that languages can also be set globally, only.
3135
a7c13351 3136+++
a933dad1
DL
3137**** Clearing face caches.
3138
3139The Lisp function `clear-face-cache' can be called to clear face caches
3140on all frames. If called with a non-nil argument, it will also unload
3141unused fonts.
3142
3143+++
3144*** Font selection.
79214ddf 3145
a933dad1
DL
3146Font selection tries to find the best available matching font for a
3147given (charset, face) combination. This is done slightly differently
3148for faces specifying a fontset, or a font family name.
3149
3150If the face specifies a fontset name, that fontset determines a
3151pattern for fonts of the given charset. If the face specifies a font
3152family, a font pattern is constructed. Charset symbols have a
3153property `x-charset-registry' for that purpose that maps a charset to
3154an XLFD registry and encoding in the font pattern constructed.
3155
3156Available fonts on the system on which Emacs runs are then matched
3157against the font pattern. The result of font selection is the best
3158match for the given face attributes in this font list.
3159
3160Font selection can be influenced by the user.
3161
3162The user can specify the relative importance he gives the face
3163attributes width, height, weight, and slant by setting
3164face-font-selection-order (faces.el) to a list of face attribute
3165names. The default is (:width :height :weight :slant), and means
3166that font selection first tries to find a good match for the font
3167width specified by a face, then---within fonts with that width---tries
3168to find a best match for the specified font height, etc.
3169
52d89894
GM
3170Setting `face-font-family-alternatives' allows the user to specify
3171alternative font families to try if a family specified by a face
3172doesn't exist. Likewise, `face-font-registry-alternatives' allows to
3173specify alternative font registry names to try.
a933dad1
DL
3174
3175+++
3176**** Scalable fonts
3177
3178Emacs can make use of scalable fonts but doesn't do so by default,
3179since the use of too many or too big scalable fonts may crash XFree86
3180servers.
3181
3182To enable scalable font use, set the variable
b246b1f6 3183`scalable-fonts-allowed'. A value of nil, the default, means never use
a933dad1
DL
3184scalable fonts. A value of t means any scalable font may be used.
3185Otherwise, the value must be a list of regular expressions. A
3186scalable font may then be used if it matches a regular expression from
3187that list. Example:
3188
3189 (setq scalable-fonts-allowed '("muleindian-2$"))
3190
3191allows the use of scalable fonts with registry `muleindian-2'.
3192
3193+++
3194*** Functions and variables related to font selection.
3195
3196- Function: x-family-fonts &optional FAMILY FRAME
3197
3198Return a list of available fonts of family FAMILY on FRAME. If FAMILY
3199is omitted or nil, list all families. Otherwise, FAMILY must be a
3200string, possibly containing wildcards `?' and `*'.
3201
3202If FRAME is omitted or nil, use the selected frame. Each element of
3203the result is a vector [FAMILY WIDTH POINT-SIZE WEIGHT SLANT FIXED-P
3204FULL REGISTRY-AND-ENCODING]. FAMILY is the font family name.
3205POINT-SIZE is the size of the font in 1/10 pt. WIDTH, WEIGHT, and
3206SLANT are symbols describing the width, weight and slant of the font.
3207These symbols are the same as for face attributes. FIXED-P is non-nil
3208if the font is fixed-pitch. FULL is the full name of the font, and
3209REGISTRY-AND-ENCODING is a string giving the registry and encoding of
3210the font. The result list is sorted according to the current setting
3211of the face font sort order.
3212
79214ddf 3213- Function: x-font-family-list
a933dad1
DL
3214
3215Return a list of available font families on FRAME. If FRAME is
3216omitted or nil, use the selected frame. Value is a list of conses
3217(FAMILY . FIXED-P) where FAMILY is a font family, and FIXED-P is
3218non-nil if fonts of that family are fixed-pitch.
3219
3220- Variable: font-list-limit
3221
3222Limit for font matching. If an integer > 0, font matching functions
3223won't load more than that number of fonts when searching for a
3224matching font. The default is currently 100.
3225
3226+++
3227*** Setting face attributes.
3228
3229For the most part, the new face implementation is interface-compatible
3230with the old one. Old face attribute related functions are now
3231implemented in terms of the new functions `set-face-attribute' and
3232`face-attribute'.
3233
3234Face attributes are identified by their names which are keyword
3235symbols. All attributes can be set to `unspecified'.
3236
3237The following attributes are recognized:
3238
3239`:family'
3240
3241VALUE must be a string specifying the font family, e.g. ``courier'',
3242or a fontset alias name. If a font family is specified, wild-cards `*'
3243and `?' are allowed.
3244
3245`:width'
3246
3247VALUE specifies the relative proportionate width of the font to use.
3248It must be one of the symbols `ultra-condensed', `extra-condensed',
3249`condensed', `semi-condensed', `normal', `semi-expanded', `expanded',
3250`extra-expanded', or `ultra-expanded'.
3251
3252`:height'
3253
787345ff
MB
3254VALUE must be either an integer specifying the height of the font to use
3255in 1/10 pt, a floating point number specifying the amount by which to
3256scale any underlying face, or a function, which is called with the old
3257height (from the underlying face), and should return the new height.
a933dad1
DL
3258
3259`:weight'
3260
3261VALUE specifies the weight of the font to use. It must be one of the
3262symbols `ultra-bold', `extra-bold', `bold', `semi-bold', `normal',
3263`semi-light', `light', `extra-light', `ultra-light'.
3264
3265`:slant'
3266
3267VALUE specifies the slant of the font to use. It must be one of the
3268symbols `italic', `oblique', `normal', `reverse-italic', or
3269`reverse-oblique'.
3270
3271`:foreground', `:background'
3272
3273VALUE must be a color name, a string.
3274
3275`:underline'
3276
3277VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be underlined. If
3278VALUE is t, underline with foreground color of the face. If VALUE is
3279a string, underline with that color. If VALUE is nil, explicitly
3280don't underline.
3281
3282`:overline'
3283
3284VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be overlined. If
3285VALUE is t, overline with foreground color of the face. If VALUE is a
3286string, overline with that color. If VALUE is nil, explicitly don't
3287overline.
3288
3289`:strike-through'
3290
3291VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be drawn with a line
3292striking through them. If VALUE is t, use the foreground color of the
3293face. If VALUE is a string, strike-through with that color. If VALUE
3294is nil, explicitly don't strike through.
3295
3296`:box'
3297
3298VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should have a box drawn
3299around them. If VALUE is nil, explicitly don't draw boxes. If
3300VALUE is t, draw a box with lines of width 1 in the foreground color
3301of the face. If VALUE is a string, the string must be a color name,
3302and the box is drawn in that color with a line width of 1. Otherwise,
3303VALUE must be a property list of the form `(:line-width WIDTH
3304:color COLOR :style STYLE)'. If a keyword/value pair is missing from
3305the property list, a default value will be used for the value, as
3306specified below. WIDTH specifies the width of the lines to draw; it
3307defaults to 1. COLOR is the name of the color to draw in, default is
3308the foreground color of the face for simple boxes, and the background
3309color of the face for 3D boxes. STYLE specifies whether a 3D box
3310should be draw. If STYLE is `released-button', draw a box looking
3311like a released 3D button. If STYLE is `pressed-button' draw a box
3312that appears like a pressed button. If STYLE is nil, the default if
3313the property list doesn't contain a style specification, draw a 2D
3314box.
3315
3316`:inverse-video'
3317
3318VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be displayed in
3319inverse video. VALUE must be one of t or nil.
3320
3321`:stipple'
3322
3323If VALUE is a string, it must be the name of a file of pixmap data.
3324The directories listed in the `x-bitmap-file-path' variable are
3325searched. Alternatively, VALUE may be a list of the form (WIDTH
3326HEIGHT DATA) where WIDTH and HEIGHT are the size in pixels, and DATA
3327is a string containing the raw bits of the bitmap. VALUE nil means
3328explicitly don't use a stipple pattern.
3329
3330For convenience, attributes `:family', `:width', `:height', `:weight',
3331and `:slant' may also be set in one step from an X font name:
3332
3333`:font'
3334
3335Set font-related face attributes from VALUE. VALUE must be a valid
3336XLFD font name. If it is a font name pattern, the first matching font
3337is used--this is for compatibility with the behavior of previous
3338versions of Emacs.
3339
3340For compatibility with Emacs 20, keywords `:bold' and `:italic' can
3341be used to specify that a bold or italic font should be used. VALUE
3342must be t or nil in that case. A value of `unspecified' is not allowed."
3343
3344Please see also the documentation of `set-face-attribute' and
3345`defface'.
3346
787345ff
MB
3347`:inherit'
3348
3349VALUE is the name of a face from which to inherit attributes, or a list
3350of face names. Attributes from inherited faces are merged into the face
3351like an underlying face would be, with higher priority than underlying faces.
3352
a933dad1
DL
3353*** Face attributes and X resources
3354
3355The following X resource names can be used to set face attributes
3356from X resources:
3357
3358 Face attribute X resource class
3359-----------------------------------------------------------------------
3360 :family attributeFamily . Face.AttributeFamily
3361 :width attributeWidth Face.AttributeWidth
3362 :height attributeHeight Face.AttributeHeight
3363 :weight attributeWeight Face.AttributeWeight
3364 :slant attributeSlant Face.AttributeSlant
3365 foreground attributeForeground Face.AttributeForeground
3366 :background attributeBackground . Face.AttributeBackground
3367 :overline attributeOverline Face.AttributeOverline
3368 :strike-through attributeStrikeThrough Face.AttributeStrikeThrough
3369 :box attributeBox Face.AttributeBox
3370 :underline attributeUnderline Face.AttributeUnderline
3371 :inverse-video attributeInverse Face.AttributeInverse
3372 :stipple attributeStipple Face.AttributeStipple
79214ddf 3373 or attributeBackgroundPixmap
a933dad1
DL
3374 Face.AttributeBackgroundPixmap
3375 :font attributeFont Face.AttributeFont
3376 :bold attributeBold Face.AttributeBold
3377 :italic attributeItalic . Face.AttributeItalic
3378 :font attributeFont Face.AttributeFont
3379
3380+++
3381*** Text property `face'.
3382
3383The value of the `face' text property can now be a single face
3384specification or a list of such specifications. Each face
3385specification can be
3386
33871. A symbol or string naming a Lisp face.
3388
33892. A property list of the form (KEYWORD VALUE ...) where each
3390 KEYWORD is a face attribute name, and VALUE is an appropriate value
3391 for that attribute. Please see the doc string of `set-face-attribute'
3392 for face attribute names.
3393
33943. Conses of the form (FOREGROUND-COLOR . COLOR) or
3395 (BACKGROUND-COLOR . COLOR) where COLOR is a color name. This is
3396 for compatibility with previous Emacs versions.
3397
3398+++
3399** Support functions for colors on text-only terminals.
3400
acf3ecb7
EZ
3401The function `tty-color-define' can be used to define colors for use
3402on TTY and MSDOS frames. It maps a color name to a color number on
3403the terminal. Emacs defines a couple of common color mappings by
a933dad1 3404default. You can get defined colors with a call to
acf3ecb7 3405`defined-colors'. The function `tty-color-clear' can be
a933dad1
DL
3406used to clear the mapping table.
3407
acf3ecb7
EZ
3408** Unified support for colors independent of frame type.
3409
3410The new functions `defined-colors', `color-defined-p', `color-values',
3411and `display-color-p' work for any type of frame. On frames whose
3412type is neither x nor w32, these functions transparently map X-style
3413color specifications to the closest colors supported by the frame
3414display. Lisp programs should use these new functions instead of the
3415old `x-defined-colors', `x-color-defined-p', `x-color-values', and
3416`x-display-color-p'. (The old function names are still available for
3417compatibility; they are now aliases of the new names.) Lisp programs
3418should no more look at the value of the variable window-system to
3419modify their color-related behavior.
3420
3421The primitives `color-gray-p' and `color-supported-p' also work for
3422any frame type.
3423
8a5719f0
EZ
3424** Platform-independent functions to describe display capabilities.
3425
3426The new functions `display-mouse-p', `display-popup-menus-p',
3427`display-graphic-p', `display-selections-p', `display-screens',
3428`display-pixel-width', `display-pixel-height', `display-mm-width',
3429`display-mm-height', `display-backing-store', `display-save-under',
3430`display-planes', `display-color-cells', `display-visual-class', and
3431`display-grayscale-p' describe the basic capabilities of a particular
3432display. Lisp programs should call these functions instead of testing
3433the value of the variables `window-system' or `system-type', or calling
3434platform-specific functions such as `x-display-pixel-width'.
3435
a933dad1
DL
3436+++
3437** The minibuffer prompt is now actually inserted in the minibuffer.
a933dad1 3438
463cac2d 3439This makes it possible to scroll through the prompt, if you want to.
3b51cca0
MB
3440To disallow this completely (like previous versions of emacs), customize
3441the variable `minibuffer-prompt-properties', and turn on the
3442`Inviolable' option.
a933dad1
DL
3443
3444The function minubuffer-prompt-end returns the current position of the
3445end of the minibuffer prompt, if the minibuffer is current.
3446Otherwise, it returns zero.
3447
463cac2d
GM
3448** New `field' abstraction in buffers.
3449
3450There is now code to support an abstraction called `fields' in emacs
3451buffers. A field is a contiguous region of text with the same `field'
59927f88 3452property (which can be a text property or an overlay).
463cac2d 3453
9a9dfda8 3454Many emacs functions, such as forward-word, forward-sentence,
463cac2d 3455forward-paragraph, beginning-of-line, etc., stop moving when they come
9a9dfda8 3456to the boundary between fields; beginning-of-line and end-of-line will
463cac2d 3457not let the point move past the field boundary, but other movement
fc7ac24f
GM
3458commands continue into the next field if repeated. Stopping at field
3459boundaries can be suppressed programmatically by binding
3460`inhibit-field-text-motion' to a non-nil value around calls to these
3461functions.
463cac2d
GM
3462
3463Now that the minibuffer prompt is inserted into the minibuffer, it is in
9a9dfda8 3464a separate field from the user-input part of the buffer, so that common
463cac2d 3465editing commands treat the user's text separately from the prompt.
a933dad1 3466
9a9dfda8
GM
3467The following functions are defined for operating on fields:
3468
59927f88 3469- Function: constrain-to-field NEW-POS OLD-POS &optional ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE ONLY-IN-LINE INHIBIT-CAPTURE-PROPERTY
9a9dfda8
GM
3470
3471Return the position closest to NEW-POS that is in the same field as OLD-POS.
59927f88 3472
9a9dfda8
GM
3473A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
3474If NEW-POS is nil, then the current point is used instead, and set to the
3475constrained position if that is is different.
3476
3477If OLD-POS is at the boundary of two fields, then the allowable
3478positions for NEW-POS depends on the value of the optional argument
3479ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE: If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is nil, then NEW-POS is
59927f88 3480constrained to the field that has the same `field' char-property
9a9dfda8
GM
3481as any new characters inserted at OLD-POS, whereas if ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
3482is non-nil, NEW-POS is constrained to the union of the two adjacent
59927f88
MB
3483fields. Additionally, if two fields are separated by another field with
3484the special value `boundary', then any point within this special field is
3485also considered to be `on the boundary'.
9a9dfda8
GM
3486
3487If the optional argument ONLY-IN-LINE is non-nil and constraining
3488NEW-POS would move it to a different line, NEW-POS is returned
3489unconstrained. This useful for commands that move by line, like
3490C-n or C-a, which should generally respect field boundaries
3491only in the case where they can still move to the right line.
3492
59927f88
MB
3493If the optional argument INHIBIT-CAPTURE-PROPERTY is non-nil, and OLD-POS has
3494a non-nil property of that name, then any field boundaries are ignored.
3495
3496Field boundaries are not noticed if `inhibit-field-text-motion' is non-nil.
3497
3498- Function: delete-field &optional POS
9a9dfda8 3499
59927f88 3500Delete the field surrounding POS.
9a9dfda8 3501A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
59927f88 3502If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
9a9dfda8
GM
3503
3504- Function: field-beginning &optional POS ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
3505
3506Return the beginning of the field surrounding POS.
3507A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
59927f88
MB
3508If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
3509If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is non-nil and POS is at the beginning of its
9a9dfda8
GM
3510field, then the beginning of the *previous* field is returned.
3511
3512- Function: field-end &optional POS ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
3513
3514Return the end of the field surrounding POS.
3515A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
59927f88
MB
3516If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
3517If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is non-nil and POS is at the end of its field,
9a9dfda8
GM
3518then the end of the *following* field is returned.
3519
3520- Function: field-string &optional POS
3521
3522Return the contents of the field surrounding POS as a string.
3523A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
59927f88 3524If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
9a9dfda8
GM
3525
3526- Function: field-string-no-properties &optional POS
3527
3528Return the contents of the field around POS, without text-properties.
3529A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
59927f88 3530If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
9a9dfda8 3531
a933dad1
DL
3532+++
3533** Image support.
3534
3535Emacs can now display images. Images are inserted into text by giving
3536strings or buffer text a `display' text property containing one of
3537(AREA IMAGE) or IMAGE. The display of the `display' property value
3538replaces the display of the characters having that property.
3539
3540If the property value has the form (AREA IMAGE), AREA must be one of
3541`(margin left-margin)', `(margin right-margin)' or `(margin nil)'. If
3542AREA is `(margin nil)', IMAGE will be displayed in the text area of a
3543window, otherwise it will be displayed in the left or right marginal
3544area.
3545
3546IMAGE is an image specification.
3547
3548*** Image specifications
3549
3550Image specifications are lists of the form `(image PROPS)' where PROPS
3551is a property list whose keys are keyword symbols. Each
3552specifications must contain a property `:type TYPE' with TYPE being a
35a5514b
GM
3553symbol specifying the image type, e.g. `xbm'. Properties not
3554described below are ignored.
a933dad1
DL
3555
3556The following is a list of properties all image types share.
3557
3558`:ascent ASCENT'
3559
576da55d
GM
3560ASCENT must be a number in the range 0..100, or the symbol `center'.
3561If it is a number, it specifies the percentage of the image's height
5d94f558 3562to use for its ascent.
576da55d
GM
3563
3564If not specified, ASCENT defaults to the value 50 which means that the
3565image will be centered with the base line of the row it appears in.
3566
5d94f558 3567If ASCENT is `center' the image is vertically centered around a
04545643
GM
3568centerline which is the vertical center of text drawn at the position
3569of the image, in the manner specified by the text properties and
3570overlays that apply to the image.
a933dad1
DL
3571
3572`:margin MARGIN'
3573
79214ddf 3574MARGIN must be a number >= 0 specifying how many pixels to put as
a933dad1
DL
3575margin around the image. Default is 0.
3576
3577`:relief RELIEF'
3578
3579RELIEF is analogous to the `:relief' attribute of faces. Puts a relief
3580around an image.
3581
3582`:algorithm ALGO'
3583
47e351a3
GM
3584Apply an image algorithm to the image before displaying it.
3585
3586ALGO `laplace' or `emboss' means apply a Laplace or ``emboss''
3587edge-detection algorithm to the image.
3588
3589ALGO `(edge-detection :matrix MATRIX :color-adjust ADJUST)' means
3590apply a general edge-detection algorithm. MATRIX must be either a
3591nine-element list or a nine-element vector of numbers. A pixel at
3592position x/y in the transformed image is computed from original pixels
3593around that position. MATRIX specifies, for each pixel in the
3594neighborhood of x/y, a factor with which that pixel will influence the
3595transformed pixel; element 0 specifies the factor for the pixel at
3596x-1/y-1, element 1 the factor for the pixel at x/y-1 etc. as shown
3597below.
3598
3599 (x-1/y-1 x/y-1 x+1/y-1
3600 x-1/y x/y x+1/y
3601 x-1/y+1 x/y+1 x+1/y+1)
3602
3603The resulting pixel is computed from the color intensity of the color
3604resulting from summing up the RGB values of surrounding pixels,
3605multiplied by the specified factors, and dividing that sum by the sum
3606of the factors' absolute values.
3607
327652be 3608Laplace edge-detection currently uses a matrix of
a933dad1 3609
47e351a3
GM
3610 (1 0 0
3611 0 0 0
3612 9 9 -1)
3613
3614Emboss edge-detection uses a matrix of
3615
3616 ( 2 -1 0
3617 -1 0 1
3618 0 1 -2)
3619
ba9eeda1
GM
3620ALGO `disabled' means transform the image so that it looks
3621``disabled''.
3622
47e351a3
GM
3623`:mask MASK'
3624
3625If MASK is `heuristic' or `(heuristic BG)', build a clipping mask for
3626the image, so that the background of a frame is visible behind the
3627image. If BG is not specified, or if BG is t, determine the
3628background color of the image by looking at the 4 corners of the
3629image, assuming the most frequently occuring color from the corners is
3630the background color of the image. Otherwise, BG must be a list `(RED
3631GREEN BLUE)' specifying the color to assume for the background of the
3632image.
a933dad1 3633
47e351a3
GM
3634If MASK is nil, remove a mask from the image, if it has one. Images
3635in some formats include a mask which can be removed by specifying
3636`:mask nil'.
a933dad1
DL
3637
3638`:file FILE'
3639
3640Load image from FILE. If FILE is not absolute after expanding it,
3641search for the image in `data-directory'. Some image types support
3642building images from data. When this is done, no `:file' property
3643may be present in the image specification.
3644
518df5c4
GM
3645`:data DATA'
3646
3647Get image data from DATA. (As of this writing, this is not yet
3648supported for image type `postscript'). Either :file or :data may be
3649present in an image specification, but not both. All image types
3650support strings as DATA, some types allow additional types of DATA.
3651
a933dad1
DL
3652*** Supported image types
3653
b246b1f6 3654**** XBM, image type `xbm'.
a933dad1
DL
3655
3656XBM images don't require an external library. Additional image
3657properties supported are
3658
3659`:foreground FG'
3660
3661FG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default
3662is the frame's foreground.
3663
46c5af7f 3664`:background BG'
a933dad1
DL
3665
3666BG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default is
3667the frame's background color.
3668
3669XBM images can be constructed from data instead of file. In this
3670case, the image specification must contain the following properties
3671instead of a `:file' property.
3672
3673`:width WIDTH'
3674
3675WIDTH specifies the width of the image in pixels.
3676
3677`:height HEIGHT'
3678
3679HEIGHT specifies the height of the image in pixels.
3680
3681`:data DATA'
3682
3683DATA must be either
3684
3685 1. a string large enough to hold the bitmap data, i.e. it must
3686 have a size >= (WIDTH + 7) / 8 * HEIGHT
3687
3688 2. a bool-vector of size >= WIDTH * HEIGHT
3689
3690 3. a vector of strings or bool-vectors, one for each line of the
3691 bitmap.
3692
c76e04a8
GM
3693 4. a string that's an in-memory XBM file. Neither width nor
3694 height may be specified in this case because these are defined
3695 in the file.
3696
a933dad1
DL
3697**** XPM, image type `xpm'
3698
3699XPM images require the external library `libXpm', package
3700`xpm-3.4k.tar.gz', version 3.4k or later. Make sure the library is
3701found when Emacs is configured by supplying appropriate paths via
3702`--x-includes' and `--x-libraries'.
3703
3704Additional image properties supported are:
3705
3706`:color-symbols SYMBOLS'
3707
3708SYMBOLS must be a list of pairs (NAME . COLOR), with NAME being the
3709name of color as it appears in an XPM file, and COLOR being an X color
3710name.
3711
3712XPM images can be built from memory instead of files. In that case,
3713add a `:data' property instead of a `:file' property.
3714
a933dad1
DL
3715The XPM library uses libz in its implementation so that it is able
3716to display compressed images.
3717
3718**** PBM, image type `pbm'
3719
3720PBM images don't require an external library. Color, gray-scale and
2b8e9c91
GM
3721mono images are supported. Additional image properties supported for
3722mono images are
3723
3724`:foreground FG'
3725
3726FG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default
3727is the frame's foreground.
3728
3729`:background FG'
3730
3731BG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default is
3732the frame's background color.
a933dad1
DL
3733
3734**** JPEG, image type `jpeg'
3735
3736Support for JPEG images requires the external library `libjpeg',
3bd37feb
GM
3737package `jpegsrc.v6a.tar.gz', or later. Additional image properties
3738are:
3739
a933dad1
DL
3740**** TIFF, image type `tiff'
3741
3742Support for TIFF images requires the external library `libtiff',
3743package `tiff-v3.4-tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image
3744properties defined.
3745
3746**** GIF, image type `gif'
3747
3748Support for GIF images requires the external library `libungif', package
3749`libungif-4.1.0', or later.
3750
3751Additional image properties supported are:
3752
3753`:index INDEX'
3754
3755INDEX must be an integer >= 0. Load image number INDEX from a
3756multi-image GIF file. An error is signalled if INDEX is too large.
3757
3758This could be used to implement limited support for animated GIFs.
3759For example, the following function displays a multi-image GIF file
3760at point-min in the current buffer, switching between sub-images
3761every 0.1 seconds.
3762
3763(defun show-anim (file max)
3764 "Display multi-image GIF file FILE which contains MAX subimages."
3765 (display-anim (current-buffer) file 0 max t))
3766
3767(defun display-anim (buffer file idx max first-time)
3768 (when (= idx max)
3769 (setq idx 0))
518df5c4 3770 (let ((img (create-image file nil nil :index idx)))
a933dad1
DL
3771 (save-excursion
3772 (set-buffer buffer)
3773 (goto-char (point-min))
3774 (unless first-time (delete-char 1))
3775 (insert-image img "x"))
3776 (run-with-timer 0.1 nil 'display-anim buffer file (1+ idx) max nil)))
3777
3778**** PNG, image type `png'
3779
3780Support for PNG images requires the external library `libpng',
3781package `libpng-1.0.2.tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image
3782properties defined.
3783
3784**** Ghostscript, image type `postscript'.
3785
3786Additional image properties supported are:
3787
3788`:pt-width WIDTH'
3789
3790WIDTH is width of the image in pt (1/72 inch). WIDTH must be an
b246b1f6 3791integer. This is a required property.
a933dad1
DL
3792
3793`:pt-height HEIGHT'
3794
3795HEIGHT specifies the height of the image in pt (1/72 inch). HEIGHT
b246b1f6 3796must be a integer. This is an required property.
a933dad1
DL
3797
3798`:bounding-box BOX'
3799
3800BOX must be a list or vector of 4 integers giving the bounding box of
3801the PS image, analogous to the `BoundingBox' comment found in PS
3802files. This is an required property.
3803
3804Part of the Ghostscript interface is implemented in Lisp. See
3805lisp/gs.el.
3806
3807*** Lisp interface.
3808
79214ddf
FP
3809The variable `image-types' contains a list of those image types
3810which are supported in the current configuration.
a933dad1
DL
3811
3812Images are stored in an image cache and removed from the cache when
3813they haven't been displayed for `image-cache-eviction-delay seconds.
3814The function `clear-image-cache' can be used to clear the image cache
084cec2f
GM
3815manually. Images in the cache are compared with `equal', i.e. all
3816images with `equal' specifications share the same image.
a933dad1
DL
3817
3818*** Simplified image API, image.el
3819
3820The new Lisp package image.el contains functions that simplify image
3821creation and putting images into text. The function `create-image'
3822can be used to create images. The macro `defimage' can be used to
3823define an image based on available image types. The functions
3824`put-image' and `insert-image' can be used to insert an image into a
3825buffer.
3826
3827+++
3828** Display margins.
3829
3830Windows can now have margins which are used for special text
3831and images.
3832
3833To give a window margins, either set the buffer-local variables
3834`left-margin-width' and `right-margin-width', or call
3835`set-window-margins'. The function `window-margins' can be used to
3836obtain the current settings. To make `left-margin-width' and
3837`right-margin-width' take effect, you must set them before displaying
3838the buffer in a window, or use `set-window-buffer' to force an update
3839of the display margins.
3840
3841You can put text in margins by giving it a `display' text property
3842containing a pair of the form `(LOCATION . VALUE)', where LOCATION is
3843one of `left-margin' or `right-margin' or nil. VALUE can be either a
3844string, an image specification or a stretch specification (see later
3845in this file).
3846
3847+++
3848** Help display
3849
3850Emacs displays short help messages in the echo area, when the mouse
3851moves over a tool-bar item or a piece of text that has a text property
3852`help-echo'. This feature also applies to strings in the mode line
3853that have a `help-echo' property.
3854
9662da0b 3855If the value of the `help-echo' property is a function, that function
85a8aca9 3856is called with three arguments WINDOW, OBJECT and POSITION. WINDOW is
c20aeb83
GM
3857the window in which the help was found.
3858
3859If OBJECT is a buffer, POS is the position in the buffer where the
3860`help-echo' text property was found.
3861
3862If OBJECT is an overlay, that overlay has a `help-echo' property, and
3863POS is the position in the overlay's buffer under the mouse.
3864
3865If OBJECT is a string (an overlay string or a string displayed with
5ed8d5af 3866the `display' property), POS is the position in that string under the
c20aeb83 3867mouse.
d5aa31d8 3868
9662da0b
GM
3869If the value of the `help-echo' property is neither a function nor a
3870string, it is evaluated to obtain a help string.
3871
3872For tool-bar and menu-bar items, their key definition is used to
3873determine the help to display. If their definition contains a
3874property `:help FORM', FORM is evaluated to determine the help string.
3875For tool-bar items without a help form, the caption of the item is
3876used as help string.
a933dad1
DL
3877
3878The hook `show-help-function' can be set to a function that displays
f0298744
DL
3879the help string differently. For example, enabling a tooltip window
3880causes the help display to appear there instead of in the echo area.
a933dad1
DL
3881
3882+++
3883** Vertical fractional scrolling.
3884
3885The display of text in windows can be scrolled smoothly in pixels.
3886This is useful, for example, for making parts of large images visible.
3887
3888The function `window-vscroll' returns the current value of vertical
3889scrolling, a non-negative fraction of the canonical character height.
3890The function `set-window-vscroll' can be used to set the vertical
3891scrolling value. Here is an example of how these function might be
3892used.
3893
79214ddf
FP
3894 (global-set-key [A-down]
3895 #'(lambda ()
a933dad1 3896 (interactive)
79214ddf 3897 (set-window-vscroll (selected-window)
a933dad1 3898 (+ 0.5 (window-vscroll)))))
79214ddf 3899 (global-set-key [A-up]
a933dad1
DL
3900 #'(lambda ()
3901 (interactive)
79214ddf 3902 (set-window-vscroll (selected-window)
a933dad1
DL
3903 (- (window-vscroll) 0.5)))))
3904
3905+++
3906** New hook `fontification-functions'.
3907
3908Functions from `fontification-functions' are called from redisplay
3909when it encounters a region of text that is not yet fontified. This
3910variable automatically becomes buffer-local when set. Each function
3911is called with one argument, POS.
3912
3913At least one of the hook functions should fontify one or more
3914characters starting at POS in the current buffer. It should mark them
3915as fontified by giving them a non-nil value of the `fontified' text
3916property. It may be reasonable for these functions to check for the
3917`fontified' property and not put it back on, but they do not have to.
3918
3919+++
3920** Tool bar support.
3921
3922Emacs supports a tool bar at the top of a frame under X. The frame
3923parameter `tool-bar-lines' (X resource "toolBar", class "ToolBar")
3924controls how may lines to reserve for the tool bar. A zero value
3925suppresses the tool bar. If the value is non-zero and
3926`auto-resize-tool-bars' is non-nil the tool bar's size will be changed
3927automatically so that all tool bar items are visible.
3928
3929*** Tool bar item definitions
3930
3931Tool bar items are defined using `define-key' with a prefix-key
3932`tool-bar'. For example `(define-key global-map [tool-bar item1] ITEM)'
3933where ITEM is a list `(menu-item CAPTION BINDING PROPS...)'.
79214ddf 3934
a933dad1
DL
3935CAPTION is the caption of the item, If it's not a string, it is
3936evaluated to get a string. The caption is currently not displayed in
3937the tool bar, but it is displayed if the item doesn't have a `:help'
3938property (see below).
79214ddf 3939
a933dad1
DL
3940BINDING is the tool bar item's binding. Tool bar items with keymaps as
3941binding are currently ignored.
3942
3943The following properties are recognized:
3944
3945`:enable FORM'.
79214ddf 3946
a933dad1
DL
3947FORM is evaluated and specifies whether the tool bar item is enabled
3948or disabled.
79214ddf 3949
a933dad1 3950`:visible FORM'
79214ddf 3951
a933dad1 3952FORM is evaluated and specifies whether the tool bar item is displayed.
79214ddf 3953
a933dad1
DL
3954`:filter FUNCTION'
3955
3956FUNCTION is called with one parameter, the same list BINDING in which
3957FUNCTION is specified as the filter. The value FUNCTION returns is
3958used instead of BINDING to display this item.
79214ddf 3959
a933dad1
DL
3960`:button (TYPE SELECTED)'
3961
3962TYPE must be one of `:radio' or `:toggle'. SELECTED is evaluated
3963and specifies whether the button is selected (pressed) or not.
79214ddf 3964
a933dad1
DL
3965`:image IMAGES'
3966
3967IMAGES is either a single image specification or a vector of four
3968image specifications. If it is a vector, this table lists the
3969meaning of each of the four elements:
3970
3971 Index Use when item is
3972 ----------------------------------------
3973 0 enabled and selected
3974 1 enabled and deselected
3975 2 disabled and selected
3976 3 disabled and deselected
79214ddf 3977
4ba7246d
GM
3978If IMAGE is a single image specification, a Laplace edge-detection
3979algorithm is used on that image to draw the image in disabled state.
3980
a933dad1 3981`:help HELP-STRING'.
79214ddf 3982
a933dad1
DL
3983Gives a help string to display for the tool bar item. This help
3984is displayed when the mouse is moved over the item.
3985
dab96841 3986The function `toolbar-add-item' is a convenience function for adding
d1e68bce
DL
3987toolbar items generally, and `tool-bar-add-item-from-menu' can be used
3988to define a toolbar item with a binding copied from an item on the
3989menu bar.
dab96841 3990
8628686a
DL
3991The default bindings use a menu-item :filter to derive the tool-bar
3992dynamically from variable `tool-bar-map' which may be set
3993buffer-locally to override the global map.
3994
a933dad1
DL
3995*** Tool-bar-related variables.
3996
3997If `auto-resize-tool-bar' is non-nil, the tool bar will automatically
3998resize to show all defined tool bar items. It will never grow larger
3999than 1/4 of the frame's size.
4000
79214ddf 4001If `auto-raise-tool-bar-buttons' is non-nil, tool bar buttons will be
a933dad1
DL
4002raised when the mouse moves over them.
4003
4004You can add extra space between tool bar items by setting
4005`tool-bar-button-margin' to a positive integer specifying a number of
4006pixels. Default is 1.
4007
4008You can change the shadow thickness of tool bar buttons by setting
4009`tool-bar-button-relief' to an integer. Default is 3.
4010
4011*** Tool-bar clicks with modifiers.
4012
4013You can bind commands to clicks with control, shift, meta etc. on
79214ddf 4014a tool bar item. If
a933dad1
DL
4015
4016 (define-key global-map [tool-bar shell]
4017 '(menu-item "Shell" shell
4018 :image (image :type xpm :file "shell.xpm")))
4019
4020is the original tool bar item definition, then
4021
4022 (define-key global-map [tool-bar S-shell] 'some-command)
4023
4024makes a binding to run `some-command' for a shifted click on the same
4025item.
4026
4027** Mode line changes.
4028
4029+++
4030*** Mouse-sensitive mode line.
4031
4032The mode line can be made mouse-sensitive by displaying strings there
4033that have a `local-map' text property. There are three ways to display
4034a string with a `local-map' property in the mode line.
4035
40361. The mode line spec contains a variable whose string value has
4037a `local-map' text property.
4038
40392. The mode line spec contains a format specifier (e.g. `%12b'), and
4040that format specifier has a `local-map' property.
4041
40423. The mode line spec contains a list containing `:eval FORM'. FORM
4043is evaluated. If the result is a string, and that string has a
4044`local-map' property.
4045
4046The same mechanism is used to determine the `face' and `help-echo'
4047properties of strings in the mode line. See `bindings.el' for an
4048example.
4049
54522c9f
GM
4050*** If a mode line element has the form `(:eval FORM)', FORM is
4051evaluated and the result is used as mode line element.
4052
a933dad1
DL
4053+++
4054*** You can suppress mode-line display by setting the buffer-local
4055variable mode-line-format to nil.
4056
4057+++
4058*** A headerline can now be displayed at the top of a window.
4059
4060This mode line's contents are controlled by the new variable
4061`header-line-format' and `default-header-line-format' which are
4062completely analogous to `mode-line-format' and
4063`default-mode-line-format'. A value of nil means don't display a top
4064line.
4065
4066The appearance of top mode lines is controlled by the face
4067`header-line'.
4068
4069The function `coordinates-in-window-p' returns `header-line' for a
4070position in the header-line.
4071
4072+++
4073** Text property `display'
4074
623a0aae
GM
4075The `display' text property is used to insert images into text,
4076replace text with other text, display text in marginal area, and it is
4077also used to control other aspects of how text displays. The value of
4078the `display' property should be a display specification, as described
a933dad1
DL
4079below, or a list or vector containing display specifications.
4080
623a0aae
GM
4081*** Replacing text, displaying text in marginal areas
4082
4083To replace the text having the `display' property with some other
4084text, use a display specification of the form `(LOCATION STRING)'.
4085
4086If LOCATION is `(margin left-margin)', STRING is displayed in the left
4087marginal area, if it is `(margin right-margin)', it is displayed in
4088the right marginal area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' STRING
4089is displayed in the text. In the latter case you can also use the
4090simpler form STRING as property value.
4091
a933dad1
DL
4092*** Variable width and height spaces
4093
4094To display a space of fractional width or height, use a display
4095specification of the form `(LOCATION STRECH)'. If LOCATION is
4096`(margin left-margin)', the space is displayed in the left marginal
4097area, if it is `(margin right-margin)', it is displayed in the right
4098marginal area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' the space is
4099displayed in the text. In the latter case you can also use the
4100simpler form STRETCH as property value.
4101
4102The stretch specification STRETCH itself is a list of the form `(space
4103PROPS)', where PROPS is a property list which can contain the
4104properties described below.
4105
4106The display of the fractional space replaces the display of the
4107characters having the `display' property.
4108
4109- :width WIDTH
4110
4111Specifies that the space width should be WIDTH times the normal
4112character width. WIDTH can be an integer or floating point number.
4113
4114- :relative-width FACTOR
4115
4116Specifies that the width of the stretch should be computed from the
4117first character in a group of consecutive characters that have the
4118same `display' property. The computation is done by multiplying the
4119width of that character by FACTOR.
4120
4121- :align-to HPOS
4122
4123Specifies that the space should be wide enough to reach HPOS. The
4124value HPOS is measured in units of the normal character width.
4125
4126Exactly one of the above properties should be used.
4127
4128- :height HEIGHT
4129
4130Specifies the height of the space, as HEIGHT, measured in terms of the
4131normal line height.
4132
4133- :relative-height FACTOR
4134
4135The height of the space is computed as the product of the height
4136of the text having the `display' property and FACTOR.
4137
4138- :ascent ASCENT
4139
4140Specifies that ASCENT percent of the height of the stretch should be
4141used for the ascent of the stretch, i.e. for the part above the
4142baseline. The value of ASCENT must be a non-negative number less or
4143equal to 100.
4144
4145You should not use both `:height' and `:relative-height' together.
4146
4147*** Images
4148
4149A display specification for an image has the form `(LOCATION
4150. IMAGE)', where IMAGE is an image specification. The image replaces,
4151in the display, the characters having this display specification in
4152their `display' text property. If LOCATION is `(margin left-margin)',
4153the image will be displayed in the left marginal area, if it is
4154`(margin right-margin)' it will be displayed in the right marginal
4155area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' the image will be displayed in
4156the text. In the latter case you can also use the simpler form IMAGE
4157as display specification.
4158
4159*** Other display properties
4160
c9e73000 4161- (space-width FACTOR)
a933dad1
DL
4162
4163Specifies that space characters in the text having that property
4164should be displayed FACTOR times as wide as normal; FACTOR must be an
4165integer or float.
4166
c9e73000 4167- (height HEIGHT)
a933dad1
DL
4168
4169Display text having this property in a font that is smaller or larger.
4170
4171If HEIGHT is a list of the form `(+ N)', where N is an integer, that
4172means to use a font that is N steps larger. If HEIGHT is a list of
4173the form `(- N)', that means to use a font that is N steps smaller. A
4174``step'' is defined by the set of available fonts; each size for which
4175a font is available counts as a step.
4176
4177If HEIGHT is a number, that means to use a font that is HEIGHT times
4178as tall as the frame's default font.
4179
4180If HEIGHT is a symbol, it is called as a function with the current
4181height as argument. The function should return the new height to use.
4182
4183Otherwise, HEIGHT is evaluated to get the new height, with the symbol
4184`height' bound to the current specified font height.
4185
c9e73000 4186- (raise FACTOR)
a933dad1
DL
4187
4188FACTOR must be a number, specifying a multiple of the current
4189font's height. If it is positive, that means to display the characters
4190raised. If it is negative, that means to display them lower down. The
4191amount of raising or lowering is computed without taking account of the
c9e73000 4192`height' subproperty.
a933dad1
DL
4193
4194*** Conditional display properties
4195
4196All display specifications can be conditionalized. If a specification
4197has the form `(:when CONDITION . SPEC)', the specification SPEC
4198applies only when CONDITION yields a non-nil value when evaluated.
4199During evaluattion, point is temporarily set to the end position of
4200the text having the `display' property.
4201
4202The normal specification consisting of SPEC only is equivalent to
4203`(:when t SPEC)'.
4204
4205+++
4206** New menu separator types.
4207
4208Emacs now supports more than one menu separator type. Menu items with
4209item names consisting of dashes only (including zero dashes) are
4210treated like before. In addition, the following item names are used
4211to specify other menu separator types.
4212
4213- `--no-line' or `--space', or `--:space', or `--:noLine'
4214
4215No separator lines are drawn, but a small space is inserted where the
4216separator occurs.
4217
4218- `--single-line' or `--:singleLine'
4219
4220A single line in the menu's foreground color.
4221
4222- `--double-line' or `--:doubleLine'
4223
4224A double line in the menu's foreground color.
4225
4226- `--single-dashed-line' or `--:singleDashedLine'
4227
4228A single dashed line in the menu's foreground color.
4229
4230- `--double-dashed-line' or `--:doubleDashedLine'
4231
4232A double dashed line in the menu's foreground color.
4233
4234- `--shadow-etched-in' or `--:shadowEtchedIn'
4235
4236A single line with 3D sunken appearance. This is the the form
4237displayed for item names consisting of dashes only.
4238
4239- `--shadow-etched-out' or `--:shadowEtchedOut'
4240
4241A single line with 3D raised appearance.
4242
4243- `--shadow-etched-in-dash' or `--:shadowEtchedInDash'
4244
4245A single dashed line with 3D sunken appearance.
4246
4247- `--shadow-etched-out-dash' or `--:shadowEtchedOutDash'
4248
4249A single dashed line with 3D raise appearance.
4250
4251- `--shadow-double-etched-in' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedIn'
4252
4253Two lines with 3D sunken appearance.
4254
4255- `--shadow-double-etched-out' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedOut'
4256
4257Two lines with 3D raised appearance.
4258
4259- `--shadow-double-etched-in-dash' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedInDash'
4260
4261Two dashed lines with 3D sunken appearance.
4262
4263- `--shadow-double-etched-out-dash' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedOutDash'
4264
4265Two dashed lines with 3D raised appearance.
4266
4267Under LessTif/Motif, the last four separator types are displayed like
4268the corresponding single-line separators.
4269
4270+++
4271** New frame parameters for scroll bar colors.
4272
4273The new frame parameters `scroll-bar-foreground' and
4274`scroll-bar-background' can be used to change scroll bar colors.
4275Their value must be either a color name, a string, or nil to specify
4276that scroll bars should use a default color. For toolkit scroll bars,
4277default colors are toolkit specific. For non-toolkit scroll bars, the
4278default background is the background color of the frame, and the
4279default foreground is black.
4280
4281The X resource name of these parameters are `scrollBarForeground'
4282(class ScrollBarForeground) and `scrollBarBackground' (class
4283`ScrollBarBackground').
4284
4285Setting these parameters overrides toolkit specific X resource
4286settings for scroll bar colors.
4287
4288+++
4289** You can set `redisplay-dont-pause' to a non-nil value to prevent
4290display updates from being interrupted when input is pending.
4291
4292---
4293** Changing a window's width may now change its window start if it
4294starts on a continuation line. The new window start is computed based
4295on the window's new width, starting from the start of the continued
4296line as the start of the screen line with the minimum distance from
4297the original window start.
4298
4299---
4300** The variable `hscroll-step' and the functions
4301`hscroll-point-visible' and `hscroll-window-column' have been removed
4302now that proper horizontal scrolling is implemented.
4303
4304+++
4305** Windows can now be made fixed-width and/or fixed-height.
4306
4307A window is fixed-size if its buffer has a buffer-local variable
4308`window-size-fixed' whose value is not nil. A value of `height' makes
4309windows fixed-height, a value of `width' makes them fixed-width, any
4310other non-nil value makes them both fixed-width and fixed-height.
4311
4312The following code makes all windows displaying the current buffer
4313fixed-width and fixed-height.
4314
4315 (set (make-local-variable 'window-size-fixed) t)
4316
4317A call to enlarge-window on a window gives an error if that window is
4318fixed-width and it is tried to change the window's width, or if the
4319window is fixed-height, and it is tried to change its height. To
4320change the size of a fixed-size window, bind `window-size-fixed'
4321temporarily to nil, for example
4322
4323 (let ((window-size-fixed nil))
4324 (enlarge-window 10))
4325
79214ddf 4326Likewise, an attempt to split a fixed-height window vertically,
a933dad1 4327or a fixed-width window horizontally results in a error.
e411ce4b
EZ
4328
4329** The cursor-type frame parameter is now supported on MS-DOS
4330terminals. When Emacs starts, it by default changes the cursor shape
4331to a solid box, as it does on Unix. The `cursor-type' frame parameter
4332overrides this as it does on Unix, except that the bar cursor is
4333horizontal rather than vertical (since the MS-DOS display doesn't
4334support a vertical-bar cursor).
76299050 4335
3787e12e 4336
79dfd2cd 4337\f
3787e12e
GM
4338* Emacs 20.7 is a bug-fix release with few user-visible changes
4339
4340** It is now possible to use CCL-based coding systems for keyboard
4341input.
4342
4343** ange-ftp now handles FTP security extensions, like Kerberos.
4344
4345** Rmail has been extended to recognize more forms of digest messages.
4346
4347** Now, most coding systems set in keyboard coding system work not
4348only for character input, but also in incremental search. The
4349exceptions are such coding systems that handle 2-byte character sets
4350(e.g euc-kr, euc-jp) and that use ISO's escape sequence
4351(e.g. iso-2022-jp). They are ignored in incremental search.
4352
4353** Support for Macintosh PowerPC-based machines running GNU/Linux has
4354been added.
4355
79dfd2cd 4356\f
3787e12e
GM
4357* Emacs 20.6 is a bug-fix release with one user-visible change
4358
4359** Support for ARM-based non-RISCiX machines has been added.
4360
79dfd2cd 4361\f
3787e12e
GM
4362* Emacs 20.5 is a bug-fix release with no user-visible changes.
4363
4364** Not new, but not mentioned before:
4365M-w when Transient Mark mode is enabled disables the mark.
4366\f
4367* Changes in Emacs 20.4
4368
4369** Init file may be called .emacs.el.
4370
4371You can now call the Emacs init file `.emacs.el'.
4372Formerly the name had to be `.emacs'. If you use the name
4373`.emacs.el', you can byte-compile the file in the usual way.
4374
4375If both `.emacs' and `.emacs.el' exist, the latter file
4376is the one that is used.
4377
4378** shell-command, and shell-command-on-region, now return
4379the exit code of the command (unless it is asynchronous).
4380Also, you can specify a place to put the error output,
4381separate from the command's regular output.
4382Interactively, the variable shell-command-default-error-buffer
4383says where to put error output; set it to a buffer name.
4384In calls from Lisp, an optional argument ERROR-BUFFER specifies
4385the buffer name.
4386
4387When you specify a non-nil error buffer (or buffer name), any error
4388output is inserted before point in that buffer, with \f\n to separate
4389it from the previous batch of error output. The error buffer is not
4390cleared, so error output from successive commands accumulates there.
4391
4392** Setting the default value of enable-multibyte-characters to nil in
4393the .emacs file, either explicitly using setq-default, or via Custom,
4394is now essentially equivalent to using --unibyte: all buffers
4395created during startup will be made unibyte after loading .emacs.
4396
4397** C-x C-f now handles the wildcards * and ? in file names. For
4398example, typing C-x C-f c*.c RET visits all the files whose names
4399match c*.c. To visit a file whose name contains * or ?, add the
4400quoting sequence /: to the beginning of the file name.
4401
4402** The M-x commands keep-lines, flush-lines and count-matches
4403now have the same feature as occur and query-replace:
4404if the pattern contains any upper case letters, then
4405they never ignore case.
4406
4407** The end-of-line format conversion feature previously mentioned
4408under `* Emacs 20.1 changes for MS-DOS and MS-Windows' actually
4409applies to all operating systems. Emacs recognizes from the contents
4410of a file what convention it uses to separate lines--newline, CRLF, or
4411just CR--and automatically converts the contents to the normal Emacs
4412convention (using newline to separate lines) for editing. This is a
4413part of the general feature of coding system conversion.
4414
4415If you subsequently save the buffer, Emacs converts the text back to
4416the same format that was used in the file before.
4417
4418You can turn off end-of-line conversion by setting the variable
4419`inhibit-eol-conversion' to non-nil, e.g. with Custom in the MULE group.
4420
4421** The character set property `prefered-coding-system' has been
4422renamed to `preferred-coding-system', for the sake of correct spelling.
4423This is a fairly internal feature, so few programs should be affected.
4424
4425** Mode-line display of end-of-line format is changed.
4426The indication of the end-of-line format of the file visited by a
4427buffer is now more explicit when that format is not the usual one for
4428your operating system. For example, the DOS-style end-of-line format
4429is displayed as "(DOS)" on Unix and GNU/Linux systems. The usual
4430end-of-line format is still displayed as a single character (colon for
4431Unix, backslash for DOS and Windows, and forward slash for the Mac).
4432
4433The values of the variables eol-mnemonic-unix, eol-mnemonic-dos,
4434eol-mnemonic-mac, and eol-mnemonic-undecided, which are strings,
4435control what is displayed in the mode line for each end-of-line
4436format. You can now customize these variables.
4437
4438** In the previous version of Emacs, tar-mode didn't work well if a
4439filename contained non-ASCII characters. Now this is fixed. Such a
4440filename is decoded by file-name-coding-system if the default value of
4441enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil.
4442
4443** The command temp-buffer-resize-mode toggles a minor mode
4444in which temporary buffers (such as help buffers) are given
4445windows just big enough to hold the whole contents.
4446
4447** If you use completion.el, you must now run the function
4448dynamic-completion-mode to enable it. Just loading the file
4449doesn't have any effect.
4450
4451** In Flyspell mode, the default is now to make just one Ispell process,
4452not one per buffer.
4453
4454** If you use iswitchb but do not call (iswitchb-default-keybindings) to
4455use the default keybindings, you will need to add the following line:
4456 (add-hook 'minibuffer-setup-hook 'iswitchb-minibuffer-setup)
4457
4458** Auto-show mode is no longer enabled just by loading auto-show.el.
4459To control it, set `auto-show-mode' via Custom or use the
4460`auto-show-mode' command.
4461
4462** Handling of X fonts' ascent/descent parameters has been changed to
4463avoid redisplay problems. As a consequence, compared with previous
4464versions the line spacing and frame size now differ with some font
4465choices, typically increasing by a pixel per line. This change
4466occurred in version 20.3 but was not documented then.
4467
4468** If you select the bar cursor style, it uses the frame's
4469cursor-color, rather than the cursor foreground pixel.
4470
4471** In multibyte mode, Rmail decodes incoming MIME messages using the
4472character set specified in the message. If you want to disable this
4473feature, set the variable rmail-decode-mime-charset to nil.
4474
4475** Not new, but not mentioned previously in NEWS: when you use #! at
4476the beginning of a file to make it executable and specify an
4477interpreter program, Emacs looks on the second line for the -*- mode
4478and variable specification, as well as on the first line.
4479
4480** Support for IBM codepage encoding of non-ASCII characters.
4481
4482The new command M-x codepage-setup creates a special coding system
4483that can be used to convert text between a specific IBM codepage and
4484one of the character sets built into Emacs which matches that
4485codepage. For example, codepage 850 corresponds to Latin-1 character
4486set, codepage 855 corresponds to Cyrillic-ISO character set, etc.
4487
4488Windows codepages 1250, 1251 and some others, where Windows deviates
4489from the corresponding ISO character set, are also supported.
4490
4491IBM box-drawing characters and other glyphs which don't have
4492equivalents in the corresponding ISO character set, are converted to
4493a character defined by dos-unsupported-char-glyph on MS-DOS, and to
4494`?' on other systems.
4495
4496IBM codepages are widely used on MS-DOS and MS-Windows, so this
4497feature is most useful on those platforms, but it can also be used on
4498Unix.
4499
4500Emacs compiled for MS-DOS automatically loads the support for the
4501current codepage when it starts.
4502
4503** Mail changes
4504
4505*** When mail is sent using compose-mail (C-x m), and if
4506`mail-send-nonascii' is set to the new default value `mime',
4507appropriate MIME headers are added. The headers are added only if
4508non-ASCII characters are present in the body of the mail, and no other
4509MIME headers are already present. For example, the following three
4510headers are added if the coding system used in the *mail* buffer is
4511latin-1:
4512
4513 MIME-version: 1.0
4514 Content-type: text/plain; charset=iso-8859-1
4515 Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit
4516
4517*** The new variable default-sendmail-coding-system specifies the
4518default way to encode outgoing mail. This has higher priority than
4519default-buffer-file-coding-system but has lower priority than
4520sendmail-coding-system and the local value of
4521buffer-file-coding-system.
4522
4523You should not set this variable manually. Instead, set
4524sendmail-coding-system to specify a fixed encoding for all outgoing
4525mail.
4526
4527*** When you try to send a message that contains non-ASCII characters,
4528if the coding system specified by those variables doesn't handle them,
4529Emacs will ask you to select a suitable coding system while showing a
4530list of possible coding systems.
4531
4532** CC Mode changes
4533
4534*** c-default-style can now take an association list that maps major
4535modes to style names. When this variable is an alist, Java mode no
4536longer hardcodes a setting to "java" style. See the variable's
4537docstring for details.
4538
4539*** It's now possible to put a list as the offset on a syntactic
4540symbol. The list is evaluated recursively until a non-nil offset is
4541found. This is useful to combine several lineup functions to act in a
4542prioritized order on a single line. However, none of the supplied
4543lineup functions use this feature currently.
4544
4545*** New syntactic symbol catch-clause, which is used on the "catch" and
4546"finally" lines in try-catch constructs in C++ and Java.
4547
4548*** New cleanup brace-catch-brace on c-cleanup-list, which does for
4549"catch" lines what brace-elseif-brace does for "else if" lines.
4550
4551*** The braces of Java anonymous inner classes are treated separately
4552from the braces of other classes in auto-newline mode. Two new
4553symbols inexpr-class-open and inexpr-class-close may be used on
4554c-hanging-braces-alist to control the automatic newlines used for
4555anonymous classes.
4556
4557*** Support for the Pike language added, along with new Pike specific
4558syntactic symbols: inlambda, lambda-intro-cont
4559
4560*** Support for Java anonymous classes via new syntactic symbol
4561inexpr-class. New syntactic symbol inexpr-statement for Pike
4562support and gcc-style statements inside expressions. New lineup
4563function c-lineup-inexpr-block.
4564
4565*** New syntactic symbol brace-entry-open which is used in brace lists
4566(i.e. static initializers) when a list entry starts with an open
4567brace. These used to be recognized as brace-list-entry's.
4568c-electric-brace also recognizes brace-entry-open braces
4569(brace-list-entry's can no longer be electrified).
4570
4571*** New command c-indent-line-or-region, not bound by default.
4572
4573*** `#' is only electric when typed in the indentation of a line.
4574
4575*** Parentheses are now electric (via the new command c-electric-paren)
4576for auto-reindenting lines when parens are typed.
4577
4578*** In "gnu" style, inline-open offset is now set to zero.
4579
4580*** Uniform handling of the inclass syntactic symbol. The indentation
4581associated with it is now always relative to the class opening brace.
4582This means that the indentation behavior has changed in some
4583circumstances, but only if you've put anything besides 0 on the
4584class-open syntactic symbol (none of the default styles do that).
4585
4586** Gnus changes.
4587
4588*** New functionality for using Gnus as an offline newsreader has been
4589added. A plethora of new commands and modes have been added. See the
4590Gnus manual for the full story.
4591
4592*** The nndraft backend has returned, but works differently than
4593before. All Message buffers are now also articles in the nndraft
4594group, which is created automatically.
4595
4596*** `gnus-alter-header-function' can now be used to alter header
4597values.
4598
4599*** `gnus-summary-goto-article' now accept Message-ID's.
4600
4601*** A new Message command for deleting text in the body of a message
4602outside the region: `C-c C-v'.
4603
4604*** You can now post to component group in nnvirtual groups with
4605`C-u C-c C-c'.
4606
4607*** `nntp-rlogin-program' -- new variable to ease customization.
4608
4609*** `C-u C-c C-c' in `gnus-article-edit-mode' will now inhibit
4610re-highlighting of the article buffer.
4611
4612*** New element in `gnus-boring-article-headers' -- `long-to'.
4613
4614*** `M-i' symbolic prefix command. See the section "Symbolic
4615Prefixes" in the Gnus manual for details.
4616
4617*** `L' and `I' in the summary buffer now take the symbolic prefix
4618`a' to add the score rule to the "all.SCORE" file.
4619
4620*** `gnus-simplify-subject-functions' variable to allow greater
4621control over simplification.
4622
4623*** `A T' -- new command for fetching the current thread.
4624
4625*** `/ T' -- new command for including the current thread in the
4626limit.
4627
4628*** `M-RET' is a new Message command for breaking cited text.
4629
4630*** \\1-expressions are now valid in `nnmail-split-methods'.
4631
4632*** The `custom-face-lookup' function has been removed.
4633If you used this function in your initialization files, you must
4634rewrite them to use `face-spec-set' instead.
4635
4636*** Cancelling now uses the current select method. Symbolic prefix
4637`a' forces normal posting method.
4638
4639*** New command to translate M******** sm*rtq**t*s into proper text
4640-- `W d'.
4641
4642*** For easier debugging of nntp, you can set `nntp-record-commands'
4643to a non-nil value.
4644
4645*** nntp now uses ~/.authinfo, a .netrc-like file, for controlling
4646where and how to send AUTHINFO to NNTP servers.
4647
4648*** A command for editing group parameters from the summary buffer
4649has been added.
4650
4651*** A history of where mails have been split is available.
4652
4653*** A new article date command has been added -- `article-date-iso8601'.
4654
4655*** Subjects can be simplified when threading by setting
4656`gnus-score-thread-simplify'.
4657
4658*** A new function for citing in Message has been added --
4659`message-cite-original-without-signature'.
4660
4661*** `article-strip-all-blank-lines' -- new article command.
4662
4663*** A new Message command to kill to the end of the article has
4664been added.
4665
4666*** A minimum adaptive score can be specified by using the
4667`gnus-adaptive-word-minimum' variable.
4668
4669*** The "lapsed date" article header can be kept continually
4670updated by the `gnus-start-date-timer' command.
4671
4672*** Web listserv archives can be read with the nnlistserv backend.
4673
4674*** Old dejanews archives can now be read by nnweb.
4675
4676*** `gnus-posting-styles' has been re-activated.
4677
4678** Changes to TeX and LaTeX mode
4679
4680*** The new variable `tex-start-options-string' can be used to give
4681options for the TeX run. The default value causes TeX to run in
4682nonstopmode. For an interactive TeX run set it to nil or "".
4683
4684*** The command `tex-feed-input' sends input to the Tex Shell. In a
4685TeX buffer it is bound to the keys C-RET, C-c RET, and C-c C-m (some
4686of these keys may not work on all systems). For instance, if you run
4687TeX interactively and if the TeX run stops because of an error, you
4688can continue it without leaving the TeX buffer by typing C-RET.
4689
4690*** The Tex Shell Buffer is now in `compilation-shell-minor-mode'.
4691All error-parsing commands of the Compilation major mode are available
4692but bound to keys that don't collide with the shell. Thus you can use
4693the Tex Shell for command line executions like a usual shell.
4694
4695*** The commands `tex-validate-region' and `tex-validate-buffer' check
4696the matching of braces and $'s. The errors are listed in a *Occur*
4697buffer and you can use C-c C-c or mouse-2 to go to a particular
4698mismatch.
4699
4700** Changes to RefTeX mode
4701
4702*** The table of contents buffer can now also display labels and
4703file boundaries in addition to sections. Use `l', `i', and `c' keys.
4704
4705*** Labels derived from context (the section heading) are now
4706lowercase by default. To make the label legal in LaTeX, latin-1
4707characters will lose their accent. All Mule characters will be
4708removed from the label.
4709
4710*** The automatic display of cross reference information can also use
4711a window instead of the echo area. See variable `reftex-auto-view-crossref'.
4712
4713*** kpsewhich can be used by RefTeX to find TeX and BibTeX files. See the
4714customization group `reftex-finding-files'.
4715
4716*** The option `reftex-bibfile-ignore-list' has been renamed to
4717`reftex-bibfile-ignore-regexps' and indeed can be fed with regular
4718expressions.
4719
4720*** Multiple Selection buffers are now hidden buffers.
4721
4722** New/deleted modes and packages
4723
4724*** The package snmp-mode.el provides major modes for editing SNMP and
4725SNMPv2 MIBs. It has entries on `auto-mode-alist'.
4726
4727*** The package sql.el provides a major mode, M-x sql-mode, for
4728editing SQL files, and M-x sql-interactive-mode for interacting with
4729SQL interpreters. It has an entry on `auto-mode-alist'.
4730
4731*** M-x highlight-changes-mode provides a minor mode displaying buffer
4732changes with a special face.
4733
4734*** ispell4.el has been deleted. It got in the way of ispell.el and
4735this was hard to fix reliably. It has long been obsolete -- use
4736Ispell 3.1 and ispell.el.
4737\f
4738* MS-DOS changes in Emacs 20.4
4739
4740** Emacs compiled for MS-DOS now supports MULE features better.
4741This includes support for display of all ISO 8859-N character sets,
4742conversion to and from IBM codepage encoding of non-ASCII characters,
4743and automatic setup of the MULE environment at startup. For details,
4744check out the section `MS-DOS and MULE' in the manual.
4745
4746The MS-DOS installation procedure automatically configures and builds
4747Emacs with input method support if it finds an unpacked Leim
4748distribution when the config.bat script is run.
4749
4750** Formerly, the value of lpr-command did not affect printing on
4751MS-DOS unless print-region-function was set to nil, but now it
4752controls whether an external program is invoked or output is written
4753directly to a printer port. Similarly, in the previous version of
4754Emacs, the value of ps-lpr-command did not affect PostScript printing
4755on MS-DOS unless ps-printer-name was set to something other than a
4756string (eg. t or `pipe'), but now it controls whether an external
4757program is used. (These changes were made so that configuration of
4758printing variables would be almost identical across all platforms.)
4759
4760** In the previous version of Emacs, PostScript and non-PostScript
4761output was piped to external programs, but because most print programs
4762available for MS-DOS and MS-Windows cannot read data from their standard
4763input, on those systems the data to be output is now written to a
4764temporary file whose name is passed as the last argument to the external
4765program.
4766
4767An exception is made for `print', a standard program on Windows NT,
4768and `nprint', a standard program on Novell Netware. For both of these
4769programs, the command line is constructed in the appropriate syntax
4770automatically, using only the value of printer-name or ps-printer-name
4771as appropriate--the value of the relevant `-switches' variable is
4772ignored, as both programs have no useful switches.
4773
4774** The value of the variable dos-printer (cf. dos-ps-printer), if it has
4775a value, overrides the value of printer-name (cf. ps-printer-name), on
4776MS-DOS and MS-Windows only. This has been true since version 20.3, but
4777was not documented clearly before.
4778
4779** All the Emacs games now work on MS-DOS terminals.
4780This includes Tetris and Snake.
4781\f
4782* Lisp changes in Emacs 20.4
4783
4784** New functions line-beginning-position and line-end-position
4785return the position of the beginning or end of the current line.
4786They both accept an optional argument, which has the same
4787meaning as the argument to beginning-of-line or end-of-line.
4788
4789** find-file and allied functions now have an optional argument
4790WILDCARD. If this is non-nil, they do wildcard processing,
4791and visit all files that match the wildcard pattern.
4792
4793** Changes in the file-attributes function.
4794
4795*** The file size returned by file-attributes may be an integer or a float.
4796It is an integer if the size fits in a Lisp integer, float otherwise.
4797
4798*** The inode number returned by file-attributes may be an integer (if
4799the number fits in a Lisp integer) or a cons cell containing two
4800integers.
4801
4802** The new function directory-files-and-attributes returns a list of
4803files in a directory and their attributes. It accepts the same
4804arguments as directory-files and has similar semantics, except that
4805file names and attributes are returned.
4806
4807** The new function file-attributes-lessp is a helper function for
4808sorting the list generated by directory-files-and-attributes. It
4809accepts two arguments, each a list of a file name and its atttributes.
4810It compares the file names of each according to string-lessp and
4811returns the result.
4812
4813** The new function file-expand-wildcards expands a wildcard-pattern
4814to produce a list of existing files that match the pattern.
4815
4816** New functions for base64 conversion:
4817
4818The function base64-encode-region converts a part of the buffer
4819into the base64 code used in MIME. base64-decode-region
4820performs the opposite conversion. Line-breaking is supported
4821optionally.
4822
4823Functions base64-encode-string and base64-decode-string do a similar
4824job on the text in a string. They return the value as a new string.
4825
4826**
4827The new function process-running-child-p
4828will tell you if a subprocess has given control of its
4829terminal to its own child process.
4830
4831** interrupt-process and such functions have a new feature:
4832when the second argument is `lambda', they send a signal
4833to the running child of the subshell, if any, but if the shell
4834itself owns its terminal, no signal is sent.
4835
4836** There are new widget types `plist' and `alist' which can
4837be used for customizing variables whose values are plists or alists.
4838
4839** easymenu.el Now understands `:key-sequence' and `:style button'.
4840:included is an alias for :visible.
4841
4842easy-menu-add-item now understands the values returned by
4843easy-menu-remove-item and easy-menu-item-present-p. This can be used
4844to move or copy menu entries.
4845
4846** Multibyte editing changes
4847
4848*** The definitions of sref and char-bytes are changed. Now, sref is
4849an alias of aref and char-bytes always returns 1. This change is to
4850make some Emacs Lisp code which works on 20.2 and earlier also
4851work on the latest Emacs. Such code uses a combination of sref and
4852char-bytes in a loop typically as below:
4853 (setq char (sref str idx)
4854 idx (+ idx (char-bytes idx)))
4855The byte-compiler now warns that this is obsolete.
4856
4857If you want to know how many bytes a specific multibyte character
4858(say, CH) occupies in a multibyte buffer, use this code:
4859 (charset-bytes (char-charset ch))
4860
4861*** In multibyte mode, when you narrow a buffer to some region, and the
4862region is preceded or followed by non-ASCII codes, inserting or
4863deleting at the head or the end of the region may signal this error:
4864
4865 Byte combining across boundary of accessible buffer text inhibitted
4866
4867This is to avoid some bytes being combined together into a character
4868across the boundary.
4869
4870*** The functions find-charset-region and find-charset-string include
4871`unknown' in the returned list in the following cases:
4872 o The current buffer or the target string is unibyte and
4873 contains 8-bit characters.
4874 o The current buffer or the target string is multibyte and
4875 contains invalid characters.
4876
4877*** The functions decode-coding-region and encode-coding-region remove
4878text properties of the target region. Ideally, they should correctly
4879preserve text properties, but for the moment, it's hard. Removing
4880text properties is better than preserving them in a less-than-correct
4881way.
4882
4883*** prefer-coding-system sets EOL conversion of default coding systems.
4884If the argument to prefer-coding-system specifies a certain type of
4885end of line conversion, the default coding systems set by
4886prefer-coding-system will specify that conversion type for end of line.
4887
4888*** The new function thai-compose-string can be used to properly
4889compose Thai characters in a string.
4890
4891** The primitive `define-prefix-command' now takes an optional third
4892argument NAME, which should be a string. It supplies the menu name
4893for the created keymap. Keymaps created in order to be displayed as
4894menus should always use the third argument.
4895
4896** The meanings of optional second arguments for read-char,
4897read-event, and read-char-exclusive are flipped. Now the second
4898arguments are INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD. These functions use the current
4899input method (if any) if and only if INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD is non-nil.
4900
4901** The new function clear-this-command-keys empties out the contents
4902of the vector that (this-command-keys) returns. This is useful in
4903programs that read passwords, to prevent the passwords from echoing
4904inadvertently as part of the next command in certain cases.
4905
4906** The new macro `with-temp-message' displays a temporary message in
4907the echo area, while executing some Lisp code. Like `progn', it
4908returns the value of the last form, but it also restores the previous
4909echo area contents.
4910
4911 (with-temp-message MESSAGE &rest BODY)
4912
4913** The function `require' now takes an optional third argument
4914NOERROR. If it is non-nil, then there is no error if the
4915requested feature cannot be loaded.
4916
4917** In the function modify-face, an argument of (nil) for the
4918foreground color, background color or stipple pattern
4919means to clear out that attribute.
4920
4921** The `outer-window-id' frame property of an X frame
4922gives the window number of the outermost X window for the frame.
4923
4924** Temporary buffers made with with-output-to-temp-buffer are now
4925read-only by default, and normally use the major mode Help mode
4926unless you put them in some other non-Fundamental mode before the
4927end of with-output-to-temp-buffer.
4928
4929** The new functions gap-position and gap-size return information on
4930the gap of the current buffer.
4931
4932** The new functions position-bytes and byte-to-position provide a way
4933to convert between character positions and byte positions in the
4934current buffer.
4935
4936** vc.el defines two new macros, `edit-vc-file' and `with-vc-file', to
4937facilitate working with version-controlled files from Lisp programs.
4938These macros check out a given file automatically if needed, and check
4939it back in after any modifications have been made.
4940\f
4941* Installation Changes in Emacs 20.3
4942
4943** The default value of load-path now includes most subdirectories of
4944the site-specific directories /usr/local/share/emacs/site-lisp and
4945/usr/local/share/emacs/VERSION/site-lisp, in addition to those
4946directories themselves. Both immediate subdirectories and
4947subdirectories multiple levels down are added to load-path.
4948
4949Not all subdirectories are included, though. Subdirectories whose
4950names do not start with a letter or digit are excluded.
4951Subdirectories named RCS or CVS are excluded. Also, a subdirectory
4952which contains a file named `.nosearch' is excluded. You can use
4953these methods to prevent certain subdirectories from being searched.
4954
4955Emacs finds these subdirectories and adds them to load-path when it
4956starts up. While it would be cleaner to find the subdirectories each
4957time Emacs loads a file, that would be much slower.
4958
4959This feature is an incompatible change. If you have stored some Emacs
4960Lisp files in a subdirectory of the site-lisp directory specifically
4961to prevent them from being used, you will need to rename the
4962subdirectory to start with a non-alphanumeric character, or create a
4963`.nosearch' file in it, in order to continue to achieve the desired
4964results.
4965
4966** Emacs no longer includes an old version of the C preprocessor from
4967GCC. This was formerly used to help compile Emacs with C compilers
4968that had limits on the significant length of an identifier, but in
4969fact we stopped supporting such compilers some time ago.
4970\f
4971* Changes in Emacs 20.3
4972
4973** The new command C-x z (repeat) repeats the previous command
4974including its argument. If you repeat the z afterward,
4975it repeats the command additional times; thus, you can
4976perform many repetitions with one keystroke per repetition.
4977
4978** Emacs now supports "selective undo" which undoes only within a
4979specified region. To do this, set point and mark around the desired
4980region and type C-u C-x u (or C-u C-_). You can then continue undoing
4981further, within the same region, by repeating the ordinary undo
4982command C-x u or C-_. This will keep undoing changes that were made
4983within the region you originally specified, until either all of them
4984are undone, or it encounters a change which crosses the edge of that
4985region.
4986
4987In Transient Mark mode, undoing when a region is active requests
4988selective undo.
4989
4990** If you specify --unibyte when starting Emacs, then all buffers are
4991unibyte, except when a Lisp program specifically creates a multibyte
4992buffer. Setting the environment variable EMACS_UNIBYTE has the same
4993effect. The --no-unibyte option overrides EMACS_UNIBYTE and directs
4994Emacs to run normally in multibyte mode.
4995
4996The option --unibyte does not affect the reading of Emacs Lisp files,
4997though. If you want a Lisp file to be read in unibyte mode, use
4998-*-unibyte: t;-*- on its first line. That will force Emacs to
4999load that file in unibyte mode, regardless of how Emacs was started.
5000
5001** toggle-enable-multibyte-characters no longer has a key binding and
5002no longer appears in the menu bar. We've realized that changing the
5003enable-multibyte-characters variable in an existing buffer is
5004something that most users not do.
5005
5006** You can specify a coding system to use for the next cut or paste
5007operations through the window system with the command C-x RET X.
5008The coding system can make a difference for communication with other
5009applications.
5010
5011C-x RET x specifies a coding system for all subsequent cutting and
5012pasting operations.
5013
5014** You can specify the printer to use for commands that do printing by
5015setting the variable `printer-name'. Just what a printer name looks
5016like depends on your operating system. You can specify a different
5017printer for the Postscript printing commands by setting
5018`ps-printer-name'.
5019
5020** Emacs now supports on-the-fly spell checking by the means of a
5021minor mode. It is called M-x flyspell-mode. You don't have to remember
5022any other special commands to use it, and you will hardly notice it
5023except when you make a spelling error. Flyspell works by highlighting
5024incorrect words as soon as they are completed or as soon as the cursor
5025hits a new word.
5026
5027Flyspell mode works with whichever dictionary you have selected for
5028Ispell in Emacs. In TeX mode, it understands TeX syntax so as not
5029to be confused by TeX commands.
5030
5031You can correct a misspelled word by editing it into something
5032correct. You can also correct it, or accept it as correct, by
5033clicking on the word with Mouse-2; that gives you a pop-up menu
5034of various alternative replacements and actions.
5035
5036Flyspell mode also proposes "automatic" corrections. M-TAB replaces
5037the current misspelled word with a possible correction. If several
5038corrections are made possible, M-TAB cycles through them in
5039alphabetical order, or in order of decreasing likelihood if
5040flyspell-sort-corrections is nil.
5041
5042Flyspell mode also flags an error when a word is repeated, if
5043flyspell-mark-duplications-flag is non-nil.
5044
5045** Changes in input method usage.
5046
5047Now you can use arrow keys (right, left, down, up) for selecting among
5048the alternatives just the same way as you do by C-f, C-b, C-n, and C-p
5049respectively.
5050
5051You can use the ENTER key to accept the current conversion.
5052
5053If you type TAB to display a list of alternatives, you can select one
5054of the alternatives with Mouse-2.
5055
5056The meaning of the variable `input-method-verbose-flag' is changed so
5057that you can set it to t, nil, `default', or `complex-only'.
5058
5059 If the value is nil, extra guidance is never given.
5060
5061 If the value is t, extra guidance is always given.
5062
5063 If the value is `complex-only', extra guidance is always given only
5064 when you are using complex input methods such as chinese-py.
5065
5066 If the value is `default' (this is the default), extra guidance is
5067 given in the following case:
5068 o When you are using a complex input method.
5069 o When you are using a simple input method but not in the minibuffer.
5070
5071If you are using Emacs through a very slow line, setting
5072input-method-verbose-flag to nil or to complex-only is a good choice,
5073and if you are using an input method you are not familiar with,
5074setting it to t is helpful.
5075
5076The old command select-input-method is now called set-input-method.
5077
5078In the language environment "Korean", you can use the following
5079keys:
5080 Shift-SPC toggle-korean-input-method
5081 C-F9 quail-hangul-switch-symbol-ksc
5082 F9 quail-hangul-switch-hanja
5083These key bindings are canceled when you switch to another language
5084environment.
5085
5086** The minibuffer history of file names now records the specified file
5087names, not the entire minibuffer input. For example, if the
5088minibuffer starts out with /usr/foo/, you might type in /etc/passwd to
5089get
5090
5091 /usr/foo//etc/passwd
5092
5093which stands for the file /etc/passwd.
5094
5095Formerly, this used to put /usr/foo//etc/passwd in the history list.
5096Now this puts just /etc/passwd in the history list.
5097
5098** If you are root, Emacs sets backup-by-copying-when-mismatch to t
5099at startup, so that saving a file will be sure to preserve
5100its owner and group.
5101
5102** find-func.el can now also find the place of definition of Emacs
5103Lisp variables in user-loaded libraries.
5104
5105** C-x r t (string-rectangle) now deletes the existing rectangle
5106contents before inserting the specified string on each line.
5107
5108** There is a new command delete-whitespace-rectangle
5109which deletes whitespace starting from a particular column
5110in all the lines on a rectangle. The column is specified
5111by the left edge of the rectangle.
5112
5113** You can now store a number into a register with C-u NUMBER C-x r n REG,
5114increment it by INC with C-u INC C-x r + REG (to increment by one, omit
5115C-u INC), and insert it in the buffer with C-x r g REG. This is useful
5116for writing keyboard macros.
5117
5118** The new command M-x speedbar displays a frame in which directories,
5119files, and tags can be displayed, manipulated, and jumped to. The
5120frame defaults to 20 characters in width, and is the same height as
5121the frame that it was started from. Some major modes define
5122additional commands for the speedbar, including Rmail, GUD/GDB, and
5123info.
5124
5125** query-replace-regexp is now bound to C-M-%.
5126
5127** In Transient Mark mode, when the region is active, M-x
5128query-replace and the other replace commands now operate on the region
5129contents only.
5130
5131** M-x write-region, when used interactively, now asks for
5132confirmation before overwriting an existing file. When you call
5133the function from a Lisp program, a new optional argument CONFIRM
5134says whether to ask for confirmation in this case.
5135
5136** If you use find-file-literally and the file is already visited
5137non-literally, the command asks you whether to revisit the file
5138literally. If you say no, it signals an error.
5139
5140** Major modes defined with the "derived mode" feature
5141now use the proper name for the mode hook: WHATEVER-mode-hook.
5142Formerly they used the name WHATEVER-mode-hooks, but that is
5143inconsistent with Emacs conventions.
5144
5145** shell-command-on-region (and shell-command) reports success or
5146failure if the command produces no output.
5147
5148** Set focus-follows-mouse to nil if your window system or window
5149manager does not transfer focus to another window when you just move
5150the mouse.
5151
5152** mouse-menu-buffer-maxlen has been renamed to
5153mouse-buffer-menu-maxlen to be consistent with the other related
5154function and variable names.
5155
5156** The new variable auto-coding-alist specifies coding systems for
5157reading specific files. This has higher priority than
5158file-coding-system-alist.
5159
5160** If you set the variable unibyte-display-via-language-environment to
5161t, then Emacs displays non-ASCII characters are displayed by
5162converting them to the equivalent multibyte characters according to
5163the current language environment. As a result, they are displayed
5164according to the current fontset.
5165
5166** C-q's handling of codes in the range 0200 through 0377 is changed.
5167
5168The codes in the range 0200 through 0237 are inserted as one byte of
5169that code regardless of the values of nonascii-translation-table and
5170nonascii-insert-offset.
5171
5172For the codes in the range 0240 through 0377, if
5173enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil and nonascii-translation-table
5174nor nonascii-insert-offset can't convert them to valid multibyte
5175characters, they are converted to Latin-1 characters.
5176
5177** If you try to find a file that is not read-accessible, you now get
5178an error, rather than an empty buffer and a warning.
5179
5180** In the minibuffer history commands M-r and M-s, an upper case
5181letter in the regular expression forces case-sensitive search.
5182
5183** In the *Help* buffer, cross-references to commands and variables
5184are inferred and hyperlinked. Use C-h m in Help mode for the relevant
5185command keys.
5186
5187** M-x apropos-command, with a prefix argument, no longer looks for
5188user option variables--instead it looks for noninteractive functions.
5189
5190Meanwhile, the command apropos-variable normally searches for
5191user option variables; with a prefix argument, it looks at
5192all variables that have documentation.
5193
5194** When you type a long line in the minibuffer, and the minibuffer
5195shows just one line, automatically scrolling works in a special way
5196that shows you overlap with the previous line of text. The variable
5197minibuffer-scroll-overlap controls how many characters of overlap
5198it should show; the default is 20.
5199
5200Meanwhile, Resize Minibuffer mode is still available; in that mode,
5201the minibuffer grows taller (up to a point) as needed to show the whole
5202of your input.
5203
5204** The new command M-x customize-changed-options lets you customize
5205all the options whose meanings or default values have changed in
5206recent Emacs versions. You specify a previous Emacs version number as
5207argument, and the command creates a customization buffer showing all
5208the customizable options which were changed since that version.
5209Newly added options are included as well.
5210
5211If you don't specify a particular version number argument,
5212then the customization buffer shows all the customizable options
5213for which Emacs versions of changes are recorded.
5214
5215This function is also bound to the Changed Options entry in the
5216Customize menu.
5217
5218** When you run M-x grep with a prefix argument, it figures out
5219the tag around point and puts that into the default grep command.
5220
5221** The new command M-* (pop-tag-mark) pops back through a history of
5222buffer positions from which M-. or other tag-finding commands were
5223invoked.
5224
5225** The new variable comment-padding specifies the number of spaces
5226that `comment-region' will insert before the actual text of the comment.
5227The default is 1.
5228
5229** In Fortran mode the characters `.', `_' and `$' now have symbol
5230syntax, not word syntax. Fortran mode now supports `imenu' and has
5231new commands fortran-join-line (M-^) and fortran-narrow-to-subprogram
5232(C-x n d). M-q can be used to fill a statement or comment block
5233sensibly.
5234
5235** GUD now supports jdb, the Java debugger, and pdb, the Python debugger.
5236
5237** If you set the variable add-log-keep-changes-together to a non-nil
5238value, the command `C-x 4 a' will automatically notice when you make
5239two entries in one day for one file, and combine them.
5240
5241** You can use the command M-x diary-mail-entries to mail yourself a
5242reminder about upcoming diary entries. See the documentation string
5243for a sample shell script for calling this function automatically
5244every night.
5245
5246** Desktop changes
5247
5248*** All you need to do to enable use of the Desktop package, is to set
5249the variable desktop-enable to t with Custom.
5250
5251*** Minor modes are now restored. Which minor modes are restored
5252and how modes are restored is controlled by `desktop-minor-mode-table'.
5253
5254** There is no need to do anything special, now, to enable Gnus to
5255read and post multi-lingual articles.
5256
5257** Outline mode has now support for showing hidden outlines when
5258doing an isearch. In order for this to happen search-invisible should
5259be set to open (the default). If an isearch match is inside a hidden
5260outline the outline is made visible. If you continue pressing C-s and
5261the match moves outside the formerly invisible outline, the outline is
5262made invisible again.
5263
5264** Mail reading and sending changes
5265
5266*** The Rmail e command now switches to displaying the whole header of
5267the message before it lets you edit the message. This is so that any
5268changes you make in the header will not be lost if you subsequently
5269toggle.
5270
5271*** The w command in Rmail, which writes the message body into a file,
5272now works in the summary buffer as well. (The command to delete the
5273summary buffer is now Q.) The default file name for the w command, if
5274the message has no subject, is stored in the variable
5275rmail-default-body-file.
5276
5277*** Most of the commands and modes that operate on mail and netnews no
5278longer depend on the value of mail-header-separator. Instead, they
5279handle whatever separator the buffer happens to use.
5280
5281*** If you set mail-signature to a value which is not t, nil, or a string,
5282it should be an expression. When you send a message, this expression
5283is evaluated to insert the signature.
5284
5285*** The new Lisp library feedmail.el (version 8) enhances processing of
5286outbound email messages. It works in coordination with other email
5287handling packages (e.g., rmail, VM, gnus) and is responsible for
5288putting final touches on messages and actually submitting them for
5289transmission. Users of the emacs program "fakemail" might be
5290especially interested in trying feedmail.
5291
5292feedmail is not enabled by default. See comments at the top of
5293feedmail.el for set-up instructions. Among the bigger features
5294provided by feedmail are:
5295
5296**** you can park outgoing messages into a disk-based queue and
5297stimulate sending some or all of them later (handy for laptop users);
5298there is also a queue for draft messages
5299
5300**** you can get one last look at the prepped outbound message and
5301be prompted for confirmation
5302
5303**** does smart filling of address headers
5304
5305**** can generate a MESSAGE-ID: line and a DATE: line; the date can be
5306the time the message was written or the time it is being sent; this
5307can make FCC copies more closely resemble copies that recipients get
5308
5309**** you can specify an arbitrary function for actually transmitting
5310the message; included in feedmail are interfaces for /bin/[r]mail,
5311/usr/lib/sendmail, and elisp smtpmail; it's easy to write a new
5312function for something else (10-20 lines of elisp)
5313
5314** Dired changes
5315
5316*** The Dired function dired-do-toggle, which toggles marked and unmarked
5317files, is now bound to "t" instead of "T".
5318
5319*** dired-at-point has been added to ffap.el. It allows one to easily
5320run Dired on the directory name at point.
5321
5322*** Dired has a new command: %g. It searches the contents of
5323files in the directory and marks each file that contains a match
5324for a specified regexp.
5325
5326** VC Changes
5327
5328*** New option vc-ignore-vc-files lets you turn off version control
5329conveniently.
5330
5331*** VC Dired has been completely rewritten. It is now much
5332faster, especially for CVS, and works very similar to ordinary
5333Dired.
5334
5335VC Dired is invoked by typing C-x v d and entering the name of the
5336directory to display. By default, VC Dired gives you a recursive
5337listing of all files at or below the given directory which are
5338currently locked (for CVS, all files not up-to-date are shown).
5339
5340You can change the listing format by setting vc-dired-recurse to nil,
5341then it shows only the given directory, and you may also set
5342vc-dired-terse-display to nil, then it shows all files under version
5343control plus the names of any subdirectories, so that you can type `i'
5344on such lines to insert them manually, as in ordinary Dired.
5345
5346All Dired commands operate normally in VC Dired, except for `v', which
5347is redefined as the version control prefix. That means you may type
5348`v l', `v =' etc. to invoke `vc-print-log', `vc-diff' and the like on
5349the file named in the current Dired buffer line. `v v' invokes
5350`vc-next-action' on this file, or on all files currently marked.
5351
5352The new command `v t' (vc-dired-toggle-terse-mode) allows you to
5353toggle between terse display (only locked files) and full display (all
5354VC files plus subdirectories). There is also a special command,
5355`* l', to mark all files currently locked.
5356
5357Giving a prefix argument to C-x v d now does the same thing as in
5358ordinary Dired: it allows you to supply additional options for the ls
5359command in the minibuffer, to fine-tune VC Dired's output.
5360
5361*** Under CVS, if you merge changes from the repository into a working
5362file, and CVS detects conflicts, VC now offers to start an ediff
5363session to resolve them.
5364
5365Alternatively, you can use the new command `vc-resolve-conflicts' to
5366resolve conflicts in a file at any time. It works in any buffer that
5367contains conflict markers as generated by rcsmerge (which is what CVS
5368uses as well).
5369
5370*** You can now transfer changes between branches, using the new
5371command vc-merge (C-x v m). It is implemented for RCS and CVS. When
5372you invoke it in a buffer under version-control, you can specify
5373either an entire branch or a pair of versions, and the changes on that
5374branch or between the two versions are merged into the working file.
5375If this results in any conflicts, they may be resolved interactively,
5376using ediff.
5377
5378** Changes in Font Lock
5379
5380*** The face and variable previously known as font-lock-reference-face
5381are now called font-lock-constant-face to better reflect their typical
5382use for highlighting constants and labels. (Its face properties are
5383unchanged.) The variable font-lock-reference-face remains for now for
5384compatibility reasons, but its value is font-lock-constant-face.
5385
5386** Frame name display changes
5387
5388*** The command set-frame-name lets you set the name of the current
5389frame. You can use the new command select-frame-by-name to select and
5390raise a frame; this is mostly useful on character-only terminals, or
5391when many frames are invisible or iconified.
5392
5393*** On character-only terminal (not a window system), changing the
5394frame name is now reflected on the mode line and in the Buffers/Frames
5395menu.
5396
5397** Comint (subshell) changes
5398
5399*** In Comint modes, the commands to kill, stop or interrupt a
5400subjob now also kill pending input. This is for compatibility
5401with ordinary shells, where the signal characters do this.
5402
5403*** There are new commands in Comint mode.
5404
5405C-c C-x fetches the "next" line from the input history;
5406that is, the line after the last line you got.
5407You can use this command to fetch successive lines, one by one.
5408
5409C-c SPC accumulates lines of input. More precisely, it arranges to
5410send the current line together with the following line, when you send
5411the following line.
5412
5413C-c C-a if repeated twice consecutively now moves to the process mark,
5414which separates the pending input from the subprocess output and the
5415previously sent input.
5416
5417C-c M-r now runs comint-previous-matching-input-from-input;
5418it searches for a previous command, using the current pending input
5419as the search string.
5420
5421*** New option compilation-scroll-output can be set to scroll
5422automatically in compilation-mode windows.
5423
5424** C mode changes
5425
5426*** Multiline macros are now handled, both as they affect indentation,
5427and as recognized syntax. New syntactic symbol cpp-macro-cont is
5428assigned to second and subsequent lines of a multiline macro
5429definition.
5430
5431*** A new style "user" which captures all non-hook-ified
5432(i.e. top-level) .emacs file variable settings and customizations.
5433Style "cc-mode" is an alias for "user" and is deprecated. "gnu"
5434style is still the default however.
5435
5436*** "java" style now conforms to Sun's JDK coding style.
5437
5438*** There are new commands c-beginning-of-defun, c-end-of-defun which
5439are alternatives which you could bind to C-M-a and C-M-e if you prefer
5440them. They do not have key bindings by default.
5441
5442*** New and improved implementations of M-a (c-beginning-of-statement)
5443and M-e (c-end-of-statement).
5444
5445*** C++ namespace blocks are supported, with new syntactic symbols
5446namespace-open, namespace-close, and innamespace.
5447
5448*** File local variable settings of c-file-style and c-file-offsets
5449makes the style variables local to that buffer only.
5450
5451*** New indentation functions c-lineup-close-paren,
5452c-indent-one-line-block, c-lineup-dont-change.
5453
5454*** Improvements (hopefully!) to the way CC Mode is loaded. You
5455should now be able to do a (require 'cc-mode) to get the entire
5456package loaded properly for customization in your .emacs file. A new
5457variable c-initialize-on-load controls this and is t by default.
5458
5459** Changes to hippie-expand.
5460
5461*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-dabbrev-skip-space'. If
5462non-nil, trailing spaces may be included in the abbreviation to search for,
5463which then gives the same behavior as the original `dabbrev-expand'.
5464
5465*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-dabbrev-as-symbol'. If
5466non-nil, characters of syntax '_' is considered part of the word when
5467expanding dynamically.
5468
5469*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-no-restriction'. If
5470non-nil, narrowed buffers are widened before they are searched.
5471
5472*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-only-buffers'. If
5473non-empty, buffers searched are restricted to the types specified in
5474this list. Useful for example when constructing new special-purpose
5475expansion functions with `make-hippie-expand-function'.
5476
5477*** Text properties of the expansion are no longer copied.
5478
5479** Changes in BibTeX mode.
5480
5481*** Any titleword matching a regexp in the new variable
5482bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore (case sensitive) is ignored during
5483automatic key generation. This replaces variable
5484bibtex-autokey-titleword-first-ignore, which only checked for matches
5485against the first word in the title.
5486
5487*** Autokey generation now uses all words from the title, not just
5488capitalized words. To avoid conflicts with existing customizations,
5489bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore is set up such that words starting with
5490lowerkey characters will still be ignored. Thus, if you want to use
5491lowercase words from the title, you will have to overwrite the
5492bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore standard setting.
5493
5494*** Case conversion of names and title words for automatic key
5495generation is more flexible. Variable bibtex-autokey-preserve-case is
5496replaced by bibtex-autokey-titleword-case-convert and
5497bibtex-autokey-name-case-convert.
5498
5499** Changes in vcursor.el.
5500
5501*** Support for character terminals is available: there is a new keymap
5502and the vcursor will appear as an arrow between buffer text. A
5503variable `vcursor-interpret-input' allows input from the vcursor to be
5504entered exactly as if typed. Numerous functions, including
5505`vcursor-compare-windows', have been rewritten to improve consistency
5506in the selection of windows and corresponding keymaps.
5507
5508*** vcursor options can now be altered with M-x customize under the
5509Editing group once the package is loaded.
5510
5511*** Loading vcursor now does not define keys by default, as this is
5512generally a bad side effect. Use M-x customize to set
5513vcursor-key-bindings to t to restore the old behaviour.
5514
5515*** vcursor-auto-disable can be `copy', which turns off copying from the
5516vcursor, but doesn't disable it, after any non-vcursor command.
5517
5518** Ispell changes.
5519
5520*** You can now spell check comments and strings in the current
5521buffer with M-x ispell-comments-and-strings. Comments and strings
5522are identified by syntax tables in effect.
5523
5524*** Generic region skipping implemented.
5525A single buffer can be broken into a number of regions where text will
5526and will not be checked. The definitions of the regions can be user
5527defined. New applications and improvements made available by this
5528include:
5529
5530 o URLs are automatically skipped
5531 o EMail message checking is vastly improved.
5532
5533*** Ispell can highlight the erroneous word even on non-window terminals.
5534
5535** Changes to RefTeX mode
5536
5537RefTeX has been updated in order to make it more usable with very
5538large projects (like a several volume math book). The parser has been
5539re-written from scratch. To get maximum speed from RefTeX, check the
5540section `Optimizations' in the manual.
5541
5542*** New recursive parser.
5543
5544The old version of RefTeX created a single large buffer containing the
5545entire multifile document in order to parse the document. The new
5546recursive parser scans the individual files.
5547
5548*** Parsing only part of a document.
5549
5550Reparsing of changed document parts can now be made faster by enabling
5551partial scans. To use this feature, read the documentation string of
5552the variable `reftex-enable-partial-scans' and set the variable to t.
5553
5554 (setq reftex-enable-partial-scans t)
5555
5556*** Storing parsing information in a file.
5557
5558This can improve startup times considerably. To turn it on, use
5559
5560 (setq reftex-save-parse-info t)
5561
5562*** Using multiple selection buffers
5563
5564If the creation of label selection buffers is too slow (this happens
5565for large documents), you can reuse these buffers by setting
5566
5567 (setq reftex-use-multiple-selection-buffers t)
5568
5569*** References to external documents.
5570
5571The LaTeX package `xr' allows to cross-reference labels in external
5572documents. RefTeX can provide information about the external
5573documents as well. To use this feature, set up the \externaldocument
5574macros required by the `xr' package and rescan the document with
5575RefTeX. The external labels can then be accessed with the `x' key in
5576the selection buffer provided by `reftex-reference' (bound to `C-c )').
5577The `x' key also works in the table of contents buffer.
5578
5579*** Many more labeled LaTeX environments are recognized by default.
5580
5581The builtin command list now covers all the standard LaTeX commands,
5582and all of the major packages included in the LaTeX distribution.
5583
5584Also, RefTeX now understands the \appendix macro and changes
5585the enumeration of sections in the *toc* buffer accordingly.
5586
5587*** Mouse support for selection and *toc* buffers
5588
5589The mouse can now be used to select items in the selection and *toc*
5590buffers. See also the new option `reftex-highlight-selection'.
5591
5592*** New keymaps for selection and table of contents modes.
5593
5594The selection processes for labels and citation keys, and the table of
5595contents buffer now have their own keymaps: `reftex-select-label-map',
5596`reftex-select-bib-map', `reftex-toc-map'. The selection processes
5597have a number of new keys predefined. In particular, TAB lets you
5598enter a label with completion. Check the on-the-fly help (press `?'
5599at the selection prompt) or read the Info documentation to find out
5600more.
5601
5602*** Support for the varioref package
5603
5604The `v' key in the label selection buffer toggles \ref versus \vref.
5605
5606*** New hooks
5607
5608Three new hooks can be used to redefine the way labels, references,
5609and citations are created. These hooks are
5610`reftex-format-label-function', `reftex-format-ref-function',
5611`reftex-format-cite-function'.
5612
5613*** Citations outside LaTeX
5614
5615The command `reftex-citation' may also be used outside LaTeX (e.g. in
5616a mail buffer). See the Info documentation for details.
5617
5618*** Short context is no longer fontified.
5619
5620The short context in the label menu no longer copies the
5621fontification from the text in the buffer. If you prefer it to be
5622fontified, use
5623
5624 (setq reftex-refontify-context t)
5625
5626** file-cache-minibuffer-complete now accepts a prefix argument.
5627With a prefix argument, it does not try to do completion of
5628the file name within its directory; it only checks for other
5629directories that contain the same file name.
5630
5631Thus, given the file name Makefile, and assuming that a file
5632Makefile.in exists in the same directory, ordinary
5633file-cache-minibuffer-complete will try to complete Makefile to
5634Makefile.in and will therefore never look for other directories that
5635have Makefile. A prefix argument tells it not to look for longer
5636names such as Makefile.in, so that instead it will look for other
5637directories--just as if the name were already complete in its present
5638directory.
5639
5640** New modes and packages
5641
5642*** There is a new alternative major mode for Perl, Cperl mode.
5643It has many more features than Perl mode, and some people prefer
5644it, but some do not.
5645
5646*** There is a new major mode, M-x vhdl-mode, for editing files of VHDL
5647code.
5648
5649*** M-x which-function-mode enables a minor mode that displays the
5650current function name continuously in the mode line, as you move
5651around in a buffer.
5652
5653Which Function mode is effective in major modes which support Imenu.
5654
5655*** Gametree is a major mode for editing game analysis trees. The author
5656uses it for keeping notes about his postal Chess games, but it should
5657be helpful for other two-player games as well, as long as they have an
5658established system of notation similar to Chess.
5659
5660*** The new minor mode checkdoc-minor-mode provides Emacs Lisp
5661documentation string checking for style and spelling. The style
5662guidelines are found in the Emacs Lisp programming manual.
5663
5664*** The net-utils package makes some common networking features
5665available in Emacs. Some of these functions are wrappers around
5666system utilities (ping, nslookup, etc); others are implementations of
5667simple protocols (finger, whois) in Emacs Lisp. There are also
5668functions to make simple connections to TCP/IP ports for debugging and
5669the like.
5670
5671*** highlight-changes-mode is a minor mode that uses colors to
5672identify recently changed parts of the buffer text.
5673
5674*** The new package `midnight' lets you specify things to be done
5675within Emacs at midnight--by default, kill buffers that you have not
5676used in a considerable time. To use this feature, customize
5677the user option `midnight-mode' to t.
5678
5679*** The file generic-x.el defines a number of simple major modes.
5680
5681 apache-generic-mode: For Apache and NCSA httpd configuration files
5682 samba-generic-mode: Samba configuration files
5683 fvwm-generic-mode: For fvwm initialization files
5684 x-resource-generic-mode: For X resource files
5685 hosts-generic-mode: For hosts files (.rhosts, /etc/hosts, etc)
5686 mailagent-rules-generic-mode: For mailagent .rules files
5687 javascript-generic-mode: For JavaScript files
5688 vrml-generic-mode: For VRML files
5689 java-manifest-generic-mode: For Java MANIFEST files
5690 java-properties-generic-mode: For Java property files
5691 mailrc-generic-mode: For .mailrc files
5692
5693 Platform-specific modes:
5694
5695 prototype-generic-mode: For Solaris/Sys V prototype files
5696 pkginfo-generic-mode: For Solaris/Sys V pkginfo files
5697 alias-generic-mode: For C shell alias files
5698 inf-generic-mode: For MS-Windows INF files
5699 ini-generic-mode: For MS-Windows INI files
5700 reg-generic-mode: For MS-Windows Registry files
5701 bat-generic-mode: For MS-Windows BAT scripts
5702 rc-generic-mode: For MS-Windows Resource files
5703 rul-generic-mode: For InstallShield scripts
5704\f
5705* Lisp changes in Emacs 20.3 since the Emacs Lisp Manual was published
5706
5707** If you want a Lisp file to be read in unibyte mode,
5708use -*-unibyte: t;-*- on its first line.
5709That will force Emacs to read that file in unibyte mode.
5710Otherwise, the file will be loaded and byte-compiled in multibyte mode.
5711
5712Thus, each lisp file is read in a consistent way regardless of whether
5713you started Emacs with --unibyte, so that a Lisp program gives
5714consistent results regardless of how Emacs was started.
5715
5716** The new function assoc-default is useful for searching an alist,
5717and using a default value if the key is not found there. You can
5718specify a comparison predicate, so this function is useful for
5719searching comparing a string against an alist of regular expressions.
5720
5721** The functions unibyte-char-to-multibyte and
5722multibyte-char-to-unibyte convert between unibyte and multibyte
5723character codes, in a way that is appropriate for the current language
5724environment.
5725
5726** The functions read-event, read-char and read-char-exclusive now
5727take two optional arguments. PROMPT, if non-nil, specifies a prompt
5728string. SUPPRESS-INPUT-METHOD, if non-nil, says to disable the
5729current input method for reading this one event.
5730
5731** Two new variables print-escape-nonascii and print-escape-multibyte
5732now control whether to output certain characters as
5733backslash-sequences. print-escape-nonascii applies to single-byte
5734non-ASCII characters; print-escape-multibyte applies to multibyte
5735characters. Both of these variables are used only when printing
5736in readable fashion (prin1 uses them, princ does not).
5737\f
5738* Lisp changes in Emacs 20.3 before the Emacs Lisp Manual was published
5739
5740** Compiled Emacs Lisp files made with the modified "MBSK" version
5741of Emacs 20.2 do not work in Emacs 20.3.
5742
5743** Buffer positions are now measured in characters, as they were
5744in Emacs 19 and before. This means that (forward-char 1)
5745always increases point by 1.
5746
5747The function chars-in-region now just subtracts its arguments. It is
5748considered obsolete. The function char-boundary-p has been deleted.
5749
5750See below for additional changes relating to multibyte characters.
5751
5752** defcustom, defface and defgroup now accept the keyword `:version'.
5753Use this to specify in which version of Emacs a certain variable's
5754default value changed. For example,
5755
5756 (defcustom foo-max 34 "*Maximum number of foo's allowed."
5757 :type 'integer
5758 :group 'foo
5759 :version "20.3")
5760
5761 (defgroup foo-group nil "The foo group."
5762 :version "20.3")
5763
5764If an entire new group is added or the variables in it have the
5765default values changed, then just add a `:version' to that group. It
5766is recommended that new packages added to the distribution contain a
5767`:version' in the top level group.
5768
5769This information is used to control the customize-changed-options command.
5770
5771** It is now an error to change the value of a symbol whose name
5772starts with a colon--if it is interned in the standard obarray.
5773
5774However, setting such a symbol to its proper value, which is that
5775symbol itself, is not an error. This is for the sake of programs that
5776support previous Emacs versions by explicitly setting these variables
5777to themselves.
5778
5779If you set the variable keyword-symbols-constant-flag to nil,
5780this error is suppressed, and you can set these symbols to any
5781values whatever.
5782
5783** There is a new debugger command, R.
5784It evaluates an expression like e, but saves the result
5785in the buffer *Debugger-record*.
5786
5787** Frame-local variables.
5788
5789You can now make a variable local to various frames. To do this, call
5790the function make-variable-frame-local; this enables frames to have
5791local bindings for that variable.
5792
5793These frame-local bindings are actually frame parameters: you create a
5794frame-local binding in a specific frame by calling
5795modify-frame-parameters and specifying the variable name as the
5796parameter name.
5797
5798Buffer-local bindings take precedence over frame-local bindings.
5799Thus, if the current buffer has a buffer-local binding, that binding is
5800active; otherwise, if the selected frame has a frame-local binding,
5801that binding is active; otherwise, the default binding is active.
5802
5803It would not be hard to implement window-local bindings, but it is not
5804clear that this would be very useful; windows tend to come and go in a
5805very transitory fashion, so that trying to produce any specific effect
5806through a window-local binding would not be very robust.
5807
5808** `sregexq' and `sregex' are two new functions for constructing
5809"symbolic regular expressions." These are Lisp expressions that, when
5810evaluated, yield conventional string-based regexps. The symbolic form
5811makes it easier to construct, read, and maintain complex patterns.
5812See the documentation in sregex.el.
5813
5814** parse-partial-sexp's return value has an additional element which
5815is used to pass information along if you pass it to another call to
5816parse-partial-sexp, starting its scan where the first call ended.
5817The contents of this field are not yet finalized.
5818
5819** eval-region now accepts a fourth optional argument READ-FUNCTION.
5820If it is non-nil, that function is used instead of `read'.
5821
5822** unload-feature by default removes the feature's functions from
5823known hooks to avoid trouble, but a package providing FEATURE can
5824define a hook FEATURE-unload-hook to be run by unload-feature instead.
5825
5826** read-from-minibuffer no longer returns the argument DEFAULT-VALUE
5827when the user enters empty input. It now returns the null string, as
5828it did in Emacs 19. The default value is made available in the
5829history via M-n, but it is not applied here as a default.
5830
5831The other, more specialized minibuffer-reading functions continue to
5832return the default value (not the null string) when the user enters
5833empty input.
5834
5835** The new variable read-buffer-function controls which routine to use
5836for selecting buffers. For example, if you set this variable to
5837`iswitchb-read-buffer', iswitchb will be used to read buffer names.
5838Other functions can also be used if they accept the same arguments as
5839`read-buffer' and return the selected buffer name as a string.
5840
5841** The new function read-passwd reads a password from the terminal,
5842echoing a period for each character typed. It takes three arguments:
5843a prompt string, a flag which says "read it twice to make sure", and a
5844default password to use if the user enters nothing.
5845
5846** The variable fill-nobreak-predicate gives major modes a way to
5847specify not to break a line at certain places. Its value is a
5848function which is called with no arguments, with point located at the
5849place where a break is being considered. If the function returns
5850non-nil, then the line won't be broken there.
5851
5852** window-end now takes an optional second argument, UPDATE.
5853If this is non-nil, then the function always returns an accurate
5854up-to-date value for the buffer position corresponding to the
5855end of the window, even if this requires computation.
5856
5857** other-buffer now takes an optional argument FRAME
5858which specifies which frame's buffer list to use.
5859If it is nil, that means use the selected frame's buffer list.
5860
5861** The new variable buffer-display-time, always local in every buffer,
5862holds the value of (current-time) as of the last time that a window
5863was directed to display this buffer.
5864
5865** It is now meaningful to compare two window-configuration objects
5866with `equal'. Two window-configuration objects are equal if they
5867describe equivalent arrangements of windows, in the same frame--in
5868other words, if they would give the same results if passed to
5869set-window-configuration.
5870
5871** compare-window-configurations is a new function that compares two
5872window configurations loosely. It ignores differences in saved buffer
5873positions and scrolling, and considers only the structure and sizes of
5874windows and the choice of buffers to display.
5875
5876** The variable minor-mode-overriding-map-alist allows major modes to
5877override the key bindings of a minor mode. The elements of this alist
5878look like the elements of minor-mode-map-alist: (VARIABLE . KEYMAP).
5879
5880If the VARIABLE in an element of minor-mode-overriding-map-alist has a
5881non-nil value, the paired KEYMAP is active, and totally overrides the
5882map (if any) specified for the same variable in minor-mode-map-alist.
5883
5884minor-mode-overriding-map-alist is automatically local in all buffers,
5885and it is meant to be set by major modes.
5886
5887** The function match-string-no-properties is like match-string
5888except that it discards all text properties from the result.
5889
5890** The function load-average now accepts an optional argument
5891USE-FLOATS. If it is non-nil, the load average values are returned as
5892floating point numbers, rather than as integers to be divided by 100.
5893
5894** The new variable temporary-file-directory specifies the directory
5895to use for creating temporary files. The default value is determined
5896in a reasonable way for your operating system; on GNU and Unix systems
5897it is based on the TMP and TMPDIR environment variables.
5898
5899** Menu changes
5900
5901*** easymenu.el now uses the new menu item format and supports the
5902keywords :visible and :filter. The existing keyword :keys is now
5903better supported.
5904
5905The variable `easy-menu-precalculate-equivalent-keybindings' controls
5906a new feature which calculates keyboard equivalents for the menu when
5907you define the menu. The default is t. If you rarely use menus, you
5908can set the variable to nil to disable this precalculation feature;
5909then the calculation is done only if you use the menu bar.
5910
5911*** A new format for menu items is supported.
5912
5913In a keymap, a key binding that has the format
5914 (STRING . REAL-BINDING) or (STRING HELP-STRING . REAL-BINDING)
5915defines a menu item. Now a menu item definition may also be a list that
5916starts with the symbol `menu-item'.
5917
5918The format is:
5919 (menu-item ITEM-NAME) or
5920 (menu-item ITEM-NAME REAL-BINDING . ITEM-PROPERTY-LIST)
5921where ITEM-NAME is an expression which evaluates to the menu item
5922string, and ITEM-PROPERTY-LIST has the form of a property list.
5923The supported properties include
5924
5925:enable FORM Evaluate FORM to determine whether the
5926 item is enabled.
5927:visible FORM Evaluate FORM to determine whether the
5928 item should appear in the menu.
5929:filter FILTER-FN
5930 FILTER-FN is a function of one argument,
5931 which will be REAL-BINDING.
5932 It should return a binding to use instead.
5933:keys DESCRIPTION
5934 DESCRIPTION is a string that describes an equivalent keyboard
5935 binding for for REAL-BINDING. DESCRIPTION is expanded with
5936 `substitute-command-keys' before it is used.
5937:key-sequence KEY-SEQUENCE
5938 KEY-SEQUENCE is a key-sequence for an equivalent
5939 keyboard binding.
5940:key-sequence nil
5941 This means that the command normally has no
5942 keyboard equivalent.
5943:help HELP HELP is the extra help string (not currently used).
5944:button (TYPE . SELECTED)
5945 TYPE is :toggle or :radio.
5946 SELECTED is a form, to be evaluated, and its
5947 value says whether this button is currently selected.
5948
5949Buttons are at the moment only simulated by prefixes in the menu.
5950Eventually ordinary X-buttons may be supported.
5951
5952(menu-item ITEM-NAME) defines unselectable item.
5953
5954** New event types
5955
5956*** The new event type `mouse-wheel' is generated by a wheel on a
5957mouse (such as the MS Intellimouse). The event contains a delta that
5958corresponds to the amount and direction that the wheel is rotated,
5959which is typically used to implement a scroll or zoom. The format is:
5960
5961 (mouse-wheel POSITION DELTA)
5962
5963where POSITION is a list describing the position of the event in the
5964same format as a mouse-click event, and DELTA is a signed number
5965indicating the number of increments by which the wheel was rotated. A
5966negative DELTA indicates that the wheel was rotated backwards, towards
5967the user, and a positive DELTA indicates that the wheel was rotated
5968forward, away from the user.
5969
5970As of now, this event type is generated only on MS Windows.
5971
5972*** The new event type `drag-n-drop' is generated when a group of
5973files is selected in an application outside of Emacs, and then dragged
5974and dropped onto an Emacs frame. The event contains a list of
5975filenames that were dragged and dropped, which are then typically
5976loaded into Emacs. The format is:
5977
5978 (drag-n-drop POSITION FILES)
5979
5980where POSITION is a list describing the position of the event in the
5981same format as a mouse-click event, and FILES is the list of filenames
5982that were dragged and dropped.
5983
5984As of now, this event type is generated only on MS Windows.
5985
5986** Changes relating to multibyte characters.
5987
5988*** The variable enable-multibyte-characters is now read-only;
5989any attempt to set it directly signals an error. The only way
5990to change this value in an existing buffer is with set-buffer-multibyte.
5991
5992*** In a string constant, `\ ' now stands for "nothing at all". You
5993can use it to terminate a hex escape which is followed by a character
5994that could otherwise be read as part of the hex escape.
5995
5996*** String indices are now measured in characters, as they were
5997in Emacs 19 and before.
5998
5999The function chars-in-string has been deleted.
6000The function concat-chars has been renamed to `string'.
6001
6002*** The function set-buffer-multibyte sets the flag in the current
6003buffer that says whether the buffer uses multibyte representation or
6004unibyte representation. If the argument is nil, it selects unibyte
6005representation. Otherwise it selects multibyte representation.
6006
6007This function does not change the contents of the buffer, viewed
6008as a sequence of bytes. However, it does change the contents
6009viewed as characters; a sequence of two bytes which is treated as
6010one character when the buffer uses multibyte representation
6011will count as two characters using unibyte representation.
6012
6013This function sets enable-multibyte-characters to record which
6014representation is in use. It also adjusts various data in the buffer
6015(including its markers, overlays and text properties) so that they are
6016consistent with the new representation.
6017
6018*** string-make-multibyte takes a string and converts it to multibyte
6019representation. Most of the time, you don't need to care
6020about the representation, because Emacs converts when necessary;
6021however, it makes a difference when you compare strings.
6022
6023The conversion of non-ASCII characters works by adding the value of
6024nonascii-insert-offset to each character, or by translating them
6025using the table nonascii-translation-table.
6026
6027*** string-make-unibyte takes a string and converts it to unibyte
6028representation. Most of the time, you don't need to care about the
6029representation, but it makes a difference when you compare strings.
6030
6031The conversion from multibyte to unibyte representation
6032loses information; the only time Emacs performs it automatically
6033is when inserting a multibyte string into a unibyte buffer.
6034
6035*** string-as-multibyte takes a string, and returns another string
6036which contains the same bytes, but treats them as multibyte.
6037
6038*** string-as-unibyte takes a string, and returns another string
6039which contains the same bytes, but treats them as unibyte.
6040
6041*** The new function compare-strings lets you compare
6042portions of two strings. Unibyte strings are converted to multibyte,
6043so that a unibyte string can match a multibyte string.
6044You can specify whether to ignore case or not.
6045
6046*** assoc-ignore-case now uses compare-strings so that
6047it can treat unibyte and multibyte strings as equal.
6048
6049*** Regular expression operations and buffer string searches now
6050convert the search pattern to multibyte or unibyte to accord with the
6051buffer or string being searched.
6052
6053One consequence is that you cannot always use \200-\377 inside of
6054[...] to match all non-ASCII characters. This does still work when
6055searching or matching a unibyte buffer or string, but not when
6056searching or matching a multibyte string. Unfortunately, there is no
6057obvious choice of syntax to use within [...] for that job. But, what
6058you want is just to match all non-ASCII characters, the regular
6059expression [^\0-\177] works for it.
6060
6061*** Structure of coding system changed.
6062
6063All coding systems (including aliases and subsidiaries) are named
6064by symbols; the symbol's `coding-system' property is a vector
6065which defines the coding system. Aliases share the same vector
6066as the principal name, so that altering the contents of this
6067vector affects the principal name and its aliases. You can define
6068your own alias name of a coding system by the function
6069define-coding-system-alias.
6070
6071The coding system definition includes a property list of its own. Use
6072the new functions `coding-system-get' and `coding-system-put' to
6073access such coding system properties as post-read-conversion,
6074pre-write-conversion, character-translation-table-for-decode,
6075character-translation-table-for-encode, mime-charset, and
6076safe-charsets. For instance, (coding-system-get 'iso-latin-1
6077'mime-charset) gives the corresponding MIME-charset parameter
6078`iso-8859-1'.
6079
6080Among the coding system properties listed above, safe-charsets is new.
6081The value of this property is a list of character sets which this
6082coding system can correctly encode and decode. For instance:
6083(coding-system-get 'iso-latin-1 'safe-charsets) => (ascii latin-iso8859-1)
6084
6085Here, "correctly encode" means that the encoded character sets can
6086also be handled safely by systems other than Emacs as far as they
6087are capable of that coding system. Though, Emacs itself can encode
6088the other character sets and read it back correctly.
6089
6090*** The new function select-safe-coding-system can be used to find a
6091proper coding system for encoding the specified region or string.
6092This function requires a user interaction.
6093
6094*** The new functions find-coding-systems-region and
6095find-coding-systems-string are helper functions used by
6096select-safe-coding-system. They return a list of all proper coding
6097systems to encode a text in some region or string. If you don't want
6098a user interaction, use one of these functions instead of
6099select-safe-coding-system.
6100
6101*** The explicit encoding and decoding functions, such as
6102decode-coding-region and encode-coding-string, now set
6103last-coding-system-used to reflect the actual way encoding or decoding
6104was done.
6105
6106*** The new function detect-coding-with-language-environment can be
6107used to detect a coding system of text according to priorities of
6108coding systems used by some specific language environment.
6109
6110*** The functions detect-coding-region and detect-coding-string always
6111return a list if the arg HIGHEST is nil. Thus, if only ASCII
6112characters are found, they now return a list of single element
6113`undecided' or its subsidiaries.
6114
6115*** The new functions coding-system-change-eol-conversion and
6116coding-system-change-text-conversion can be used to get a different
6117coding system than what specified only in how end-of-line or text is
6118converted.
6119
6120*** The new function set-selection-coding-system can be used to set a
6121coding system for communicating with other X clients.
6122
6123*** The function `map-char-table' now passes as argument only valid
6124character codes, plus generic characters that stand for entire
6125character sets or entire subrows of a character set. In other words,
6126each time `map-char-table' calls its FUNCTION argument, the key value
6127either will be a valid individual character code, or will stand for a
6128range of characters.
6129
6130*** The new function `char-valid-p' can be used for checking whether a
6131Lisp object is a valid character code or not.
6132
6133*** The new function `charset-after' returns a charset of a character
6134in the current buffer at position POS.
6135
6136*** Input methods are now implemented using the variable
6137input-method-function. If this is non-nil, its value should be a
6138function; then, whenever Emacs reads an input event that is a printing
6139character with no modifier bits, it calls that function, passing the
6140event as an argument. Often this function will read more input, first
6141binding input-method-function to nil.
6142
6143The return value should be a list of the events resulting from input
6144method processing. These events will be processed sequentially as
6145input, before resorting to unread-command-events. Events returned by
6146the input method function are not passed to the input method function,
6147not even if they are printing characters with no modifier bits.
6148
6149The input method function is not called when reading the second and
6150subsequent events of a key sequence.
6151
6152*** You can customize any language environment by using
6153set-language-environment-hook and exit-language-environment-hook.
6154
6155The hook `exit-language-environment-hook' should be used to undo
6156customizations that you made with set-language-environment-hook. For
6157instance, if you set up a special key binding for a specific language
6158environment by set-language-environment-hook, you should set up
6159exit-language-environment-hook to restore the normal key binding.
6160\f
6161* Changes in Emacs 20.1
6162
6163** Emacs has a new facility for customization of its many user
6164options. It is called M-x customize. With this facility you can look
6165at the many user options in an organized way; they are grouped into a
6166tree structure.
6167
6168M-x customize also knows what sorts of values are legitimate for each
6169user option and ensures that you don't use invalid values.
6170
6171With M-x customize, you can set options either for the present Emacs
6172session or permanently. (Permanent settings are stored automatically
6173in your .emacs file.)
6174
6175** Scroll bars are now on the left side of the window.
6176You can change this with M-x customize-option scroll-bar-mode.
6177
6178** The mode line no longer includes the string `Emacs'.
6179This makes more space in the mode line for other information.
6180
6181** When you select a region with the mouse, it is highlighted
6182immediately afterward. At that time, if you type the DELETE key, it
6183kills the region.
6184
6185The BACKSPACE key, and the ASCII character DEL, do not do this; they
6186delete the character before point, as usual.
6187
6188** In an incremental search the whole current match is highlighted
6189on terminals which support this. (You can disable this feature
6190by setting search-highlight to nil.)
6191
6192** In the minibuffer, in some cases, you can now use M-n to
6193insert the default value into the minibuffer as text. In effect,
6194the default value (if the minibuffer routines know it) is tacked
6195onto the history "in the future". (The more normal use of the
6196history list is to use M-p to insert minibuffer input used in the
6197past.)
6198
6199** In Text mode, now only blank lines separate paragraphs.
6200This makes it possible to get the full benefit of Adaptive Fill mode
6201in Text mode, and other modes derived from it (such as Mail mode).
6202TAB in Text mode now runs the command indent-relative; this
6203makes a practical difference only when you use indented paragraphs.
6204
6205As a result, the old Indented Text mode is now identical to Text mode,
6206and is an alias for it.
6207
6208If you want spaces at the beginning of a line to start a paragraph,
6209use the new mode, Paragraph Indent Text mode.
6210
6211** Scrolling changes
6212
6213*** Scroll commands to scroll a whole screen now preserve the screen
6214position of the cursor, if scroll-preserve-screen-position is non-nil.
6215
6216In this mode, if you scroll several screens back and forth, finishing
6217on the same screen where you started, the cursor goes back to the line
6218where it started.
6219
6220*** If you set scroll-conservatively to a small number, then when you
6221move point a short distance off the screen, Emacs will scroll the
6222screen just far enough to bring point back on screen, provided that
6223does not exceed `scroll-conservatively' lines.
6224
6225*** The new variable scroll-margin says how close point can come to the
6226top or bottom of a window. It is a number of screen lines; if point
6227comes within that many lines of the top or bottom of the window, Emacs
6228recenters the window.
6229
6230** International character set support (MULE)
6231
6232Emacs now supports a wide variety of international character sets,
6233including European variants of the Latin alphabet, as well as Chinese,
6234Devanagari (Hindi and Marathi), Ethiopian, Greek, IPA, Japanese,
6235Korean, Lao, Russian, Thai, Tibetan, and Vietnamese scripts. These
6236features have been merged from the modified version of Emacs known as
6237MULE (for "MULti-lingual Enhancement to GNU Emacs")
6238
6239Users of these scripts have established many more-or-less standard
6240coding systems for storing files. Emacs uses a single multibyte
6241character encoding within Emacs buffers; it can translate from a wide
6242variety of coding systems when reading a file and can translate back
6243into any of these coding systems when saving a file.
6244
6245Keyboards, even in the countries where these character sets are used,
6246generally don't have keys for all the characters in them. So Emacs
6247supports various "input methods", typically one for each script or
6248language, to make it possible to type them.
6249
6250The Emacs internal multibyte encoding represents a non-ASCII
6251character as a sequence of bytes in the range 0200 through 0377.
6252
6253The new prefix key C-x RET is used for commands that pertain
6254to multibyte characters, coding systems, and input methods.
6255
6256You can disable multibyte character support as follows:
6257
6258 (setq-default enable-multibyte-characters nil)
6259
6260Calling the function standard-display-european turns off multibyte
6261characters, unless you specify a non-nil value for the second
6262argument, AUTO. This provides compatibility for people who are
6263already using standard-display-european to continue using unibyte
6264characters for their work until they want to change.
6265
6266*** Input methods
6267
6268An input method is a kind of character conversion which is designed
6269specifically for interactive input. In Emacs, typically each language
6270has its own input method (though sometimes several languages which use
6271the same characters can share one input method). Some languages
6272support several input methods.
6273
6274The simplest kind of input method works by mapping ASCII letters into
6275another alphabet. This is how the Greek and Russian input methods
6276work.
6277
6278A more powerful technique is composition: converting sequences of
6279characters into one letter. Many European input methods use
6280composition to produce a single non-ASCII letter from a sequence which
6281consists of a letter followed by diacritics. For example, a' is one
6282sequence of two characters that might be converted into a single
6283letter.
6284
6285The input methods for syllabic scripts typically use mapping followed
6286by conversion. The input methods for Thai and Korean work this way.
6287First, letters are mapped into symbols for particular sounds or tone
6288marks; then, sequences of these which make up a whole syllable are
6289mapped into one syllable sign--most often a "composite character".
6290
6291None of these methods works very well for Chinese and Japanese, so
6292they are handled specially. First you input a whole word using
6293phonetic spelling; then, after the word is in the buffer, Emacs
6294converts it into one or more characters using a large dictionary.
6295
6296Since there is more than one way to represent a phonetically spelled
6297word using Chinese characters, Emacs can only guess which one to use;
6298typically these input methods give you a way to say "guess again" if
6299the first guess is wrong.
6300
6301*** The command C-x RET m (toggle-enable-multibyte-characters)
6302turns multibyte character support on or off for the current buffer.
6303
6304If multibyte character support is turned off in a buffer, then each
6305byte is a single character, even codes 0200 through 0377--exactly as
6306they did in Emacs 19.34. This includes the features for support for
6307the European characters, ISO Latin-1 and ISO Latin-2.
6308
6309However, there is no need to turn off multibyte character support to
6310use ISO Latin-1 or ISO Latin-2; the Emacs multibyte character set
6311includes all the characters in these character sets, and Emacs can
6312translate automatically to and from either one.
6313
6314*** Visiting a file in unibyte mode.
6315
6316Turning off multibyte character support in the buffer after visiting a
6317file with multibyte code conversion will display the multibyte
6318sequences already in the buffer, byte by byte. This is probably not
6319what you want.
6320
6321If you want to edit a file of unibyte characters (Latin-1, for
6322example), you can do it by specifying `no-conversion' as the coding
6323system when reading the file. This coding system also turns off
6324multibyte characters in that buffer.
6325
6326If you turn off multibyte character support entirely, this turns off
6327character conversion as well.
6328
6329*** Displaying international characters on X Windows.
6330
6331A font for X typically displays just one alphabet or script.
6332Therefore, displaying the entire range of characters Emacs supports
6333requires using many fonts.
6334
6335Therefore, Emacs now supports "fontsets". Each fontset is a
6336collection of fonts, each assigned to a range of character codes.
6337
6338A fontset has a name, like a font. Individual fonts are defined by
6339the X server; fontsets are defined within Emacs itself. But once you
6340have defined a fontset, you can use it in a face or a frame just as
6341you would use a font.
6342
6343If a fontset specifies no font for a certain character, or if it
6344specifies a font that does not exist on your system, then it cannot
6345display that character. It will display an empty box instead.
6346
6347The fontset height and width are determined by the ASCII characters
6348(that is, by the font in the fontset which is used for ASCII
6349characters). If another font in the fontset has a different height,
6350or the wrong width, then characters assigned to that font are clipped,
6351and displayed within a box if highlight-wrong-size-font is non-nil.
6352
6353*** Defining fontsets.
6354
6355Emacs does not use any fontset by default. Its default font is still
6356chosen as in previous versions. You can tell Emacs to use a fontset
6357with the `-fn' option or the `Font' X resource.
6358
6359Emacs creates a standard fontset automatically according to the value
6360of standard-fontset-spec. This fontset's short name is
6361`fontset-standard'. Bold, italic, and bold-italic variants of the
6362standard fontset are created automatically.
6363
6364If you specify a default ASCII font with the `Font' resource or `-fn'
6365argument, a fontset is generated from it. This works by replacing the
6366FOUNDARY, FAMILY, ADD_STYLE, and AVERAGE_WIDTH fields of the font name
6367with `*' then using this to specify a fontset. This fontset's short
6368name is `fontset-startup'.
6369
6370Emacs checks resources of the form Fontset-N where N is 0, 1, 2...
6371The resource value should have this form:
6372 FONTSET-NAME, [CHARSET-NAME:FONT-NAME]...
6373FONTSET-NAME should have the form of a standard X font name, except:
6374 * most fields should be just the wild card "*".
6375 * the CHARSET_REGISTRY field should be "fontset"
6376 * the CHARSET_ENCODING field can be any nickname of the fontset.
6377The construct CHARSET-NAME:FONT-NAME can be repeated any number
6378of times; each time specifies the font for one character set.
6379CHARSET-NAME should be the name name of a character set, and
6380FONT-NAME should specify an actual font to use for that character set.
6381
6382Each of these fontsets has an alias which is made from the
6383last two font name fields, CHARSET_REGISTRY and CHARSET_ENCODING.
6384You can refer to the fontset by that alias or by its full name.
6385
6386For any character sets that you don't mention, Emacs tries to choose a
6387font by substituting into FONTSET-NAME. For instance, with the
6388following resource,
6389 Emacs*Fontset-0: -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-*-*-*-*-fontset-24
6390the font for ASCII is generated as below:
6391 -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-ISO8859-1
6392Here is the substitution rule:
6393 Change CHARSET_REGISTRY and CHARSET_ENCODING to that of the charset
6394 defined in the variable x-charset-registries. For instance, ASCII has
6395 the entry (ascii . "ISO8859-1") in this variable. Then, reduce
6396 sequences of wild cards -*-...-*- with a single wildcard -*-.
6397 (This is to prevent use of auto-scaled fonts.)
6398
6399The function which processes the fontset resource value to create the
6400fontset is called create-fontset-from-fontset-spec. You can also call
6401that function explicitly to create a fontset.
6402
6403With the X resource Emacs.Font, you can specify a fontset name just
6404like an actual font name. But be careful not to specify a fontset
6405name in a wildcard resource like Emacs*Font--that tries to specify the
6406fontset for other purposes including menus, and they cannot handle
6407fontsets.
6408
6409*** The command M-x set-language-environment sets certain global Emacs
6410defaults for a particular choice of language.
6411
6412Selecting a language environment typically specifies a default input
6413method and which coding systems to recognize automatically when
6414visiting files. However, it does not try to reread files you have
6415already visited; the text in those buffers is not affected. The
6416language environment may also specify a default choice of coding
6417system for new files that you create.
6418
6419It makes no difference which buffer is current when you use
6420set-language-environment, because these defaults apply globally to the
6421whole Emacs session.
6422
6423For example, M-x set-language-environment RET Latin-1 RET
6424chooses the Latin-1 character set. In the .emacs file, you can do this
6425with (set-language-environment "Latin-1").
6426
6427*** The command C-x RET f (set-buffer-file-coding-system)
6428specifies the file coding system for the current buffer. This
6429specifies what sort of character code translation to do when saving
6430the file. As an argument, you must specify the name of one of the
6431coding systems that Emacs supports.
6432
6433*** The command C-x RET c (universal-coding-system-argument)
6434lets you specify a coding system when you read or write a file.
6435This command uses the minibuffer to read a coding system name.
6436After you exit the minibuffer, the specified coding system
6437is used for *the immediately following command*.
6438
6439So if the immediately following command is a command to read or
6440write a file, it uses the specified coding system for that file.
6441
6442If the immediately following command does not use the coding system,
6443then C-x RET c ultimately has no effect.
6444
6445For example, C-x RET c iso-8859-1 RET C-x C-f temp RET
6446visits the file `temp' treating it as ISO Latin-1.
6447
6448*** You can specify the coding system for a file using the -*-
6449construct. Include `coding: CODINGSYSTEM;' inside the -*-...-*-
6450to specify use of coding system CODINGSYSTEM. You can also
6451specify the coding system in a local variable list at the end
6452of the file.
6453
6454*** The command C-x RET t (set-terminal-coding-system) specifies
6455the coding system for terminal output. If you specify a character
6456code for terminal output, all characters output to the terminal are
6457translated into that character code.
6458
6459This feature is useful for certain character-only terminals built in
6460various countries to support the languages of those countries.
6461
6462By default, output to the terminal is not translated at all.
6463
6464*** The command C-x RET k (set-keyboard-coding-system) specifies
6465the coding system for keyboard input.
6466
6467Character code translation of keyboard input is useful for terminals
6468with keys that send non-ASCII graphic characters--for example,
6469some terminals designed for ISO Latin-1 or subsets of it.
6470
6471By default, keyboard input is not translated at all.
6472
6473Character code translation of keyboard input is similar to using an
6474input method, in that both define sequences of keyboard input that
6475translate into single characters. However, input methods are designed
6476to be convenient for interactive use, while the code translations are
6477designed to work with terminals.
6478
6479*** The command C-x RET p (set-buffer-process-coding-system)
6480specifies the coding system for input and output to a subprocess.
6481This command applies to the current buffer; normally, each subprocess
6482has its own buffer, and thus you can use this command to specify
6483translation to and from a particular subprocess by giving the command
6484in the corresponding buffer.
6485
6486By default, process input and output are not translated at all.
6487
6488*** The variable file-name-coding-system specifies the coding system
6489to use for encoding file names before operating on them.
6490It is also used for decoding file names obtained from the system.
6491
6492*** The command C-\ (toggle-input-method) activates or deactivates
6493an input method. If no input method has been selected before, the
6494command prompts for you to specify the language and input method you
6495want to use.
6496
6497C-u C-\ (select-input-method) lets you switch to a different input
6498method. C-h C-\ (or C-h I) describes the current input method.
6499
6500*** Some input methods remap the keyboard to emulate various keyboard
6501layouts commonly used for particular scripts. How to do this
6502remapping properly depends on your actual keyboard layout. To specify
6503which layout your keyboard has, use M-x quail-set-keyboard-layout.
6504
6505*** The command C-h C (describe-coding-system) displays
6506the coding systems currently selected for various purposes, plus
6507related information.
6508
6509*** The command C-h h (view-hello-file) displays a file called
6510HELLO, which has examples of text in many languages, using various
6511scripts.
6512
6513*** The command C-h L (describe-language-support) displays
6514information about the support for a particular language.
6515You specify the language as an argument.
6516
6517*** The mode line now contains a letter or character that identifies
6518the coding system used in the visited file. It normally follows the
6519first dash.
6520
6521A dash indicates the default state of affairs: no code conversion
6522(except CRLF => newline if appropriate). `=' means no conversion
6523whatsoever. The ISO 8859 coding systems are represented by digits
65241 through 9. Other coding systems are represented by letters:
6525
6526 A alternativnyj (Russian)
6527 B big5 (Chinese)
6528 C cn-gb-2312 (Chinese)
6529 C iso-2022-cn (Chinese)
6530 D in-is13194-devanagari (Indian languages)
6531 E euc-japan (Japanese)
6532 I iso-2022-cjk or iso-2022-ss2 (Chinese, Japanese, Korean)
6533 J junet (iso-2022-7) or old-jis (iso-2022-jp-1978-irv) (Japanese)
6534 K euc-korea (Korean)
6535 R koi8 (Russian)
6536 Q tibetan
6537 S shift_jis (Japanese)
6538 T lao
6539 T tis620 (Thai)
6540 V viscii or vscii (Vietnamese)
6541 i iso-2022-lock (Chinese, Japanese, Korean)
6542 k iso-2022-kr (Korean)
6543 v viqr (Vietnamese)
6544 z hz (Chinese)
6545
6546When you are using a character-only terminal (not a window system),
6547two additional characters appear in between the dash and the file
6548coding system. These two characters describe the coding system for
6549keyboard input, and the coding system for terminal output.
6550
6551*** The new variable rmail-file-coding-system specifies the code
6552conversion to use for RMAIL files. The default value is nil.
6553
6554When you read mail with Rmail, each message is decoded automatically
6555into Emacs' internal format. This has nothing to do with
6556rmail-file-coding-system. That variable controls reading and writing
6557Rmail files themselves.
6558
6559*** The new variable sendmail-coding-system specifies the code
6560conversion for outgoing mail. The default value is nil.
6561
6562Actually, there are three different ways of specifying the coding system
6563for sending mail:
6564
6565- If you use C-x RET f in the mail buffer, that takes priority.
6566- Otherwise, if you set sendmail-coding-system non-nil, that specifies it.
6567- Otherwise, the default coding system for new files is used,
6568 if that is non-nil. That comes from your language environment.
6569- Otherwise, Latin-1 is used.
6570
6571*** The command C-h t (help-with-tutorial) accepts a prefix argument
6572to specify the language for the tutorial file. Currently, English,
6573Japanese, Korean and Thai are supported. We welcome additional
6574translations.
6575
6576** An easy new way to visit a file with no code or format conversion
6577of any kind: Use M-x find-file-literally. There is also a command
6578insert-file-literally which inserts a file into the current buffer
6579without any conversion.
6580
6581** C-q's handling of octal character codes is changed.
6582You can now specify any number of octal digits.
6583RET terminates the digits and is discarded;
6584any other non-digit terminates the digits and is then used as input.
6585
6586** There are new commands for looking up Info documentation for
6587functions, variables and file names used in your programs.
6588
6589Type M-x info-lookup-symbol to look up a symbol in the buffer at point.
6590Type M-x info-lookup-file to look up a file in the buffer at point.
6591
6592Precisely which Info files are used to look it up depends on the major
6593mode. For example, in C mode, the GNU libc manual is used.
6594
6595** M-TAB in most programming language modes now runs the command
6596complete-symbol. This command performs completion on the symbol name
6597in the buffer before point.
6598
6599With a numeric argument, it performs completion based on the set of
6600symbols documented in the Info files for the programming language that
6601you are using.
6602
6603With no argument, it does completion based on the current tags tables,
6604just like the old binding of M-TAB (complete-tag).
6605
6606** File locking works with NFS now.
6607
6608The lock file for FILENAME is now a symbolic link named .#FILENAME,
6609in the same directory as FILENAME.
6610
6611This means that collision detection between two different machines now
6612works reasonably well; it also means that no file server or directory
6613can become a bottleneck.
6614
6615The new method does have drawbacks. It means that collision detection
6616does not operate when you edit a file in a directory where you cannot
6617create new files. Collision detection also doesn't operate when the
6618file server does not support symbolic links. But these conditions are
6619rare, and the ability to have collision detection while using NFS is
6620so useful that the change is worth while.
6621
6622When Emacs or a system crashes, this may leave behind lock files which
6623are stale. So you may occasionally get warnings about spurious
6624collisions. When you determine that the collision is spurious, just
6625tell Emacs to go ahead anyway.
6626
6627** If you wish to use Show Paren mode to display matching parentheses,
6628it is no longer sufficient to load paren.el. Instead you must call
6629show-paren-mode.
6630
6631** If you wish to use Delete Selection mode to replace a highlighted
6632selection when you insert new text, it is no longer sufficient to load
6633delsel.el. Instead you must call the function delete-selection-mode.
6634
6635** If you wish to use Partial Completion mode to complete partial words
6636within symbols or filenames, it is no longer sufficient to load
6637complete.el. Instead you must call the function partial-completion-mode.
6638
6639** If you wish to use uniquify to rename buffers for you,
6640it is no longer sufficient to load uniquify.el. You must also
6641set uniquify-buffer-name-style to one of the non-nil legitimate values.
6642
6643** Changes in View mode.
6644
6645*** Several new commands are available in View mode.
6646Do H in view mode for a list of commands.
6647
6648*** There are two new commands for entering View mode:
6649view-file-other-frame and view-buffer-other-frame.
6650
6651*** Exiting View mode does a better job of restoring windows to their
6652previous state.
6653
6654*** New customization variable view-scroll-auto-exit. If non-nil,
6655scrolling past end of buffer makes view mode exit.
6656
6657*** New customization variable view-exits-all-viewing-windows. If
6658non-nil, view-mode will at exit restore all windows viewing buffer,
6659not just the selected window.
6660
6661*** New customization variable view-read-only. If non-nil, visiting a
6662read-only file automatically enters View mode, and toggle-read-only
6663turns View mode on or off.
6664
6665*** New customization variable view-remove-frame-by-deleting controls
6666how to remove a not needed frame at view mode exit. If non-nil,
6667delete the frame, if nil make an icon of it.
6668
6669** C-x v l, the command to print a file's version control log,
6670now positions point at the entry for the file's current branch version.
6671
6672** C-x v =, the command to compare a file with the last checked-in version,
6673has a new feature. If the file is currently not locked, so that it is
6674presumably identical to the last checked-in version, the command now asks
6675which version to compare with.
6676
6677** When using hideshow.el, incremental search can temporarily show hidden
6678blocks if a match is inside the block.
6679
6680The block is hidden again if the search is continued and the next match
6681is outside the block. By customizing the variable
6682isearch-hide-immediately you can choose to hide all the temporarily
6683shown blocks only when exiting from incremental search.
6684
6685By customizing the variable hs-isearch-open you can choose what kind
6686of blocks to temporarily show during isearch: comment blocks, code
6687blocks, all of them or none.
6688
6689** The new command C-x 4 0 (kill-buffer-and-window) kills the
6690current buffer and deletes the selected window. It asks for
6691confirmation first.
6692
6693** C-x C-w, which saves the buffer into a specified file name,
6694now changes the major mode according to that file name.
6695However, the mode will not be changed if
6696(1) a local variables list or the `-*-' line specifies a major mode, or
6697(2) the current major mode is a "special" mode,
6698 not suitable for ordinary files, or
6699(3) the new file name does not particularly specify any mode.
6700
6701This applies to M-x set-visited-file-name as well.
6702
6703However, if you set change-major-mode-with-file-name to nil, then
6704these commands do not change the major mode.
6705
6706** M-x occur changes.
6707
6708*** If the argument to M-x occur contains upper case letters,
6709it performs a case-sensitive search.
6710
6711*** In the *Occur* buffer made by M-x occur,
6712if you type g or M-x revert-buffer, this repeats the search
6713using the same regular expression and the same buffer as before.
6714
6715** In Transient Mark mode, the region in any one buffer is highlighted
6716in just one window at a time. At first, it is highlighted in the
6717window where you set the mark. The buffer's highlighting remains in
6718that window unless you select to another window which shows the same
6719buffer--then the highlighting moves to that window.
6720
6721** The feature to suggest key bindings when you use M-x now operates
6722after the command finishes. The message suggesting key bindings
6723appears temporarily in the echo area. The previous echo area contents
6724come back after a few seconds, in case they contain useful information.
6725
6726** Each frame now independently records the order for recently
6727selected buffers, so that the default for C-x b is now based on the
6728buffers recently selected in the selected frame.
6729
6730** Outline mode changes.
6731
6732*** Outline mode now uses overlays (this is the former noutline.el).
6733
6734*** Incremental searches skip over invisible text in Outline mode.
6735
6736** When a minibuffer window is active but not the selected window, if
6737you try to use the minibuffer, you used to get a nested minibuffer.
6738Now, this not only gives an error, it also cancels the minibuffer that
6739was already active.
6740
6741The motive for this change is so that beginning users do not
6742unknowingly move away from minibuffers, leaving them active, and then
6743get confused by it.
6744
6745If you want to be able to have recursive minibuffers, you must
6746set enable-recursive-minibuffers to non-nil.
6747
6748** Changes in dynamic abbrevs.
6749
6750*** Expanding dynamic abbrevs with M-/ is now smarter about case
6751conversion. If the expansion has mixed case not counting the first
6752character, and the abbreviation matches the beginning of the expansion
6753including case, then the expansion is copied verbatim.
6754
6755The expansion is also copied verbatim if the abbreviation itself has
6756mixed case. And using SPC M-/ to copy an additional word always
6757copies it verbatim except when the previous copied word is all caps.
6758
6759*** The values of `dabbrev-case-replace' and `dabbrev-case-fold-search'
6760are no longer Lisp expressions. They have simply three possible
6761values.
6762
6763`dabbrev-case-replace' has these three values: nil (don't preserve
6764case), t (do), or `case-replace' (do like M-x query-replace).
6765`dabbrev-case-fold-search' has these three values: nil (don't ignore
6766case), t (do), or `case-fold-search' (do like search).
6767
6768** Minibuffer history lists are truncated automatically now to a
6769certain length. The variable history-length specifies how long they
6770can be. The default value is 30.
6771
6772** Changes in Mail mode.
6773
6774*** The key C-x m no longer runs the `mail' command directly.
6775Instead, it runs the command `compose-mail', which invokes the mail
6776composition mechanism you have selected with the variable
6777`mail-user-agent'. The default choice of user agent is
6778`sendmail-user-agent', which gives behavior compatible with the old
6779behavior.
6780
6781C-x 4 m now runs compose-mail-other-window, and C-x 5 m runs
6782compose-mail-other-frame.
6783
6784*** While composing a reply to a mail message, from Rmail, you can use
6785the command C-c C-r to cite just the region from the message you are
6786replying to. This copies the text which is the selected region in the
6787buffer that shows the original message.
6788
6789*** The command C-c C-i inserts a file at the end of the message,
6790with separator lines around the contents.
6791
6792*** The command M-x expand-mail-aliases expands all mail aliases
6793in suitable mail headers. Emacs automatically extracts mail alias
6794definitions from your mail alias file (e.g., ~/.mailrc). You do not
6795need to expand mail aliases yourself before sending mail.
6796
6797*** New features in the mail-complete command.
6798
6799**** The mail-complete command now inserts the user's full name,
6800for local users or if that is known. The variable mail-complete-style
6801controls the style to use, and whether to do this at all.
6802Its values are like those of mail-from-style.
6803
6804**** The variable mail-passwd-command lets you specify a shell command
6805to run to fetch a set of password-entries that add to the ones in
6806/etc/passwd.
6807
6808**** The variable mail-passwd-file now specifies a list of files to read
6809to get the list of user ids. By default, one file is used:
6810/etc/passwd.
6811
6812** You can "quote" a file name to inhibit special significance of
6813special syntax, by adding `/:' to the beginning. Thus, if you have a
6814directory named `/foo:', you can prevent it from being treated as a
6815reference to a remote host named `foo' by writing it as `/:/foo:'.
6816
6817Emacs uses this new construct automatically when necessary, such as
6818when you start it with a working directory whose name might otherwise
6819be taken to be magic.
6820
6821** There is a new command M-x grep-find which uses find to select
6822files to search through, and grep to scan them. The output is
6823available in a Compile mode buffer, as with M-x grep.
6824
6825M-x grep now uses the -e option if the grep program supports that.
6826(-e prevents problems if the search pattern starts with a dash.)
6827
6828** In Dired, the & command now flags for deletion the files whose names
6829suggest they are probably not needed in the long run.
6830
6831In Dired, * is now a prefix key for mark-related commands.
6832
6833new key dired.el binding old key
6834------- ---------------- -------
6835 * c dired-change-marks c
6836 * m dired-mark m
6837 * * dired-mark-executables * (binding deleted)
6838 * / dired-mark-directories / (binding deleted)
6839 * @ dired-mark-symlinks @ (binding deleted)
6840 * u dired-unmark u
6841 * DEL dired-unmark-backward DEL
6842 * ? dired-unmark-all-files M-C-?
6843 * ! dired-unmark-all-marks
6844 * % dired-mark-files-regexp % m
6845 * C-n dired-next-marked-file M-}
6846 * C-p dired-prev-marked-file M-{
6847
6848** Rmail changes.
6849
6850*** When Rmail cannot convert your incoming mail into Babyl format, it
6851saves the new mail in the file RMAILOSE.n, where n is an integer
6852chosen to make a unique name. This way, Rmail will not keep crashing
6853each time you run it.
6854
6855*** In Rmail, the variable rmail-summary-line-count-flag now controls
6856whether to include the line count in the summary. Non-nil means yes.
6857
6858*** In Rmail summary buffers, d and C-d (the commands to delete
6859messages) now take repeat counts as arguments. A negative argument
6860means to move in the opposite direction.
6861
6862*** In Rmail, the t command now takes an optional argument which lets
6863you specify whether to show the message headers in full or pruned.
6864
6865*** In Rmail, the new command w (rmail-output-body-to-file) writes
6866just the body of the current message into a file, without the headers.
6867It takes the file name from the message subject, by default, but you
6868can edit that file name in the minibuffer before it is actually used
6869for output.
6870
6871** Gnus changes.
6872
6873*** nntp.el has been totally rewritten in an asynchronous fashion.
6874
6875*** Article prefetching functionality has been moved up into
6876Gnus.
6877
6878*** Scoring can now be performed with logical operators like
6879`and', `or', `not', and parent redirection.
6880
6881*** Article washing status can be displayed in the
6882article mode line.
6883
6884*** gnus.el has been split into many smaller files.
6885
6886*** Suppression of duplicate articles based on Message-ID.
6887
6888(setq gnus-suppress-duplicates t)
6889
6890*** New variables for specifying what score and adapt files
6891are to be considered home score and adapt files. See
6892`gnus-home-score-file' and `gnus-home-adapt-files'.
6893
6894*** Groups can inherit group parameters from parent topics.
6895
6896*** Article editing has been revamped and is now usable.
6897
6898*** Signatures can be recognized in more intelligent fashions.
6899See `gnus-signature-separator' and `gnus-signature-limit'.
6900
6901*** Summary pick mode has been made to look more nn-like.
6902Line numbers are displayed and the `.' command can be
6903used to pick articles.
6904
6905*** Commands for moving the .newsrc.eld from one server to
6906another have been added.
6907
6908 `M-x gnus-change-server'
6909
6910*** A way to specify that "uninteresting" fields be suppressed when
6911generating lines in buffers.
6912
6913*** Several commands in the group buffer can be undone with
6914`M-C-_'.
6915
6916*** Scoring can be done on words using the new score type `w'.
6917
6918*** Adaptive scoring can be done on a Subject word-by-word basis:
6919
6920 (setq gnus-use-adaptive-scoring '(word))
6921
6922*** Scores can be decayed.
6923
6924 (setq gnus-decay-scores t)
6925
6926*** Scoring can be performed using a regexp on the Date header. The
6927Date is normalized to compact ISO 8601 format first.
6928
6929*** A new command has been added to remove all data on articles from
6930the native server.
6931
6932 `M-x gnus-group-clear-data-on-native-groups'
6933
6934*** A new command for reading collections of documents
6935(nndoc with nnvirtual on top) has been added -- `M-C-d'.
6936
6937*** Process mark sets can be pushed and popped.
6938
6939*** A new mail-to-news backend makes it possible to post
6940even when the NNTP server doesn't allow posting.
6941
6942*** A new backend for reading searches from Web search engines
6943(DejaNews, Alta Vista, InReference) has been added.
6944
6945 Use the `G w' command in the group buffer to create such
6946 a group.
6947
6948*** Groups inside topics can now be sorted using the standard
6949sorting functions, and each topic can be sorted independently.
6950
6951 See the commands under the `T S' submap.
6952
6953*** Subsets of the groups can be sorted independently.
6954
6955 See the commands under the `G P' submap.
6956
6957*** Cached articles can be pulled into the groups.
6958
6959 Use the `Y c' command.
6960
6961*** Score files are now applied in a more reliable order.
6962
6963*** Reports on where mail messages end up can be generated.
6964
6965 `M-x nnmail-split-history'
6966
6967*** More hooks and functions have been added to remove junk
6968from incoming mail before saving the mail.
6969
6970 See `nnmail-prepare-incoming-header-hook'.
6971
6972*** The nnml mail backend now understands compressed article files.
6973
6974*** To enable Gnus to read/post multi-lingual articles, you must execute
6975the following code, for instance, in your .emacs.
6976
6977 (add-hook 'gnus-startup-hook 'gnus-mule-initialize)
6978
6979Then, when you start Gnus, it will decode non-ASCII text automatically
6980and show appropriate characters. (Note: if you are using gnus-mime
6981from the SEMI package, formerly known as TM, you should NOT add this
6982hook to gnus-startup-hook; gnus-mime has its own method of handling
6983this issue.)
6984
6985Since it is impossible to distinguish all coding systems
6986automatically, you may need to specify a choice of coding system for a
6987particular news group. This can be done by:
6988
6989 (gnus-mule-add-group NEWSGROUP 'CODING-SYSTEM)
6990
6991Here NEWSGROUP should be a string which names a newsgroup or a tree
6992of newsgroups. If NEWSGROUP is "XXX.YYY", all news groups under
6993"XXX.YYY" (including "XXX.YYY.ZZZ") will use the specified coding
6994system. CODING-SYSTEM specifies which coding system to use (for both
6995for reading and posting).
6996
6997CODING-SYSTEM can also be a cons cell of the form
6998 (READ-CODING-SYSTEM . POST-CODING-SYSTEM)
6999Then READ-CODING-SYSTEM is used when you read messages from the
7000newsgroups, while POST-CODING-SYSTEM is used when you post messages
7001there.
7002
7003Emacs knows the right coding systems for certain newsgroups by
7004default. Here are some of these default settings:
7005
7006 (gnus-mule-add-group "fj" 'iso-2022-7)
7007 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.chinese.text" 'hz-gb-2312)
7008 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.hk" 'hz-gb-2312)
7009 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.chinese.text.big5" 'cn-big5)
7010 (gnus-mule-add-group "soc.culture.vietnamese" '(nil . viqr))
7011
7012When you reply by mail to an article, these settings are ignored;
7013the mail is encoded according to sendmail-coding-system, as usual.
7014
7015** CC mode changes.
7016
7017*** If you edit primarily one style of C (or C++, Objective-C, Java)
7018code, you may want to make the CC Mode style variables have global
7019values so that you can set them directly in your .emacs file. To do
7020this, set c-style-variables-are-local-p to nil in your .emacs file.
7021Note that this only takes effect if you do it *before* cc-mode.el is
7022loaded.
7023
7024If you typically edit more than one style of C (or C++, Objective-C,
7025Java) code in a single Emacs session, you may want to make the CC Mode
7026style variables have buffer local values. By default, all buffers
7027share the same style variable settings; to make them buffer local, set
7028c-style-variables-are-local-p to t in your .emacs file. Note that you
7029must do this *before* CC Mode is loaded.
7030
7031*** The new variable c-indentation-style holds the C style name
7032of the current buffer.
7033
7034*** The variable c-block-comments-indent-p has been deleted, because
7035it is no longer necessary. C mode now handles all the supported styles
7036of block comments, with no need to say which one you will use.
7037
7038*** There is a new indentation style "python", which specifies the C
7039style that the Python developers like.
7040
7041*** There is a new c-cleanup-list option: brace-elseif-brace.
7042This says to put ...} else if (...) {... on one line,
7043just as brace-else-brace says to put ...} else {... on one line.
7044
7045** VC Changes [new]
7046
7047** In vc-retrieve-snapshot (C-x v r), if you don't specify a snapshot
7048name, it retrieves the *latest* versions of all files in the current
7049directory and its subdirectories (aside from files already locked).
7050
7051This feature is useful if your RCS directory is a link to a common
7052master directory, and you want to pick up changes made by other
7053developers.
7054
7055You can do the same thing for an individual file by typing C-u C-x C-q
7056RET in a buffer visiting that file.
7057
7058*** VC can now handle files under CVS that are being "watched" by
7059other developers. Such files are made read-only by CVS. To get a
7060writable copy, type C-x C-q in a buffer visiting such a file. VC then
7061calls "cvs edit", which notifies the other developers of it.
7062
7063*** vc-version-diff (C-u C-x v =) now suggests reasonable defaults for
7064version numbers, based on the current state of the file.
7065
7066** Calendar changes.
7067
7068A new function, list-holidays, allows you list holidays or subclasses
7069of holidays for ranges of years. Related menu items allow you do this
7070for the year of the selected date, or the following/previous years.
7071
7072** ps-print changes
7073
7074There are some new user variables for customizing the page layout.
7075
7076*** Paper size, paper orientation, columns
7077
7078The variable `ps-paper-type' determines the size of paper ps-print
7079formats for; it should contain one of the symbols:
7080`a4' `a3' `letter' `legal' `letter-small' `tabloid'
7081`ledger' `statement' `executive' `a4small' `b4' `b5'
7082It defaults to `letter'.
7083If you need other sizes, see the variable `ps-page-dimensions-database'.
7084
7085The variable `ps-landscape-mode' determines the orientation
7086of the printing on the page. nil, the default, means "portrait" mode,
7087non-nil means "landscape" mode.
7088
7089The variable `ps-number-of-columns' must be a positive integer.
7090It determines the number of columns both in landscape and portrait mode.
7091It defaults to 1.
7092
7093*** Horizontal layout
7094
7095The horizontal layout is determined by the variables
7096`ps-left-margin', `ps-inter-column', and `ps-right-margin'.
7097All are measured in points.
7098
7099*** Vertical layout
7100
7101The vertical layout is determined by the variables
7102`ps-bottom-margin', `ps-top-margin', and `ps-header-offset'.
7103All are measured in points.
7104
7105*** Headers
7106
7107If the variable `ps-print-header' is nil, no header is printed. Then
7108`ps-header-offset' is not relevant and `ps-top-margin' represents the
7109margin above the text.
7110
7111If the variable `ps-print-header-frame' is non-nil, a gaudy
7112framing box is printed around the header.
7113
7114The contents of the header are determined by `ps-header-lines',
7115`ps-show-n-of-n', `ps-left-header' and `ps-right-header'.
7116
7117The height of the header is determined by `ps-header-line-pad',
7118`ps-header-font-family', `ps-header-title-font-size' and
7119`ps-header-font-size'.
7120
7121*** Font managing
7122
7123The variable `ps-font-family' determines which font family is to be
7124used for ordinary text. Its value must be a key symbol in the alist
7125`ps-font-info-database'. You can add other font families by adding
7126elements to this alist.
7127
7128The variable `ps-font-size' determines the size of the font
7129for ordinary text. It defaults to 8.5 points.
7130
7131** hideshow changes.
7132
7133*** now supports hiding of blocks of single line comments (like // for
7134C++, ; for lisp).
7135
7136*** Support for java-mode added.
7137
7138*** When doing `hs-hide-all' it is now possible to also hide the comments
7139in the file if `hs-hide-comments-when-hiding-all' is set.
7140
7141*** The new function `hs-hide-initial-comment' hides the the comments at
7142the beginning of the files. Finally those huge RCS logs don't stay in your
7143way! This is run by default when entering the `hs-minor-mode'.
7144
7145*** Now uses overlays instead of `selective-display', so is more
7146robust and a lot faster.
7147
7148*** A block beginning can span multiple lines.
7149
7150*** The new variable `hs-show-hidden-short-form' if t, directs hideshow
7151to show only the beginning of a block when it is hidden. See the
7152documentation for more details.
7153
7154** Changes in Enriched mode.
7155
7156*** When you visit a file in enriched-mode, Emacs will make sure it is
7157filled to the current fill-column. This behavior is now independent
7158of the size of the window. When you save the file, the fill-column in
7159use is stored as well, so that the whole buffer need not be refilled
7160the next time unless the fill-column is different.
7161
7162*** use-hard-newlines is now a minor mode. When it is enabled, Emacs
7163distinguishes between hard and soft newlines, and treats hard newlines
7164as paragraph boundaries. Otherwise all newlines inserted are marked
7165as soft, and paragraph boundaries are determined solely from the text.
7166
7167** Font Lock mode
7168
7169*** Custom support
7170
7171The variables font-lock-face-attributes, font-lock-display-type and
7172font-lock-background-mode are now obsolete; the recommended way to specify the
7173faces to use for Font Lock mode is with M-x customize-group on the new custom
7174group font-lock-highlighting-faces. If you set font-lock-face-attributes in
7175your ~/.emacs file, Font Lock mode will respect its value. However, you should
7176consider converting from setting that variable to using M-x customize.
7177
7178You can still use X resources to specify Font Lock face appearances.
7179
7180*** Maximum decoration
7181
7182Fontification now uses the maximum level of decoration supported by
7183default. Previously, fontification used a mode-specific default level
7184of decoration, which is typically the minimum level of decoration
7185supported. You can set font-lock-maximum-decoration to nil
7186to get the old behavior.
7187
7188*** New support
7189
7190Support is now provided for Java, Objective-C, AWK and SIMULA modes.
7191
7192Note that Font Lock mode can be turned on without knowing exactly what modes
7193support Font Lock mode, via the command global-font-lock-mode.
7194
7195*** Configurable support
7196
7197Support for C, C++, Objective-C and Java can be more easily configured for
7198additional types and classes via the new variables c-font-lock-extra-types,
7199c++-font-lock-extra-types, objc-font-lock-extra-types and, you guessed it,
7200java-font-lock-extra-types. These value of each of these variables should be a
7201list of regexps matching the extra type names. For example, the default value
7202of c-font-lock-extra-types is ("\\sw+_t") which means fontification follows the
7203convention that C type names end in _t. This results in slower fontification.
7204
7205Of course, you can change the variables that specify fontification in whatever
7206way you wish, typically by adding regexps. However, these new variables make
7207it easier to make specific and common changes for the fontification of types.
7208
7209*** Adding highlighting patterns to existing support
7210
7211You can use the new function font-lock-add-keywords to add your own
7212highlighting patterns, such as for project-local or user-specific constructs,
7213for any mode.
7214
7215For example, to highlight `FIXME:' words in C comments, put:
7216
7217 (font-lock-add-keywords 'c-mode '(("\\<FIXME:" 0 font-lock-warning-face t)))
7218
7219in your ~/.emacs.
7220
7221*** New faces
7222
7223Font Lock now defines two new faces, font-lock-builtin-face and
7224font-lock-warning-face. These are intended to highlight builtin keywords,
7225distinct from a language's normal keywords, and objects that should be brought
7226to user attention, respectively. Various modes now use these new faces.
7227
7228*** Changes to fast-lock support mode
7229
7230The fast-lock package, one of the two Font Lock support modes, can now process
7231cache files silently. You can use the new variable fast-lock-verbose, in the
7232same way as font-lock-verbose, to control this feature.
7233
7234*** Changes to lazy-lock support mode
7235
7236The lazy-lock package, one of the two Font Lock support modes, can now fontify
7237according to the true syntactic context relative to other lines. You can use
7238the new variable lazy-lock-defer-contextually to control this feature. If
7239non-nil, changes to the buffer will cause subsequent lines in the buffer to be
7240refontified after lazy-lock-defer-time seconds of idle time. If nil, then only
7241the modified lines will be refontified; this is the same as the previous Lazy
7242Lock mode behaviour and the behaviour of Font Lock mode.
7243
7244This feature is useful in modes where strings or comments can span lines.
7245For example, if a string or comment terminating character is deleted, then if
7246this feature is enabled subsequent lines in the buffer will be correctly
7247refontified to reflect their new syntactic context. Previously, only the line
7248containing the deleted character would be refontified and you would have to use
7249the command M-g M-g (font-lock-fontify-block) to refontify some lines.
7250
7251As a consequence of this new feature, two other variables have changed:
7252
7253Variable `lazy-lock-defer-driven' is renamed `lazy-lock-defer-on-scrolling'.
7254Variable `lazy-lock-defer-time' can now only be a time, i.e., a number.
7255Buffer modes for which on-the-fly deferral applies can be specified via the
7256new variable `lazy-lock-defer-on-the-fly'.
7257
7258If you set these variables in your ~/.emacs, then you may have to change those
7259settings.
7260
7261** Ada mode changes.
7262
7263*** There is now better support for using find-file.el with Ada mode.
7264If you switch between spec and body, the cursor stays in the same
7265procedure (modulo overloading). If a spec has no body file yet, but
7266you try to switch to its body file, Ada mode now generates procedure
7267stubs.
7268
7269*** There are two new commands:
7270 - `ada-make-local' : invokes gnatmake on the current buffer
7271 - `ada-check-syntax' : check syntax of current buffer.
7272
7273The user options `ada-compiler-make', `ada-make-options',
7274`ada-language-version', `ada-compiler-syntax-check', and
7275`ada-compile-options' are used within these commands.
7276
7277*** Ada mode can now work with Outline minor mode. The outline level
7278is calculated from the indenting, not from syntactic constructs.
7279Outlining does not work if your code is not correctly indented.
7280
7281*** The new function `ada-gnat-style' converts the buffer to the style of
7282formatting used in GNAT. It places two blanks after a comment start,
7283places one blank between a word end and an opening '(', and puts one
7284space between a comma and the beginning of a word.
7285
7286** Scheme mode changes.
7287
7288*** Scheme mode indentation now uses many of the facilities of Lisp
7289mode; therefore, the variables to customize it are the variables used
7290for Lisp mode which have names starting with `lisp-'. The variables
7291with names starting with `scheme-' which used to do this no longer
7292have any effect.
7293
7294If you want to use different indentation for Scheme and Lisp, this is
7295still possible, but now you must do it by adding a hook to
7296scheme-mode-hook, which could work by setting the `lisp-' indentation
7297variables as buffer-local variables.
7298
7299*** DSSSL mode is a variant of Scheme mode, for editing DSSSL scripts.
7300Use M-x dsssl-mode.
7301
7302** Changes to the emacsclient program
7303
7304*** If a socket can't be found, and environment variables LOGNAME or
7305USER are set, emacsclient now looks for a socket based on the UID
7306associated with the name. That is an emacsclient running as root
7307can connect to an Emacs server started by a non-root user.
7308
7309*** The emacsclient program now accepts an option --no-wait which tells
7310it to return immediately without waiting for you to "finish" the
7311buffer in Emacs.
7312
7313*** The new option --alternate-editor allows to specify an editor to
7314use if Emacs is not running. The environment variable
7315ALTERNATE_EDITOR can be used for the same effect; the command line
7316option takes precedence.
7317
7318** M-x eldoc-mode enables a minor mode in which the echo area
7319constantly shows the parameter list for function being called at point
7320(in Emacs Lisp and Lisp Interaction modes only).
7321
7322** C-x n d now runs the new command narrow-to-defun,
7323which narrows the accessible parts of the buffer to just
7324the current defun.
7325
7326** Emacs now handles the `--' argument in the standard way; all
7327following arguments are treated as ordinary file names.
7328
7329** On MSDOS and Windows, the bookmark file is now called _emacs.bmk,
7330and the saved desktop file is now called _emacs.desktop (truncated if
7331necessary).
7332
7333** When you kill a buffer that visits a file,
7334if there are any registers that save positions in the file,
7335these register values no longer become completely useless.
7336If you try to go to such a register with C-x j, then you are
7337asked whether to visit the file again. If you say yes,
7338it visits the file and then goes to the same position.
7339
7340** When you visit a file that changes frequently outside Emacs--for
7341example, a log of output from a process that continues to run--it may
7342be useful for Emacs to revert the file without querying you whenever
7343you visit the file afresh with C-x C-f.
7344
7345You can request this behavior for certain files by setting the
7346variable revert-without-query to a list of regular expressions. If a
7347file's name matches any of these regular expressions, find-file and
7348revert-buffer revert the buffer without asking for permission--but
7349only if you have not edited the buffer text yourself.
7350
7351** set-default-font has been renamed to set-frame-font
7352since it applies only to the current frame.
7353
7354** In TeX mode, you can use the variable tex-main-file to specify the
7355file for tex-file to run TeX on. (By default, tex-main-file is nil,
7356and tex-file runs TeX on the current visited file.)
7357
7358This is useful when you are editing a document that consists of
7359multiple files. In each of the included files, you can set up a local
7360variable list which specifies the top-level file of your document for
7361tex-main-file. Then tex-file will run TeX on the whole document
7362instead of just the file you are editing.
7363
7364** RefTeX mode
7365
7366RefTeX mode is a new minor mode with special support for \label, \ref
7367and \cite macros in LaTeX documents. RefTeX distinguishes labels of
7368different environments (equation, figure, ...) and has full support for
7369multifile documents. To use it, select a buffer with a LaTeX document and
7370turn the mode on with M-x reftex-mode. Here are the main user commands:
7371
7372C-c ( reftex-label
7373 Creates a label semi-automatically. RefTeX is context sensitive and
7374 knows which kind of label is needed.
7375
7376C-c ) reftex-reference
7377 Offers in a menu all labels in the document, along with context of the
7378 label definition. The selected label is referenced as \ref{LABEL}.
7379
7380C-c [ reftex-citation
7381 Prompts for a regular expression and displays a list of matching BibTeX
7382 database entries. The selected entry is cited with a \cite{KEY} macro.
7383
7384C-c & reftex-view-crossref
7385 Views the cross reference of a \ref or \cite command near point.
7386
7387C-c = reftex-toc
7388 Shows a table of contents of the (multifile) document. From there you
7389 can quickly jump to every section.
7390
7391Under X, RefTeX installs a "Ref" menu in the menu bar, with additional
7392commands. Press `?' to get help when a prompt mentions this feature.
7393Full documentation and customization examples are in the file
7394reftex.el. You can use the finder to view the file documentation:
7395C-h p --> tex --> reftex.el
7396
7397** Changes in BibTeX mode.
7398
7399*** Info documentation is now available.
7400
7401*** Don't allow parentheses in string constants anymore. This confused
7402both the BibTeX program and Emacs BibTeX mode.
7403
7404*** Renamed variable bibtex-mode-user-optional-fields to
7405bibtex-user-optional-fields.
7406
7407*** Removed variable bibtex-include-OPTannote
7408(use bibtex-user-optional-fields instead).
7409
7410*** New interactive functions to copy and kill fields and complete
7411entries to the BibTeX kill ring, from where they can be yanked back by
7412appropriate functions.
7413
7414*** New interactive functions for repositioning and marking of
7415entries. They are bound by default to M-C-l and M-C-h.
7416
7417*** New hook bibtex-clean-entry-hook. It is called after entry has
7418been cleaned.
7419
7420*** New variable bibtex-field-delimiters, which replaces variables
7421bibtex-field-{left|right}-delimiter.
7422
7423*** New variable bibtex-entry-delimiters to determine how entries
7424shall be delimited.
7425
7426*** Allow preinitialization of fields. See documentation of
7427bibtex-user-optional-fields, bibtex-entry-field-alist, and
7428bibtex-include-OPTkey for details.
7429
7430*** Book and InBook entries require either an author or an editor
7431field. This is now supported by bibtex.el. Alternative fields are
7432prefixed with `ALT'.
7433
7434*** New variable bibtex-entry-format, which replaces variable
7435bibtex-clean-entry-zap-empty-opts and allows specification of many
7436formatting options performed on cleaning an entry (see variable
7437documentation).
7438
7439*** Even more control on how automatic keys are generated. See
7440documentation of bibtex-generate-autokey for details. Transcriptions
7441for foreign languages other than German are now handled, too.
7442
7443*** New boolean user option bibtex-comma-after-last-field to decide if
7444comma should be inserted at end of last field.
7445
7446*** New boolean user option bibtex-align-at-equal-sign to determine if
7447alignment should be made at left side of field contents or at equal
7448signs. New user options to control entry layout (e.g. indentation).
7449
7450*** New function bibtex-fill-entry to realign entries.
7451
7452*** New function bibtex-reformat to reformat region or buffer.
7453
7454*** New function bibtex-convert-alien to convert a BibTeX database
7455from alien sources.
7456
7457*** New function bibtex-complete-key (similar to bibtex-complete-string)
7458to complete prefix to a key defined in buffer. Mainly useful in
7459crossref entries.
7460
7461*** New function bibtex-count-entries to count entries in buffer or
7462region.
7463
7464*** Added support for imenu.
7465
7466*** The function `bibtex-validate' now checks current region instead
7467of buffer if mark is active. Now it shows all errors of buffer in a
7468`compilation mode' buffer. You can use the normal commands (e.g.
7469`next-error') for compilation modes to jump to errors.
7470
7471*** New variable `bibtex-string-file-path' to determine where the files
7472from `bibtex-string-files' are searched.
7473
7474** Iso Accents mode now supports Latin-3 as an alternative.
7475
7476** The command next-error now opens blocks hidden by hideshow.
7477
7478** The function using-unix-filesystems has been replaced by the
7479functions add-untranslated-filesystem and remove-untranslated-filesystem.
7480Each of these functions takes the name of a drive letter or directory
7481as an argument.
7482
7483When a filesystem is added as untranslated, all files on it are read
7484and written in binary mode (no cr/lf translation is performed).
7485
7486** browse-url changes
7487
7488*** New methods for: Grail (browse-url-generic), MMM (browse-url-mmm),
7489Lynx in a separate xterm (browse-url-lynx-xterm) or in an Emacs window
7490(browse-url-lynx-emacs), remote W3 (browse-url-w3-gnudoit), generic
7491non-remote-controlled browsers (browse-url-generic) and associated
7492customization variables.
7493
7494*** New commands `browse-url-of-region' and `browse-url'.
7495
7496*** URLs marked up with <URL:...> (RFC1738) work if broken across
7497lines. Browsing methods can be associated with URL regexps
7498(e.g. mailto: URLs) via `browse-url-browser-function'.
7499
7500** Changes in Ediff
7501
7502*** Clicking Mouse-2 on a brief command description in Ediff control panel
7503pops up the Info file for this command.
7504
7505*** There is now a variable, ediff-autostore-merges, which controls whether
7506the result of a merge is saved in a file. By default, this is done only when
7507merge is done from a session group (eg, when merging files in two different
7508directories).
7509
7510*** Since Emacs 19.31 (this hasn't been announced before), Ediff can compare
7511and merge groups of files residing in different directories, or revisions of
7512files in the same directory.
7513
7514*** Since Emacs 19.31, Ediff can apply multi-file patches interactively.
7515The patches must be in the context format or GNU unified format. (The bug
7516related to the GNU format has now been fixed.)
7517
7518** Changes in Viper
7519
7520*** The startup file is now .viper instead of .vip
7521*** All variable/function names have been changed to start with viper-
7522 instead of vip-.
7523*** C-\ now simulates the meta-key in all Viper states.
7524*** C-z in Insert state now escapes to Vi for the duration of the next
7525Viper command. In Vi and Insert states, C-z behaves as before.
7526*** C-c \ escapes to Vi for one command if Viper is in Insert or Emacs states.
7527*** _ is no longer the meta-key in Vi state.
7528*** The variable viper-insert-state-cursor-color can be used to change cursor
7529color when Viper is in insert state.
7530*** If search lands the cursor near the top or the bottom of the window,
7531Viper pulls the window up or down to expose more context. The variable
7532viper-adjust-window-after-search controls this behavior.
7533
7534** Etags changes.
7535
7536*** In C, C++, Objective C and Java, Etags tags global variables by
7537default. The resulting tags files are inflated by 30% on average.
7538Use --no-globals to turn this feature off. Etags can also tag
7539variables which are members of structure-like constructs, but it does
7540not by default. Use --members to turn this feature on.
7541
7542*** C++ member functions are now recognized as tags.
7543
7544*** Java is tagged like C++. In addition, "extends" and "implements"
7545constructs are tagged. Files are recognised by the extension .java.
7546
7547*** Etags can now handle programs written in Postscript. Files are
7548recognised by the extensions .ps and .pdb (Postscript with C syntax).
7549In Postscript, tags are lines that start with a slash.
7550
7551*** Etags now handles Objective C and Objective C++ code. The usual C and
7552C++ tags are recognized in these languages; in addition, etags
7553recognizes special Objective C syntax for classes, class categories,
7554methods and protocols.
7555
7556*** Etags also handles Cobol. Files are recognised by the extension
7557.cobol. The tagged lines are those containing a word that begins in
7558column 8 and ends in a full stop, i.e. anything that could be a
7559paragraph name.
7560
7561*** Regexps in Etags now support intervals, as in ed or grep. The syntax of
7562an interval is \{M,N\}, and it means to match the preceding expression
7563at least M times and as many as N times.
7564
7565** The format for specifying a custom format for time-stamp to insert
7566in files has changed slightly.
7567
7568With the new enhancements to the functionality of format-time-string,
7569time-stamp-format will change to be eventually compatible with it.
7570This conversion is being done in two steps to maintain compatibility
7571with old time-stamp-format values.
7572
7573In the new scheme, alternate case is signified by the number-sign
7574(`#') modifier, rather than changing the case of the format character.
7575This feature is as yet incompletely implemented for compatibility
7576reasons.
7577
7578In the old time-stamp-format, all numeric fields defaulted to their
7579natural width. (With format-time-string, each format has a
7580fixed-width default.) In this version, you can specify the colon
7581(`:') modifier to a numeric conversion to mean "give me the historical
7582time-stamp-format width default." Do not use colon if you are
7583specifying an explicit width, as in "%02d".
7584
7585Numbers are no longer truncated to the requested width, except in the
7586case of "%02y", which continues to give a two-digit year. Digit
7587truncation probably wasn't being used for anything else anyway.
7588
7589The new formats will work with old versions of Emacs. New formats are
7590being recommended now to allow time-stamp-format to change in the
7591future to be compatible with format-time-string. The new forms being
7592recommended now will continue to work then.
7593
7594See the documentation string for the variable time-stamp-format for
7595details.
7596
7597** There are some additional major modes:
7598
7599dcl-mode, for editing VMS DCL files.
7600m4-mode, for editing files of m4 input.
7601meta-mode, for editing MetaFont and MetaPost source files.
7602
7603** In Shell mode, the command shell-copy-environment-variable lets you
7604copy the value of a specified environment variable from the subshell
7605into Emacs.
7606
7607** New Lisp packages include:
7608
7609*** battery.el displays battery status for laptops.
7610
7611*** M-x bruce (named after Lenny Bruce) is a program that might
7612be used for adding some indecent words to your email.
7613
7614*** M-x crisp-mode enables an emulation for the CRiSP editor.
7615
7616*** M-x dirtrack arranges for better tracking of directory changes
7617in shell buffers.
7618
7619*** The new library elint.el provides for linting of Emacs Lisp code.
7620See the documentation for `elint-initialize', `elint-current-buffer'
7621and `elint-defun'.
7622
7623*** M-x expand-add-abbrevs defines a special kind of abbrev which is
7624meant for programming constructs. These abbrevs expand like ordinary
7625ones, when you type SPC, but only at the end of a line and not within
7626strings or comments.
7627
7628These abbrevs can act as templates: you can define places within an
7629abbrev for insertion of additional text. Once you expand the abbrev,
7630you can then use C-x a p and C-x a n to move back and forth to these
7631insertion points. Thus you can conveniently insert additional text
7632at these points.
7633
7634*** filecache.el remembers the location of files so that you
7635can visit them by short forms of their names.
7636
7637*** find-func.el lets you find the definition of the user-loaded
7638Emacs Lisp function at point.
7639
7640*** M-x handwrite converts text to a "handwritten" picture.
7641
7642*** M-x iswitchb-buffer is a command for switching to a buffer, much like
7643switch-buffer, but it reads the argument in a more helpful way.
7644
7645*** M-x landmark implements a neural network for landmark learning.
7646
7647*** M-x locate provides a convenient interface to the `locate' program.
7648
7649*** M4 mode is a new mode for editing files of m4 input.
7650
7651*** mantemp.el creates C++ manual template instantiations
7652from the GCC error messages which indicate which instantiations are needed.
7653
7654*** mouse-copy.el provides a one-click copy and move feature.
7655You can drag a region with M-mouse-1, and it is automatically
7656inserted at point. M-Shift-mouse-1 deletes the text from its
7657original place after inserting the copy.
7658
7659*** mouse-drag.el lets you do scrolling by dragging Mouse-2
7660on the buffer.
7661
7662You click the mouse and move; that distance either translates into the
7663velocity to scroll (with mouse-drag-throw) or the distance to scroll
7664(with mouse-drag-drag). Horizontal scrolling is enabled when needed.
7665
7666Enable mouse-drag with:
7667 (global-set-key [down-mouse-2] 'mouse-drag-throw)
7668-or-
7669 (global-set-key [down-mouse-2] 'mouse-drag-drag)
7670
7671*** mspools.el is useful for determining which mail folders have
7672mail waiting to be read in them. It works with procmail.
7673
7674*** Octave mode is a major mode for editing files of input for Octave.
7675It comes with a facility for communicating with an Octave subprocess.
7676
7677*** ogonek
7678
7679The ogonek package provides functions for changing the coding of
7680Polish diacritic characters in buffers. Codings known from various
7681platforms are supported such as ISO8859-2, Mazovia, IBM Latin2, and
7682TeX. For example, you can change the coding from Mazovia to
7683ISO8859-2. Another example is a change of coding from ISO8859-2 to
7684prefix notation (in which `/a' stands for the aogonek character, for
7685instance) and vice versa.
7686
7687To use this package load it using
7688 M-x load-library [enter] ogonek
7689Then, you may get an explanation by calling one of
7690 M-x ogonek-jak -- in Polish
7691 M-x ogonek-how -- in English
7692The info specifies the commands and variables provided as well as the
7693ways of customization in `.emacs'.
7694
7695*** Interface to ph.
7696
7697Emacs provides a client interface to CCSO Nameservers (ph/qi)
7698
7699The CCSO nameserver is used in many universities to provide directory
7700services about people. ph.el provides a convenient Emacs interface to
7701these servers.
7702
7703*** uce.el is useful for replying to unsolicited commercial email.
7704
7705*** vcursor.el implements a "virtual cursor" feature.
7706You can move the virtual cursor with special commands
7707while the real cursor does not move.
7708
7709*** webjump.el is a "hot list" package which you can set up
7710for visiting your favorite web sites.
7711
7712*** M-x winner-mode is a minor mode which saves window configurations,
7713so you can move back to other configurations that you have recently used.
7714
7715** movemail change
7716
7717Movemail no longer needs to be installed setuid root in order for POP
7718mail retrieval to function properly. This is because it no longer
7719supports the RPOP (reserved-port POP) protocol; instead, it uses the
7720user's POP password to authenticate to the mail server.
7721
7722This change was made earlier, but not reported in NEWS before.
7723\f
7724* Emacs 20.1 changes for MS-DOS and MS-Windows.
7725
7726** Changes in handling MS-DOS/MS-Windows text files.
7727
7728Emacs handles three different conventions for representing
7729end-of-line: CRLF for MSDOS, LF for Unix and GNU, and CR (used on the
7730Macintosh). Emacs determines which convention is used in a specific
7731file based on the contents of that file (except for certain special
7732file names), and when it saves the file, it uses the same convention.
7733
7734To save the file and change the end-of-line convention, you can use
7735C-x RET f (set-buffer-file-coding-system) to specify a different
7736coding system for the buffer. Then, when you save the file, the newly
7737specified coding system will take effect. For example, to save with
7738LF, specify undecided-unix (or some other ...-unix coding system); to
7739save with CRLF, specify undecided-dos.
7740\f
7741* Lisp Changes in Emacs 20.1
7742
7743** Byte-compiled files made with Emacs 20 will, in general, work in
7744Emacs 19 as well, as long as the source code runs in Emacs 19. And
7745vice versa: byte-compiled files made with Emacs 19 should also run in
7746Emacs 20, as long as the program itself works in Emacs 20.
7747
7748** Windows-specific functions and variables have been renamed
7749to start with w32- instead of win32-.
7750
7751In hacker language, calling something a "win" is a form of praise. We
7752don't want to praise a non-free Microsoft system, so we don't call it
7753"win".
7754
7755** Basic Lisp changes
7756
7757*** A symbol whose name starts with a colon now automatically
7758evaluates to itself. Therefore such a symbol can be used as a constant.
7759
7760*** The defined purpose of `defconst' has been changed. It should now
7761be used only for values that should not be changed whether by a program
7762or by the user.
7763
7764The actual behavior of defconst has not been changed.
7765
7766*** There are new macros `when' and `unless'
7767
7768(when CONDITION BODY...) is short for (if CONDITION (progn BODY...))
7769(unless CONDITION BODY...) is short for (if CONDITION nil BODY...)
7770
7771*** Emacs now defines functions caar, cadr, cdar and cddr with their
7772usual Lisp meanings. For example, caar returns the car of the car of
7773its argument.
7774
7775*** equal, when comparing strings, now ignores their text properties.
7776
7777*** The new function `functionp' tests whether an object is a function.
7778
7779*** arrayp now returns t for char-tables and bool-vectors.
7780
7781*** Certain primitives which use characters (as integers) now get an
7782error if the integer is not a valid character code. These primitives
7783include insert-char, char-to-string, and the %c construct in the
7784`format' function.
7785
7786*** The `require' function now insists on adding a suffix, either .el
7787or .elc, to the file name. Thus, (require 'foo) will not use a file
7788whose name is just foo. It insists on foo.el or foo.elc.
7789
7790*** The `autoload' function, when the file name does not contain
7791either a directory name or the suffix .el or .elc, insists on
7792adding one of these suffixes.
7793
7794*** string-to-number now takes an optional second argument BASE
7795which specifies the base to use when converting an integer.
7796If BASE is omitted, base 10 is used.
7797
7798We have not implemented other radices for floating point numbers,
7799because that would be much more work and does not seem useful.
7800
7801*** substring now handles vectors as well as strings.
7802
7803*** The Common Lisp function eql is no longer defined normally.
7804You must load the `cl' library to define it.
7805
7806*** The new macro `with-current-buffer' lets you evaluate an expression
7807conveniently with a different current buffer. It looks like this:
7808
7809 (with-current-buffer BUFFER BODY-FORMS...)
7810
7811BUFFER is the expression that says which buffer to use.
7812BODY-FORMS say what to do in that buffer.
7813
7814*** The new primitive `save-current-buffer' saves and restores the
7815choice of current buffer, like `save-excursion', but without saving or
7816restoring the value of point or the mark. `with-current-buffer'
7817works using `save-current-buffer'.
7818
7819*** The new macro `with-temp-file' lets you do some work in a new buffer and
7820write the output to a specified file. Like `progn', it returns the value
7821of the last form.
7822
7823*** The new macro `with-temp-buffer' lets you do some work in a new buffer,
7824which is discarded after use. Like `progn', it returns the value of the
7825last form. If you wish to return the buffer contents, use (buffer-string)
7826as the last form.
7827
7828*** The new function split-string takes a string, splits it at certain
7829characters, and returns a list of the substrings in between the
7830matches.
7831
7832For example, (split-string "foo bar lose" " +") returns ("foo" "bar" "lose").
7833
7834*** The new macro with-output-to-string executes some Lisp expressions
7835with standard-output set up so that all output feeds into a string.
7836Then it returns that string.
7837
7838For example, if the current buffer name is `foo',
7839
7840(with-output-to-string
7841 (princ "The buffer is ")
7842 (princ (buffer-name)))
7843
7844returns "The buffer is foo".
7845
7846** Non-ASCII characters are now supported, if enable-multibyte-characters
7847is non-nil.
7848
7849These characters have character codes above 256. When inserted in the
7850buffer or stored in a string, they are represented as multibyte
7851characters that occupy several buffer positions each.
7852
7853*** When enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil, a single character in
7854a buffer or string can be two or more bytes (as many as four).
7855
7856Buffers and strings are still made up of unibyte elements;
7857character positions and string indices are always measured in bytes.
7858Therefore, moving forward one character can increase the buffer
7859position by 2, 3 or 4. The function forward-char moves by whole
7860characters, and therefore is no longer equivalent to
7861 (lambda (n) (goto-char (+ (point) n))).
7862
7863ASCII characters (codes 0 through 127) are still single bytes, always.
7864Sequences of byte values 128 through 255 are used to represent
7865non-ASCII characters. These sequences are called "multibyte
7866characters".
7867
7868The first byte of a multibyte character is always in the range 128
7869through 159 (octal 0200 through 0237). These values are called
7870"leading codes". The second and subsequent bytes are always in the
7871range 160 through 255 (octal 0240 through 0377). The first byte, the
7872leading code, determines how many bytes long the sequence is.
7873
7874*** The function forward-char moves over characters, and therefore
7875(forward-char 1) may increase point by more than 1 if it moves over a
7876multibyte character. Likewise, delete-char always deletes a
7877character, which may be more than one buffer position.
7878
7879This means that some Lisp programs, which assume that a character is
7880always one buffer position, need to be changed.
7881
7882However, all ASCII characters are always one buffer position.
7883
7884*** The regexp [\200-\377] no longer matches all non-ASCII characters,
7885because when enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil, these characters
7886have codes that are not in the range octal 200 to octal 377. However,
7887the regexp [^\000-\177] does match all non-ASCII characters,
7888guaranteed.
7889
7890*** The function char-boundary-p returns non-nil if position POS is
7891between two characters in the buffer (not in the middle of a
7892character).
7893
7894When the value is non-nil, it says what kind of character follows POS:
7895
7896 0 if POS is at an ASCII character or at the end of range,
7897 1 if POS is before a 2-byte length multi-byte form,
7898 2 if POS is at a head of 3-byte length multi-byte form,
7899 3 if POS is at a head of 4-byte length multi-byte form,
7900 4 if POS is at a head of multi-byte form of a composite character.
7901
7902*** The function char-bytes returns how many bytes the character CHAR uses.
7903
7904*** Strings can contain multibyte characters. The function
7905`length' returns the string length counting bytes, which may be
7906more than the number of characters.
7907
7908You can include a multibyte character in a string constant by writing
7909it literally. You can also represent it with a hex escape,
7910\xNNNNNNN..., using as many digits as necessary. Any character which
7911is not a valid hex digit terminates this construct. If you want to
7912follow it with a character that is a hex digit, write backslash and
7913newline in between; that will terminate the hex escape.
7914
7915*** The function concat-chars takes arguments which are characters
7916and returns a string containing those characters.
7917
7918*** The function sref access a multibyte character in a string.
7919(sref STRING INDX) returns the character in STRING at INDEX. INDEX
7920counts from zero. If INDEX is at a position in the middle of a
7921character, sref signals an error.
7922
7923*** The function chars-in-string returns the number of characters
7924in a string. This is less than the length of the string, if the
7925string contains multibyte characters (the length counts bytes).
7926
7927*** The function chars-in-region returns the number of characters
7928in a region from BEG to END. This is less than (- END BEG) if the
7929region contains multibyte characters (the length counts bytes).
7930
7931*** The function string-to-list converts a string to a list of
7932the characters in it. string-to-vector converts a string
7933to a vector of the characters in it.
7934
7935*** The function store-substring alters part of the contents
7936of a string. You call it as follows:
7937
7938 (store-substring STRING IDX OBJ)
7939
7940This says to alter STRING, by storing OBJ starting at index IDX in
7941STRING. OBJ may be either a character or a (smaller) string.
7942This function really does alter the contents of STRING.
7943Since it is impossible to change the length of an existing string,
7944it is an error if OBJ doesn't fit within STRING's actual length.
7945
7946*** char-width returns the width (in columns) of the character CHAR,
7947if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window.
7948
7949*** string-width returns the width (in columns) of the text in STRING,
7950if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window.
7951
7952*** truncate-string-to-width shortens a string, if necessary,
7953to fit within a certain number of columns. (Of course, it does
7954not alter the string that you give it; it returns a new string
7955which contains all or just part of the existing string.)
7956
7957(truncate-string-to-width STR END-COLUMN &optional START-COLUMN PADDING)
7958
7959This returns the part of STR up to column END-COLUMN.
7960
7961The optional argument START-COLUMN specifies the starting column.
7962If this is non-nil, then the first START-COLUMN columns of the string
7963are not included in the resulting value.
7964
7965The optional argument PADDING, if non-nil, is a padding character to be added
7966at the beginning and end the resulting string, to extend it to exactly
7967WIDTH columns. If PADDING is nil, that means do not pad; then, if STRING
7968is narrower than WIDTH, the value is equal to STRING.
7969
7970If PADDING and START-COLUMN are both non-nil, and if there is no clean
7971place in STRING that corresponds to START-COLUMN (because one
7972character extends across that column), then the padding character
7973PADDING is added one or more times at the beginning of the result
7974string, so that its columns line up as if it really did start at
7975column START-COLUMN.
7976
7977*** When the functions in the list after-change-functions are called,
7978the third argument is the number of bytes in the pre-change text, not
7979necessarily the number of characters. It is, in effect, the
7980difference in buffer position between the beginning and the end of the
7981changed text, before the change.
7982
7983*** The characters Emacs uses are classified in various character
7984sets, each of which has a name which is a symbol. In general there is
7985one character set for each script, not for each language.
7986
7987**** The function charsetp tests whether an object is a character set name.
7988
7989**** The variable charset-list holds a list of character set names.
7990
7991**** char-charset, given a character code, returns the name of the character
7992set that the character belongs to. (The value is a symbol.)
7993
7994**** split-char, given a character code, returns a list containing the
7995name of the character set, followed by one or two byte-values
7996which identify the character within that character set.
7997
7998**** make-char, given a character set name and one or two subsequent
7999byte-values, constructs a character code. This is roughly the
8000opposite of split-char.
8001
8002**** find-charset-region returns a list of the character sets
8003of all the characters between BEG and END.
8004
8005**** find-charset-string returns a list of the character sets
8006of all the characters in a string.
8007
8008*** Here are the Lisp facilities for working with coding systems
8009and specifying coding systems.
8010
8011**** The function coding-system-list returns a list of all coding
8012system names (symbols). With optional argument t, it returns a list
8013of all distinct base coding systems, not including variants.
8014(Variant coding systems are those like latin-1-dos, latin-1-unix
8015and latin-1-mac which specify the end-of-line conversion as well
8016as what to do about code conversion.)
8017
8018**** coding-system-p tests a symbol to see if it is a coding system
8019name. It returns t if so, nil if not.
8020
8021**** file-coding-system-alist specifies which coding systems to use
8022for certain file names. It works like network-coding-system-alist,
8023except that the PATTERN is matched against the file name.
8024
8025Each element has the format (PATTERN . VAL), where PATTERN determines
8026which file names the element applies to. PATTERN should be a regexp
8027to match against a file name.
8028
8029VAL is a coding system, a cons cell containing two coding systems, or
8030a function symbol. If VAL is a coding system, it is used for both
8031decoding what received from the network stream and encoding what sent
8032to the network stream. If VAL is a cons cell containing two coding
8033systems, the car specifies the coding system for decoding, and the cdr
8034specifies the coding system for encoding.
8035
8036If VAL is a function symbol, the function must return a coding system
8037or a cons cell containing two coding systems, which is used as above.
8038
8039**** The variable network-coding-system-alist specifies
8040the coding system to use for network sockets.
8041
8042Each element has the format (PATTERN . VAL), where PATTERN determines
8043which network sockets the element applies to. PATTERN should be
8044either a port number or a regular expression matching some network
8045service names.
8046
8047VAL is a coding system, a cons cell containing two coding systems, or
8048a function symbol. If VAL is a coding system, it is used for both
8049decoding what received from the network stream and encoding what sent
8050to the network stream. If VAL is a cons cell containing two coding
8051systems, the car specifies the coding system for decoding, and the cdr
8052specifies the coding system for encoding.
8053
8054If VAL is a function symbol, the function must return a coding system
8055or a cons cell containing two coding systems, which is used as above.
8056
8057**** process-coding-system-alist specifies which coding systems to use
8058for certain subprocess. It works like network-coding-system-alist,
8059except that the PATTERN is matched against the program name used to
8060start the subprocess.
8061
8062**** The variable default-process-coding-system specifies the coding
8063systems to use for subprocess (and net connection) input and output,
8064when nothing else specifies what to do. The value is a cons cell
8065(OUTPUT-CODING . INPUT-CODING). OUTPUT-CODING applies to output
8066to the subprocess, and INPUT-CODING applies to input from it.
8067
8068**** The variable coding-system-for-write, if non-nil, specifies the
8069coding system to use for writing a file, or for output to a synchronous
8070subprocess.
8071
8072It also applies to any asynchronous subprocess or network connection,
8073but in a different way: the value of coding-system-for-write when you
8074start the subprocess or connection affects that subprocess or
8075connection permanently or until overridden.
8076
8077The variable coding-system-for-write takes precedence over
8078file-coding-system-alist, process-coding-system-alist and
8079network-coding-system-alist, and all other methods of specifying a
8080coding system for output. But most of the time this variable is nil.
8081It exists so that Lisp programs can bind it to a specific coding
8082system for one operation at a time.
8083
8084**** coding-system-for-read applies similarly to input from
8085files, subprocesses or network connections.
8086
8087**** The function process-coding-system tells you what
8088coding systems(s) an existing subprocess is using.
8089The value is a cons cell,
8090 (DECODING-CODING-SYSTEM . ENCODING-CODING-SYSTEM)
8091where DECODING-CODING-SYSTEM is used for decoding output from
8092the subprocess, and ENCODING-CODING-SYSTEM is used for encoding
8093input to the subprocess.
8094
8095**** The function set-process-coding-system can be used to
8096change the coding systems in use for an existing subprocess.
8097
8098** Emacs has a new facility to help users manage the many
8099customization options. To make a Lisp program work with this facility,
8100you need to use the new macros defgroup and defcustom.
8101
8102You use defcustom instead of defvar, for defining a user option
8103variable. The difference is that you specify two additional pieces of
8104information (usually): the "type" which says what values are
8105legitimate, and the "group" which specifies the hierarchy for
8106customization.
8107
8108Thus, instead of writing
8109
8110 (defvar foo-blurgoze nil
8111 "*Non-nil means that foo will act very blurgozely.")
8112
8113you would now write this:
8114
8115 (defcustom foo-blurgoze nil
8116 "*Non-nil means that foo will act very blurgozely."
8117 :type 'boolean
8118 :group foo)
8119
8120The type `boolean' means that this variable has only
8121two meaningful states: nil and non-nil. Other type values
8122describe other possibilities; see the manual for Custom
8123for a description of them.
8124
8125The "group" argument is used to specify a group which the option
8126should belong to. You define a new group like this:
8127
8128 (defgroup ispell nil
8129 "Spell checking using Ispell."
8130 :group 'processes)
8131
8132The "group" argument in defgroup specifies the parent group. The root
8133group is called `emacs'; it should not contain any variables itself,
8134but only other groups. The immediate subgroups of `emacs' correspond
8135to the keywords used by C-h p. Under these subgroups come
8136second-level subgroups that belong to individual packages.
8137
8138Each Emacs package should have its own set of groups. A simple
8139package should have just one group; a more complex package should
8140have a hierarchy of its own groups. The sole or root group of a
8141package should be a subgroup of one or more of the "keyword"
8142first-level subgroups.
8143
8144** New `widget' library for inserting UI components in buffers.
8145
8146This library, used by the new custom library, is documented in a
8147separate manual that accompanies Emacs.
8148
8149** easy-mmode
8150
8151The easy-mmode package provides macros and functions that make
8152developing minor modes easier. Roughly, the programmer has to code
8153only the functionality of the minor mode. All the rest--toggles,
8154predicate, and documentation--can be done in one call to the macro
8155`easy-mmode-define-minor-mode' (see the documentation). See also
8156`easy-mmode-define-keymap'.
8157
8158** Text property changes
8159
8160*** The `intangible' property now works on overlays as well as on a
8161text property.
8162
8163*** The new functions next-char-property-change and
8164previous-char-property-change scan through the buffer looking for a
8165place where either a text property or an overlay might change. The
8166functions take two arguments, POSITION and LIMIT. POSITION is the
8167starting position for the scan. LIMIT says where to stop the scan.
8168
8169If no property change is found before LIMIT, the value is LIMIT. If
8170LIMIT is nil, scan goes to the beginning or end of the accessible part
8171of the buffer. If no property change is found, the value is the
8172position of the beginning or end of the buffer.
8173
8174*** In the `local-map' text property or overlay property, the property
8175value can now be a symbol whose function definition is a keymap. This
8176is an alternative to using the keymap itself.
8177
8178** Changes in invisibility features
8179
8180*** Isearch can now temporarily show parts of the buffer which are
8181hidden by an overlay with a invisible property, when the search match
8182is inside that portion of the buffer. To enable this the overlay
8183should have a isearch-open-invisible property which is a function that
8184would be called having the overlay as an argument, the function should
8185make the overlay visible.
8186
8187During incremental search the overlays are shown by modifying the
8188invisible and intangible properties, if beside this more actions are
8189needed the overlay should have a isearch-open-invisible-temporary
8190which is a function. The function is called with 2 arguments: one is
8191the overlay and the second is nil when it should show the overlay and
8192t when it should hide it.
8193
8194*** add-to-invisibility-spec, remove-from-invisibility-spec
8195
8196Modes that use overlays to hide portions of a buffer should set the
8197invisible property of the overlay to the mode's name (or another symbol)
8198and modify the `buffer-invisibility-spec' to include that symbol.
8199Use `add-to-invisibility-spec' and `remove-from-invisibility-spec' to
8200manipulate the `buffer-invisibility-spec'.
8201Here is an example of how to do this:
8202
8203 ;; If we want to display an ellipsis:
8204 (add-to-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t))
8205 ;; If you don't want ellipsis:
8206 (add-to-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol)
8207
8208 ...
8209 (overlay-put (make-overlay beginning end) 'invisible 'my-symbol)
8210
8211 ...
8212 ;; When done with the overlays:
8213 (remove-from-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t))
8214 ;; Or respectively:
8215 (remove-from-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol)
8216
8217** Changes in syntax parsing.
8218
8219*** The syntax-directed buffer-scan functions (such as
8220`parse-partial-sexp', `forward-word' and similar functions) can now
8221obey syntax information specified by text properties, if the variable
8222`parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is non-nil.
8223
8224If the value of `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is nil, the behavior
8225is as before: the syntax-table of the current buffer is always
8226used to determine the syntax of the character at the position.
8227
8228When `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is non-nil, the syntax of a
8229character in the buffer is calculated thus:
8230
8231 a) if the `syntax-table' text-property of that character
8232 is a cons, this cons becomes the syntax-type;
8233
8234 Valid values of `syntax-table' text-property are: nil, a valid
8235 syntax-table, and a valid syntax-table element, i.e.,
8236 a cons cell of the form (SYNTAX-CODE . MATCHING-CHAR).
8237
8238 b) if the character's `syntax-table' text-property
8239 is a syntax table, this syntax table is used
8240 (instead of the syntax-table of the current buffer) to
8241 determine the syntax type of the character.
8242
8243 c) otherwise the syntax-type is determined by the syntax-table
8244 of the current buffer.
8245
8246*** The meaning of \s in regular expressions is also affected by the
8247value of `parse-sexp-lookup-properties'. The details are the same as
8248for the syntax-directed buffer-scan functions.
8249
8250*** There are two new syntax-codes, `!' and `|' (numeric values 14
8251and 15). A character with a code `!' starts a comment which is ended
8252only by another character with the same code (unless quoted). A
8253character with a code `|' starts a string which is ended only by
8254another character with the same code (unless quoted).
8255
8256These codes are mainly meant for use as values of the `syntax-table'
8257text property.
8258
8259*** The function `parse-partial-sexp' has new semantics for the sixth
8260arg COMMENTSTOP. If it is `syntax-table', parse stops after the start
8261of a comment or a string, or after end of a comment or a string.
8262
8263*** The state-list which the return value from `parse-partial-sexp'
8264(and can also be used as an argument) now has an optional ninth
8265element: the character address of the start of last comment or string;
8266nil if none. The fourth and eighth elements have special values if the
8267string/comment is started by a "!" or "|" syntax-code.
8268
8269*** Since new features of `parse-partial-sexp' allow a complete
8270syntactic parsing, `font-lock' no longer supports
8271`font-lock-comment-start-regexp'.
8272
8273** Changes in face features
8274
8275*** The face functions are now unconditionally defined in Emacs, even
8276if it does not support displaying on a device that supports faces.
8277
8278*** The function face-documentation returns the documentation string
8279of a face (or nil if it doesn't have one).
8280
8281*** The function face-bold-p returns t if a face should be bold.
8282set-face-bold-p sets that flag.
8283
8284*** The function face-italic-p returns t if a face should be italic.
8285set-face-italic-p sets that flag.
8286
8287*** You can now specify foreground and background colors for text
8288by adding elements of the form (foreground-color . COLOR-NAME)
8289and (background-color . COLOR-NAME) to the list of faces in
8290the `face' property (either the character's text property or an
8291overlay property).
8292
8293This means that you no longer need to create named faces to use
8294arbitrary colors in a Lisp package.
8295
8296** Changes in file-handling functions
8297
8298*** File-access primitive functions no longer discard an extra redundant
8299directory name from the beginning of the file name. In other words,
8300they no longer do anything special with // or /~. That conversion
8301is now done only in substitute-in-file-name.
8302
8303This makes it possible for a Lisp program to open a file whose name
8304begins with ~.
8305
8306*** If copy-file is unable to set the date of the output file,
8307it now signals an error with the condition file-date-error.
8308
8309*** The inode number returned by file-attributes may be an integer (if
8310the number fits in a Lisp integer) or a list of integers.
8311
8312*** insert-file-contents can now read from a special file,
8313as long as the arguments VISIT and REPLACE are nil.
8314
8315*** The RAWFILE arg to find-file-noselect, if non-nil, now suppresses
8316character code conversion as well as other things.
8317
8318Meanwhile, this feature does work with remote file names
8319(formerly it did not).
8320
8321*** Lisp packages which create temporary files should use the TMPDIR
8322environment variable to decide which directory to put them in.
8323
8324*** interpreter-mode-alist elements now specify regexps
8325instead of constant strings.
8326
8327*** expand-file-name no longer treats `//' or `/~' specially. It used
8328to delete all the text of a file name up through the first slash of
8329any `//' or `/~' sequence. Now it passes them straight through.
8330
8331substitute-in-file-name continues to treat those sequences specially,
8332in the same way as before.
8333
8334*** The variable `format-alist' is more general now.
8335The FROM-FN and TO-FN in a format definition can now be strings
8336which specify shell commands to use as filters to perform conversion.
8337
8338*** The new function access-file tries to open a file, and signals an
8339error if that fails. If the open succeeds, access-file does nothing
8340else, and returns nil.
8341
8342*** The function insert-directory now signals an error if the specified
8343directory cannot be listed.
8344
8345** Changes in minibuffer input
8346
8347*** The functions read-buffer, read-variable, read-command, read-string
8348read-file-name, read-from-minibuffer and completing-read now take an
8349additional argument which specifies the default value. If this
8350argument is non-nil, it should be a string; that string is used in two
8351ways:
8352
8353 It is returned if the user enters empty input.
8354 It is available through the history command M-n.
8355
8356*** The functions read-string, read-from-minibuffer,
8357read-no-blanks-input and completing-read now take an additional
8358argument INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD. If this is non-nil, then the
8359minibuffer inherits the current input method and the setting of
8360enable-multibyte-characters from the previously current buffer.
8361
8362In an interactive spec, you can use M instead of s to read an
8363argument in this way.
8364
8365*** All minibuffer input functions discard text properties
8366from the text you enter in the minibuffer, unless the variable
8367minibuffer-allow-text-properties is non-nil.
8368
8369** Echo area features
8370
8371*** Clearing the echo area now runs the normal hook
8372echo-area-clear-hook. Note that the echo area can be used while the
8373minibuffer is active; in that case, the minibuffer is still active
8374after the echo area is cleared.
8375
8376*** The function current-message returns the message currently displayed
8377in the echo area, or nil if there is none.
8378
8379** Keyboard input features
8380
8381*** tty-erase-char is a new variable that reports which character was
8382set up as the terminal's erase character when time Emacs was started.
8383
8384*** num-nonmacro-input-events is the total number of input events
8385received so far from the terminal. It does not count those generated
8386by keyboard macros.
8387
8388** Frame-related changes
8389
8390*** make-frame runs the normal hook before-make-frame-hook just before
8391creating a frame, and just after creating a frame it runs the abnormal
8392hook after-make-frame-functions with the new frame as arg.
8393
8394*** The new hook window-configuration-change-hook is now run every time
8395the window configuration has changed. The frame whose configuration
8396has changed is the selected frame when the hook is run.
8397
8398*** Each frame now independently records the order for recently
8399selected buffers, in its buffer-list frame parameter, so that the
8400value of other-buffer is now based on the buffers recently displayed
8401in the selected frame.
8402
8403*** The value of the frame parameter vertical-scroll-bars
8404is now `left', `right' or nil. A non-nil value specifies
8405which side of the window to put the scroll bars on.
8406
8407** X Windows features
8408
8409*** You can examine X resources for other applications by binding
8410x-resource-class around a call to x-get-resource. The usual value of
8411x-resource-class is "Emacs", which is the correct value for Emacs.
8412
8413*** In menus, checkboxes and radio buttons now actually work.
8414The menu displays the current status of the box or button.
8415
8416*** The function x-list-fonts now takes an optional fourth argument
8417MAXIMUM which sets a limit on how many matching fonts to return.
8418A smaller value of MAXIMUM makes the function faster.
8419
8420If the only question is whether *any* font matches the pattern,
8421it is good to supply 1 for this argument.
8422
8423** Subprocess features
8424
8425*** A reminder: it is no longer necessary for subprocess filter
8426functions and sentinels to do save-match-data, because Emacs does this
8427automatically.
8428
8429*** The new function shell-command-to-string executes a shell command
8430and returns the output from the command as a string.
8431
8432*** The new function process-contact returns t for a child process,
8433and (HOSTNAME SERVICE) for a net connection.
8434
8435** An error in running pre-command-hook or post-command-hook
8436does clear the variable to nil. The documentation was wrong before.
8437
8438** In define-key-after, if AFTER is t, the new binding now always goes
8439at the end of the keymap. If the keymap is a menu, this means it
8440goes after the other menu items.
8441
8442** If you have a program that makes several changes in the same area
8443of the buffer, you can use the macro combine-after-change-calls
8444around that Lisp code to make it faster when after-change hooks
8445are in use.
8446
8447The macro arranges to call the after-change functions just once for a
8448series of several changes--if that seems safe.
8449
8450Don't alter the variables after-change-functions and
8451after-change-function within the body of a combine-after-change-calls
8452form.
8453
8454** If you define an abbrev (with define-abbrev) whose EXPANSION
8455is not a string, then the abbrev does not expand in the usual sense,
8456but its hook is still run.
8457
8458** Normally, the Lisp debugger is not used (even if you have enabled it)
8459for errors that are handled by condition-case.
8460
8461If you set debug-on-signal to a non-nil value, then the debugger is called
8462regardless of whether there is a handler for the condition. This is
8463useful for debugging problems that happen inside of a condition-case.
8464
8465This mode of operation seems to be unreliable in other ways. Errors that
8466are normal and ought to be handled, perhaps in timers or process
8467filters, will instead invoke the debugger. So don't say you weren't
8468warned.
8469
8470** The new variable ring-bell-function lets you specify your own
8471way for Emacs to "ring the bell".
8472
8473** If run-at-time's TIME argument is t, the action is repeated at
8474integral multiples of REPEAT from the epoch; this is useful for
8475functions like display-time.
8476
8477** You can use the function locate-library to find the precise file
8478name of a Lisp library. This isn't new, but wasn't documented before.
8479
8480** Commands for entering view mode have new optional arguments that
8481can be used from Lisp. Low-level entrance to and exit from view mode
8482is done by functions view-mode-enter and view-mode-exit.
8483
8484** batch-byte-compile-file now makes Emacs return a nonzero status code
8485if there is an error in compilation.
8486
8487** pop-to-buffer, switch-to-buffer-other-window and
8488switch-to-buffer-other-frame now accept an additional optional
8489argument NORECORD, much like switch-to-buffer. If it is non-nil,
8490they don't put the buffer at the front of the buffer list.
8491
8492** If your .emacs file leaves the *scratch* buffer non-empty,
8493Emacs does not display the startup message, so as to avoid changing
8494the *scratch* buffer.
8495
8496** The new function regexp-opt returns an efficient regexp to match a string.
8497The arguments are STRINGS and (optionally) PAREN. This function can be used
8498where regexp matching or searching is intensively used and speed is important,
8499e.g., in Font Lock mode.
8500
8501** The variable buffer-display-count is local to each buffer,
8502and is incremented each time the buffer is displayed in a window.
8503It starts at 0 when the buffer is created.
8504
8505** The new function compose-mail starts composing a mail message
8506using the user's chosen mail composition agent (specified with the
8507variable mail-user-agent). It has variants compose-mail-other-window
8508and compose-mail-other-frame.
8509
8510** The `user-full-name' function now takes an optional parameter which
8511can either be a number (the UID) or a string (the login name). The
8512full name of the specified user will be returned.
8513
8514** Lisp packages that load files of customizations, or any other sort
8515of user profile, should obey the variable init-file-user in deciding
8516where to find it. They should load the profile of the user name found
8517in that variable. If init-file-user is nil, meaning that the -q
8518option was used, then Lisp packages should not load the customization
8519files at all.
8520
8521** format-time-string now allows you to specify the field width
8522and type of padding. This works as in printf: you write the field
8523width as digits in the middle of a %-construct. If you start
8524the field width with 0, it means to pad with zeros.
8525
8526For example, %S normally specifies the number of seconds since the
8527minute; %03S means to pad this with zeros to 3 positions, %_3S to pad
8528with spaces to 3 positions. Plain %3S pads with zeros, because that
8529is how %S normally pads to two positions.
8530
8531** thing-at-point now supports a new kind of "thing": url.
8532
8533** imenu.el changes.
8534
8535You can now specify a function to be run when selecting an
8536item from menu created by imenu.
8537
8538An example of using this feature: if we define imenu items for the
8539#include directives in a C file, we can open the included file when we
8540select one of those items.
8541\f
8542* Emacs 19.34 is a bug-fix release with no user-visible changes.
8543\f
8544* Changes in Emacs 19.33.
8545
8546** Bibtex mode no longer turns on Auto Fill automatically. (No major
8547mode should do that--it is the user's choice.)
8548
8549** The variable normal-auto-fill-function specifies the function to
8550use for auto-fill-function, if and when Auto Fill is turned on.
8551Major modes can set this locally to alter how Auto Fill works.
8552\f
8553* Editing Changes in Emacs 19.32
8554
8555** C-x f with no argument now signals an error.
8556To set the fill column at the current column, use C-u C-x f.
8557
8558** Expanding dynamic abbrevs with M-/ is now smarter about case
8559conversion. If you type the abbreviation with mixed case, and it
8560matches the beginning of the expansion including case, then the
8561expansion is copied verbatim. Using SPC M-/ to copy an additional
8562word always copies it verbatim except when the previous copied word is
8563all caps.
8564
8565** On a non-windowing terminal, which can display only one Emacs frame
8566at a time, creating a new frame with C-x 5 2 also selects that frame.
8567
8568When using a display that can show multiple frames at once, C-x 5 2
8569does make the frame visible, but does not select it. This is the same
8570as in previous Emacs versions.
8571
8572** You can use C-x 5 2 to create multiple frames on MSDOS, just as on a
8573non-X terminal on Unix. Of course, only one frame is visible at any
8574time, since your terminal doesn't have the ability to display multiple
8575frames.
8576
8577** On Windows, set win32-pass-alt-to-system to a non-nil value
8578if you would like tapping the Alt key to invoke the Windows menu.
8579This feature is not enabled by default; since the Alt key is also the
8580Meta key, it is too easy and painful to activate this feature by
8581accident.
8582
8583** The command apply-macro-to-region-lines repeats the last defined
8584keyboard macro once for each complete line within the current region.
8585It does this line by line, by moving point to the beginning of that
8586line and then executing the macro.
8587
8588This command is not new, but was never documented before.
8589
8590** You can now use Mouse-1 to place the region around a string constant
8591(something surrounded by doublequote characters or other delimiter
8592characters of like syntax) by double-clicking on one of the delimiting
8593characters.
8594
8595** Font Lock mode
8596
8597*** Font Lock support modes
8598
8599Font Lock can be configured to use Fast Lock mode and Lazy Lock mode (see
8600below) in a flexible way. Rather than adding the appropriate function to the
8601hook font-lock-mode-hook, you can use the new variable font-lock-support-mode
8602to control which modes have Fast Lock mode or Lazy Lock mode turned on when
8603Font Lock mode is enabled.
8604
8605For example, to use Fast Lock mode when Font Lock mode is turned on, put:
8606
8607 (setq font-lock-support-mode 'fast-lock-mode)
8608
8609in your ~/.emacs.
8610
8611*** lazy-lock
8612
8613The lazy-lock package speeds up Font Lock mode by making fontification occur
8614only when necessary, such as when a previously unfontified part of the buffer
8615becomes visible in a window. When you create a buffer with Font Lock mode and
8616Lazy Lock mode turned on, the buffer is not fontified. When certain events
8617occur (such as scrolling), Lazy Lock makes sure that the visible parts of the
8618buffer are fontified. Lazy Lock also defers on-the-fly fontification until
8619Emacs has been idle for a given amount of time.
8620
8621To use this package, put in your ~/.emacs:
8622
8623 (setq font-lock-support-mode 'lazy-lock-mode)
8624
8625To control the package behaviour, see the documentation for `lazy-lock-mode'.
8626
8627** Changes in BibTeX mode.
8628
8629*** For all entries allow spaces and tabs between opening brace or
8630paren and key.
8631
8632*** Non-escaped double-quoted characters (as in `Sch"of') are now
8633supported.
8634
8635** Gnus changes.
8636
8637Gnus, the Emacs news reader, has undergone further rewriting. Many new
8638commands and variables have been added. There should be no
8639significant incompatibilities between this Gnus version and the
8640previously released version, except in the message composition area.
8641
8642Below is a list of the more user-visible changes. Coding changes
8643between Gnus 5.1 and 5.2 are more extensive.
8644
8645*** A new message composition mode is used. All old customization
8646variables for mail-mode, rnews-reply-mode and gnus-msg are now
8647obsolete.
8648
8649*** Gnus is now able to generate "sparse" threads -- threads where
8650missing articles are represented by empty nodes.
8651
8652 (setq gnus-build-sparse-threads 'some)
8653
8654*** Outgoing articles are stored on a special archive server.
8655
8656 To disable this: (setq gnus-message-archive-group nil)
8657
8658*** Partial thread regeneration now happens when articles are
8659referred.
8660
8661*** Gnus can make use of GroupLens predictions:
8662
8663 (setq gnus-use-grouplens t)
8664
8665*** A trn-line tree buffer can be displayed.
8666
8667 (setq gnus-use-trees t)
8668
8669*** An nn-like pick-and-read minor mode is available for the summary
8670buffers.
8671
8672 (add-hook 'gnus-summary-mode-hook 'gnus-pick-mode)
8673
8674*** In binary groups you can use a special binary minor mode:
8675
8676 `M-x gnus-binary-mode'
8677
8678*** Groups can be grouped in a folding topic hierarchy.
8679
8680 (add-hook 'gnus-group-mode-hook 'gnus-topic-mode)
8681
8682*** Gnus can re-send and bounce mail.
8683
8684 Use the `S D r' and `S D b'.
8685
8686*** Groups can now have a score, and bubbling based on entry frequency
8687is possible.
8688
8689 (add-hook 'gnus-summary-exit-hook 'gnus-summary-bubble-group)
8690
8691*** Groups can be process-marked, and commands can be performed on
8692groups of groups.
8693
8694*** Caching is possible in virtual groups.
8695
8696*** nndoc now understands all kinds of digests, mail boxes, rnews news
8697batches, ClariNet briefs collections, and just about everything else.
8698
8699*** Gnus has a new backend (nnsoup) to create/read SOUP packets.
8700
8701*** The Gnus cache is much faster.
8702
8703*** Groups can be sorted according to many criteria.
8704
8705 For instance: (setq gnus-group-sort-function 'gnus-group-sort-by-rank)
8706
8707*** New group parameters have been introduced to set list-address and
8708expiration times.
8709
8710*** All formatting specs allow specifying faces to be used.
8711
8712*** There are several more commands for setting/removing/acting on
8713process marked articles on the `M P' submap.
8714
8715*** The summary buffer can be limited to show parts of the available
8716articles based on a wide range of criteria. These commands have been
8717bound to keys on the `/' submap.
8718
8719*** Articles can be made persistent -- as an alternative to saving
8720articles with the `*' command.
8721
8722*** All functions for hiding article elements are now toggles.
8723
8724*** Article headers can be buttonized.
8725
8726 (add-hook 'gnus-article-display-hook 'gnus-article-add-buttons-to-head)
8727
8728*** All mail backends support fetching articles by Message-ID.
8729
8730*** Duplicate mail can now be treated properly. See the
8731`nnmail-treat-duplicates' variable.
8732
8733*** All summary mode commands are available directly from the article
8734buffer.
8735
8736*** Frames can be part of `gnus-buffer-configuration'.
8737
8738*** Mail can be re-scanned by a daemonic process.
8739
8740*** Gnus can make use of NoCeM files to filter spam.
8741
8742 (setq gnus-use-nocem t)
8743
8744*** Groups can be made permanently visible.
8745
8746 (setq gnus-permanently-visible-groups "^nnml:")
8747
8748*** Many new hooks have been introduced to make customizing easier.
8749
8750*** Gnus respects the Mail-Copies-To header.
8751
8752*** Threads can be gathered by looking at the References header.
8753
8754 (setq gnus-summary-thread-gathering-function
8755 'gnus-gather-threads-by-references)
8756
8757*** Read articles can be stored in a special backlog buffer to avoid
8758refetching.
8759
8760 (setq gnus-keep-backlog 50)
8761
8762*** A clean copy of the current article is always stored in a separate
8763buffer to allow easier treatment.
8764
8765*** Gnus can suggest where to save articles. See `gnus-split-methods'.
8766
8767*** Gnus doesn't have to do as much prompting when saving.
8768
8769 (setq gnus-prompt-before-saving t)
8770
8771*** gnus-uu can view decoded files asynchronously while fetching
8772articles.
8773
8774 (setq gnus-uu-grabbed-file-functions 'gnus-uu-grab-view)
8775
8776*** Filling in the article buffer now works properly on cited text.
8777
8778*** Hiding cited text adds buttons to toggle hiding, and how much
8779cited text to hide is now customizable.
8780
8781 (setq gnus-cited-lines-visible 2)
8782
8783*** Boring headers can be hidden.
8784
8785 (add-hook 'gnus-article-display-hook 'gnus-article-hide-boring-headers)
8786
8787*** Default scoring values can now be set from the menu bar.
8788
8789*** Further syntax checking of outgoing articles have been added.
8790
8791The Gnus manual has been expanded. It explains all these new features
8792in greater detail.
8793\f
8794* Lisp Changes in Emacs 19.32
8795
8796** The function set-visited-file-name now accepts an optional
8797second argument NO-QUERY. If it is non-nil, then the user is not
8798asked for confirmation in the case where the specified file already
8799exists.
8800
8801** The variable print-length applies to printing vectors and bitvectors,
8802as well as lists.
8803
8804** The new function keymap-parent returns the parent keymap
8805of a given keymap.
8806
8807** The new function set-keymap-parent specifies a new parent for a
8808given keymap. The arguments are KEYMAP and PARENT. PARENT must be a
8809keymap or nil.
8810
8811** Sometimes menu keymaps use a command name, a symbol, which is really
8812an automatically generated alias for some other command, the "real"
8813name. In such a case, you should give that alias symbol a non-nil
8814menu-alias property. That property tells the menu system to look for
8815equivalent keys for the real name instead of equivalent keys for the
8816alias.
8817\f
8818* Editing Changes in Emacs 19.31
8819
8820** Freedom of the press restricted in the United States.
8821
8822Emacs has been censored in accord with the Communications Decency Act.
8823This includes removing some features of the doctor program. That law
8824was described by its supporters as a ban on pornography, but it bans
8825far more than that. The Emacs distribution has never contained any
8826pornography, but parts of it were nonetheless prohibited.
8827
8828For information on US government censorship of the Internet, and what
8829you can do to bring back freedom of the press, see the web site
8830`http://www.vtw.org/'.
8831
8832** A note about C mode indentation customization.
8833
8834The old (Emacs 19.29) ways of specifying a C indentation style
8835do not normally work in the new implementation of C mode.
8836It has its own methods of customizing indentation, which are
8837much more powerful than the old C mode. See the Editing Programs
8838chapter of the manual for details.
8839
8840However, you can load the library cc-compat to make the old
8841customization variables take effect.
8842
8843** Marking with the mouse.
8844
8845When you mark a region with the mouse, the region now remains
8846highlighted until the next input event, regardless of whether you are
8847using M-x transient-mark-mode.
8848
8849** Improved Windows NT/95 support.
8850
8851*** Emacs now supports scroll bars on Windows NT and Windows 95.
8852
8853*** Emacs now supports subprocesses on Windows 95. (Subprocesses used
8854to work on NT only and not on 95.)
8855
8856*** There are difficulties with subprocesses, though, due to problems
8857in Windows, beyond the control of Emacs. They work fine as long as
8858you run Windows applications. The problems arise when you run a DOS
8859application in a subprocesses. Since current shells run as DOS
8860applications, these problems are significant.
8861
8862If you run a DOS application in a subprocess, then the application is
8863likely to busy-wait, which means that your machine will be 100% busy.
8864However, if you don't mind the temporary heavy load, the subprocess
8865will work OK as long as you tell it to terminate before you start any
8866other DOS application as a subprocess.
8867
8868Emacs is unable to terminate or interrupt a DOS subprocess.
8869You have to do this by providing input directly to the subprocess.
8870
8871If you run two DOS applications at the same time in two separate
8872subprocesses, even if one of them is asynchronous, you will probably
8873have to reboot your machine--until then, it will remain 100% busy.
8874Windows simply does not cope when one Windows process tries to run two
8875separate DOS subprocesses. Typing CTL-ALT-DEL and then choosing
8876Shutdown seems to work although it may take a few minutes.
8877
8878** M-x resize-minibuffer-mode.
8879
8880This command, not previously mentioned in NEWS, toggles a mode in
8881which the minibuffer window expands to show as many lines as the
8882minibuffer contains.
8883
8884** `title' frame parameter and resource.
8885
8886The `title' X resource now specifies just the frame title, nothing else.
8887It does not affect the name used for looking up other X resources.
8888It works by setting the new `title' frame parameter, which likewise
8889affects just the displayed title of the frame.
8890
8891The `name' parameter continues to do what it used to do:
8892it specifies the frame name for looking up X resources,
8893and also serves as the default for the displayed title
8894when the `title' parameter is unspecified or nil.
8895
8896** Emacs now uses the X toolkit by default, if you have a new
8897enough version of X installed (X11R5 or newer).
8898
8899** When you compile Emacs with the Motif widget set, Motif handles the
8900F10 key by activating the menu bar. To avoid confusion, the usual
8901Emacs binding of F10 is replaced with a no-op when using Motif.
8902
8903If you want to be able to use F10 in Emacs, you can rebind the Motif
8904menubar to some other key which you don't use. To do so, add
8905something like this to your X resources file. This example rebinds
8906the Motif menu bar activation key to S-F12:
8907
8908 Emacs*defaultVirtualBindings: osfMenuBar : Shift<Key>F12
8909
8910** In overwrite mode, DEL now inserts spaces in most cases
8911to replace the characters it "deletes".
8912
8913** The Rmail summary now shows the number of lines in each message.
8914
8915** Rmail has a new command M-x unforward-rmail-message, which extracts
8916a forwarded message from the message that forwarded it. To use it,
8917select a message which contains a forwarded message and then type the command.
8918It inserts the forwarded message as a separate Rmail message
8919immediately after the selected one.
8920
8921This command also undoes the textual modifications that are standardly
8922made, as part of forwarding, by Rmail and other mail reader programs.
8923
8924** Turning off saving of .saves-... files in your home directory.
8925
8926Each Emacs session writes a file named .saves-... in your home
8927directory to record which files M-x recover-session should recover.
8928If you exit Emacs normally with C-x C-c, it deletes that file. If
8929Emacs or the operating system crashes, the file remains for M-x
8930recover-session.
8931
8932You can turn off the writing of these files by setting
8933auto-save-list-file-name to nil. If you do this, M-x recover-session
8934will not work.
8935
8936Some previous Emacs versions failed to delete these files even on
8937normal exit. This is fixed now. If you are thinking of turning off
8938this feature because of past experiences with versions that had this
8939bug, it would make sense to check whether you still want to do so
8940now that the bug is fixed.
8941
8942** Changes to Version Control (VC)
8943
8944There is a new variable, vc-follow-symlinks. It indicates what to do
8945when you visit a link to a file that is under version control.
8946Editing the file through the link bypasses the version control system,
8947which is dangerous and probably not what you want.
8948
8949If this variable is t, VC follows the link and visits the real file,
8950telling you about it in the echo area. If it is `ask' (the default),
8951VC asks for confirmation whether it should follow the link. If nil,
8952the link is visited and a warning displayed.
8953
8954** iso-acc.el now lets you specify a choice of language.
8955Languages include "latin-1" (the default) and "latin-2" (which
8956is designed for entering ISO Latin-2 characters).
8957
8958There are also choices for specific human languages such as French and
8959Portuguese. These are subsets of Latin-1, which differ in that they
8960enable only the accent characters needed for particular language.
8961The other accent characters, not needed for the chosen language,
8962remain normal.
8963
8964** Posting articles and sending mail now has M-TAB completion on various
8965header fields (Newsgroups, To, CC, ...).
8966
8967Completion in the Newsgroups header depends on the list of groups
8968known to your news reader. Completion in the Followup-To header
8969offers those groups which are in the Newsgroups header, since
8970Followup-To usually just holds one of those.
8971
8972Completion in fields that hold mail addresses works based on the list
8973of local users plus your aliases. Additionally, if your site provides
8974a mail directory or a specific host to use for any unrecognized user
8975name, you can arrange to query that host for completion also. (See the
8976documentation of variables `mail-directory-process' and
8977`mail-directory-stream'.)
8978
8979** A greatly extended sgml-mode offers new features such as (to be configured)
8980skeletons with completing read for tags and attributes, typing named
8981characters including optionally all 8bit characters, making tags invisible
8982with optional alternate display text, skipping and deleting tag(pair)s.
8983
8984Note: since Emacs' syntax feature cannot limit the special meaning of ', " and
8985- to inside <>, for some texts the result, especially of font locking, may be
8986wrong (see `sgml-specials' if you get wrong results).
8987
8988The derived html-mode configures this with tags and attributes more or
8989less HTML3ish. It also offers optional quick keys like C-c 1 for
8990headline or C-c u for unordered list (see `html-quick-keys'). Edit /
8991Text Properties / Face or M-g combinations create tags as applicable.
8992Outline minor mode is supported and level 1 font-locking tries to
8993fontify tag contents (which only works when they fit on one line, due
8994to a limitation in font-lock).
8995
8996External viewing via browse-url can occur automatically upon saving.
8997
8998** M-x imenu-add-to-menubar now adds to the menu bar for the current
8999buffer only. If you want to put an Imenu item in the menu bar for all
9000buffers that use a particular major mode, use the mode hook, as in
9001this example:
9002
9003 (add-hook 'emacs-lisp-mode-hook
9004 '(lambda () (imenu-add-to-menubar "Index")))
9005
9006** Changes in BibTeX mode.
9007
9008*** Field names may now contain digits, hyphens, and underscores.
9009
9010*** Font Lock mode is now supported.
9011
9012*** bibtex-make-optional-field is no longer interactive.
9013
9014*** If bibtex-maintain-sorted-entries is non-nil, inserting new
9015entries is now done with a faster algorithm. However, inserting
9016will fail in this case if the buffer contains invalid entries or
9017isn't in sorted order, so you should finish each entry with C-c C-c
9018(bibtex-close-entry) after you have inserted or modified it.
9019The default value of bibtex-maintain-sorted-entries is nil.
9020
9021*** Function `show-all' is no longer bound to a key, since C-u C-c C-q
9022does the same job.
9023
9024*** Entries with quotes inside quote-delimited fields (as `author =
9025"Stefan Sch{\"o}f"') are now supported.
9026
9027*** Case in field names doesn't matter anymore when searching for help
9028text.
9029
9030** Font Lock mode
9031
9032*** Global Font Lock mode
9033
9034Font Lock mode can be turned on globally, in buffers that support it, by the
9035new command global-font-lock-mode. You can use the new variable
9036font-lock-global-modes to control which modes have Font Lock mode automagically
9037turned on. By default, this variable is set so that Font Lock mode is turned
9038on globally where the buffer mode supports it.
9039
9040For example, to automagically turn on Font Lock mode where supported, put:
9041
9042 (global-font-lock-mode t)
9043
9044in your ~/.emacs.
9045
9046*** Local Refontification
9047
9048In Font Lock mode, editing a line automatically refontifies that line only.
9049However, if your change alters the syntactic context for following lines,
9050those lines remain incorrectly fontified. To refontify them, use the new
9051command M-g M-g (font-lock-fontify-block).
9052
9053In certain major modes, M-g M-g refontifies the entire current function.
9054(The variable font-lock-mark-block-function controls how to find the
9055current function.) In other major modes, M-g M-g refontifies 16 lines
9056above and below point.
9057
9058With a prefix argument N, M-g M-g refontifies N lines above and below point.
9059
9060** Follow mode
9061
9062Follow mode is a new minor mode combining windows showing the same
9063buffer into one tall "virtual window". The windows are typically two
9064side-by-side windows. Follow mode makes them scroll together as if
9065they were a unit. To use it, go to a frame with just one window,
9066split it into two side-by-side windows using C-x 3, and then type M-x
9067follow-mode.
9068
9069M-x follow-mode turns off Follow mode if it is already enabled.
9070
9071To display two side-by-side windows and activate Follow mode, use the
9072command M-x follow-delete-other-windows-and-split.
9073
9074** hide-show changes.
9075
9076The hooks hs-hide-hooks and hs-show-hooks have been renamed
9077to hs-hide-hook and hs-show-hook, to follow the convention for
9078normal hooks.
9079
9080** Simula mode now has a menu containing the most important commands.
9081The new command simula-indent-exp is bound to C-M-q.
9082
9083** etags can now handle programs written in Erlang. Files are
9084recognised by the extensions .erl and .hrl. The tagged lines are
9085those that begin a function, record, or macro.
9086
9087** MSDOS Changes
9088
9089*** It is now possible to compile Emacs with the version 2 of DJGPP.
9090Compilation with DJGPP version 1 also still works.
9091
9092*** The documentation of DOS-specific aspects of Emacs was rewritten
9093and expanded; see the ``MS-DOS'' node in the on-line docs.
9094
9095*** Emacs now uses ~ for backup file names, not .bak.
9096
9097*** You can simulate mouse-3 on two-button mice by simultaneously
9098pressing both mouse buttons.
9099
9100*** A number of packages and commands which previously failed or had
9101restricted functionality on MS-DOS, now work. The most important ones
9102are:
9103
9104**** Printing (both with `M-x lpr-buffer' and with `ps-print' package)
9105now works.
9106
9107**** `Ediff' works (in a single-frame mode).
9108
9109**** `M-x display-time' can be used on MS-DOS (due to the new
9110implementation of Emacs timers, see below).
9111
9112**** `Dired' supports Unix-style shell wildcards.
9113
9114**** The `c-macro-expand' command now works as on other platforms.
9115
9116**** `M-x recover-session' works.
9117
9118**** `M-x list-colors-display' displays all the available colors.
9119
9120**** The `TPU-EDT' package works.
9121\f
9122* Lisp changes in Emacs 19.31.
9123
9124** The function using-unix-filesystems on Windows NT and Windows 95
9125tells Emacs to read and write files assuming that they reside on a
9126remote Unix filesystem. No CR/LF translation is done on any files in
9127this case. Invoking using-unix-filesystems with t activates this
9128behavior, and invoking it with any other value deactivates it.
9129
9130** Change in system-type and system-configuration values.
9131
9132The value of system-type on a Linux-based GNU system is now `lignux',
9133not `linux'. This means that some programs which use `system-type'
9134need to be changed. The value of `system-configuration' will also
9135be different.
9136
9137It is generally recommended to use `system-configuration' rather
9138than `system-type'.
9139
9140See the file LINUX-GNU in this directory for more about this.
9141
9142** The functions shell-command and dired-call-process
9143now run file name handlers for default-directory, if it has them.
9144
9145** Undoing the deletion of text now restores the positions of markers
9146that pointed into or next to the deleted text.
9147
9148** Timers created with run-at-time now work internally to Emacs, and
9149no longer use a separate process. Therefore, they now work more
9150reliably and can be used for shorter time delays.
9151
9152The new function run-with-timer is a convenient way to set up a timer
9153to run a specified amount of time after the present. A call looks
9154like this:
9155
9156 (run-with-timer SECS REPEAT FUNCTION ARGS...)
9157
9158SECS says how many seconds should elapse before the timer happens.
9159It may be an integer or a floating point number. When the timer
9160becomes ripe, the action is to call FUNCTION with arguments ARGS.
9161
9162REPEAT gives the interval for repeating the timer (measured in
9163seconds). It may be an integer or a floating point number. nil or 0
9164means don't repeat at all--call FUNCTION just once.
9165
9166*** with-timeout provides an easy way to do something but give
9167up if too much time passes.
9168
9169 (with-timeout (SECONDS TIMEOUT-FORMS...) BODY...)
9170
9171This executes BODY, but gives up after SECONDS seconds.
9172If it gives up, it runs the TIMEOUT-FORMS and returns the value
9173of the last one of them. Normally it returns the value of the last
9174form in BODY.
9175
9176*** You can now arrange to call a function whenever Emacs is idle for
9177a certain length of time. To do this, call run-with-idle-timer. A
9178call looks like this:
9179
9180 (run-with-idle-timer SECS REPEAT FUNCTION ARGS...)
9181
9182SECS says how many seconds of idleness should elapse before the timer
9183runs. It may be an integer or a floating point number. When the
9184timer becomes ripe, the action is to call FUNCTION with arguments
9185ARGS.
9186
9187Emacs becomes idle whenever it finishes executing a keyboard or mouse
9188command. It remains idle until it receives another keyboard or mouse
9189command.
9190
9191REPEAT, if non-nil, means this timer should be activated again each
9192time Emacs becomes idle and remains idle for SECS seconds The timer
9193does not repeat if Emacs *remains* idle; it runs at most once after
9194each time Emacs becomes idle.
9195
9196If REPEAT is nil, the timer runs just once, the first time Emacs is
9197idle for SECS seconds.
9198
9199*** post-command-idle-hook is now obsolete; you shouldn't use it at
9200all, because it interferes with the idle timer mechanism. If your
9201programs use post-command-idle-hook, convert them to use idle timers
9202instead.
9203
9204*** y-or-n-p-with-timeout lets you ask a question but give up if
9205there is no answer within a certain time.
9206
9207 (y-or-n-p-with-timeout PROMPT SECONDS DEFAULT-VALUE)
9208
9209asks the question PROMPT (just like y-or-n-p). If the user answers
9210within SECONDS seconds, it returns the answer that the user gave.
9211Otherwise it gives up after SECONDS seconds, and returns DEFAULT-VALUE.
9212
9213** Minor change to `encode-time': you can now pass more than seven
9214arguments. If you do that, the first six arguments have the usual
9215meaning, the last argument is interpreted as the time zone, and the
9216arguments in between are ignored.
9217
9218This means that it works to use the list returned by `decode-time' as
9219the list of arguments for `encode-time'.
9220
9221** The default value of load-path now includes the directory
9222/usr/local/share/emacs/VERSION/site-lisp In addition to
9223/usr/local/share/emacs/site-lisp. You can use this new directory for
9224site-specific Lisp packages that belong with a particular Emacs
9225version.
9226
9227It is not unusual for a Lisp package that works well in one Emacs
9228version to cause trouble in another. Sometimes packages need updating
9229for incompatible changes; sometimes they look at internal data that
9230has changed; sometimes the package has been installed in Emacs itself
9231and the installed version should be used. Whatever the reason for the
9232problem, this new feature makes it easier to solve.
9233
9234** When your program contains a fixed file name (like .completions or
9235.abbrev.defs), the file name usually needs to be different on operating
9236systems with limited file name syntax.
9237
9238Now you can avoid ad-hoc conditionals by using the function
9239convert-standard-filename to convert the file name to a proper form
9240for each operating system. Here is an example of use, from the file
9241completions.el:
9242
9243(defvar save-completions-file-name
9244 (convert-standard-filename "~/.completions")
9245 "*The filename to save completions to.")
9246
9247This sets the variable save-completions-file-name to a value that
9248depends on the operating system, because the definition of
9249convert-standard-filename depends on the operating system. On
9250Unix-like systems, it returns the specified file name unchanged. On
9251MS-DOS, it adapts the name to fit the limitations of that system.
9252
9253** The interactive spec N now returns the numeric prefix argument
9254rather than the raw prefix argument. (It still reads a number using the
9255minibuffer if there is no prefix argument at all.)
9256
9257** When a process is deleted, this no longer disconnects the process
9258marker from its buffer position.
9259
9260** The variable garbage-collection-messages now controls whether
9261Emacs displays a message at the beginning and end of garbage collection.
9262The default is nil, meaning there are no messages.
9263
9264** The variable debug-ignored-errors specifies certain kinds of errors
9265that should not enter the debugger. Its value is a list of error
9266condition symbols and/or regular expressions. If the error has any
9267of the condition symbols listed, or if any of the regular expressions
9268matches the error message, then that error does not enter the debugger,
9269regardless of the value of debug-on-error.
9270
9271This variable is initialized to match certain common but uninteresting
9272errors that happen often during editing.
9273
9274** The new function error-message-string converts an error datum
9275into its error message. The error datum is what condition-case
9276puts into the variable, to describe the error that happened.
9277
9278** Anything that changes which buffer appears in a given window
9279now runs the window-scroll-functions for that window.
9280
9281** The new function get-buffer-window-list returns a list of windows displaying
9282a buffer. The function is called with the buffer (a buffer object or a buffer
9283name) and two optional arguments specifying the minibuffer windows and frames
9284to search. Therefore this function takes optional args like next-window etc.,
9285and not get-buffer-window.
9286
9287** buffer-substring now runs the hook buffer-access-fontify-functions,
9288calling each function with two arguments--the range of the buffer
9289being accessed. buffer-substring-no-properties does not call them.
9290
9291If you use this feature, you should set the variable
9292buffer-access-fontified-property to a non-nil symbol, which is a
9293property name. Then, if all the characters in the buffer range have a
9294non-nil value for that property, the buffer-access-fontify-functions
9295are not called. When called, these functions should put a non-nil
9296property on the text that they fontify, so that they won't get called
9297over and over for the same text.
9298
9299** Changes in lisp-mnt.el
9300
9301*** The lisp-mnt package can now recognize file headers that are written
9302in the formats used by the `what' command and the RCS `ident' command:
9303
9304;; @(#) HEADER: text
9305;; $HEADER: text $
9306
9307in addition to the normal
9308
9309;; HEADER: text
9310
9311*** The commands lm-verify and lm-synopsis are now interactive. lm-verify
9312checks that the library file has proper sections and headers, and
9313lm-synopsis extracts first line "synopsis'"information.
9314
9315
a933dad1 9316\f
3787e12e 9317* For older news, see the file ONEWS
a933dad1
DL
9318
9319----------------------------------------------------------------------
9320Copyright information:
9321
424d8b44 9322Copyright (C) 1999, 2000 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
a933dad1
DL
9323
9324 Permission is granted to anyone to make or distribute verbatim copies
9325 of this document as received, in any medium, provided that the
9326 copyright notice and this permission notice are preserved,
9327 thus giving the recipient permission to redistribute in turn.
9328
9329 Permission is granted to distribute modified versions
9330 of this document, or of portions of it,
9331 under the above conditions, provided also that they
9332 carry prominent notices stating who last changed them.
9333\f
9334Local variables:
9335mode: outline
9336paragraph-separate: "[ \f]*$"
9337end: